audio book of, 
SECRETS  OF  THE    ufo,
By DON   ELKINS WITH  CARLA  RUECKERT. May, 77.






CHAPTER  ONE.

A  VERY  STRANGE  PHENOMENON.
The information  in this book is either nonsense or it is the most centrally important  thing  that 
 you could possibly learn. It is allegedly  the answer  to the strange riddle of the UFO's. The 
information  contained  herein is not speculation  or theory,  but  a condensation  and edited 
arrangement  of received communications from the UFOs. The obvious weakness  of this contactee  
information  is that evidential  proof of its validity  is not  obtainable.  Its strength lies in 
its sheer  bulk and in the similarity  of  messages produced by sources widely scattered  around 
the world.  The last  z} years have produced millions of words of these communications allegedly 
originating  within  the UFOs.
Approximately  I}  million people in the U.S. have reported seeing  UFOs, more than zooo contact  
cases have been reported,  and about 7oo landings have left  trace evidence,I There is no longer 
any real doubt  that  UFOs exist.
The question  is: who are they? And why are they here?  It is quite possible that  understanding  
them is the most important  endeavor which we can undertake.
There are thousands  of people around the world who are quite certain that they know at least some 
of the answers to the riddles of these elusive manifestations.
How did these people acquire  the needed information?  Their answer—one which many find hard to 
believe—is  that  they have been in contact  with the occupants  of the UFOs. There has been a 
widespread  and growing pattern of people who claim contact  with UFOs since  the early  ’Nos. At 
this point, the claims are so widespread  that  they constitute a pseudo-secret  subculture, a sort 
of underground  group,  all over earth. I  say pseudo-secret  because even though many of these 
contactees  tell their stories,  the information  is of a type that our culture does not easily 
accept.  The insiders in this  underground  all seem  to be getting approximately  the same 
information,  and they can be found in many places both in the United States and all over the 
world.
They are not all wide-eyed  cultists,  three steps in front of the men in white coats,  nor are 
they little old ladies fresh from the medium's  parlor.
Primarily,  contactees  are normal people of average intelligence  and background.  Each year 
produces more of them. Few of these people receive or desire publicity.




I've been studying paranormal  phenomenon  for 25  years, and for the past 14 years I've 
specialized in unraveling the contactee  riddle. You will find in reading through this book that it 
requires some background  in paranormal studies. The first three chapters of the book are intended 
to function  as a synopsis of this background,  and the bibliography is available to those who wish 
to pursue this field in greater depth. A great deal of apparently unrelated  material  begins to 
substantively add to the evidence available in the UFO contactee literature, once this mountain  of 
contactee data is condensed. I am now in a position  to make such a condensation,  and this 
analysis of the contactee story turns into an explanation of the nature, purpose, origin, and 
ultimate objective of at least one large group of UFOs.
The entire situation  regarding the contactees  reminds me of something which the late Dr. James E. 
McDonald said to Congress in Ip68. He was reporting to the House Committee on Aeronautics and 
Astronautics  on his conclusions  regarding UFOs. He described a situation in northern  France 
years ago, where many peasants  reported stones falling from the sky. Since the reporters were 
“dumb” and “unscientific,” they were ignored at first.
Finally a scientist took the reports seriously and investigated  the thing fully. Thus was born the 
science of meteoritics. Dr.  McDonald suggested  to Congress that in dealing with UFO reports, we 
now face a “very similar situation in science. We have tended to ignore it because it didn't make 
any sense. It definitely defies any explanation, and hence the situation  has evolved where we 
can't get going because we aren't already going.”
Consider  the case of Travis Walton of Snowflake, Arizona,  taken aboard a UFO on November   , 
'97s, in plain sight of six witnesses. The witnesses were given lie detector  tests. All tests 
showed  the witnesses were telling the
truth. Travis himself showed  up five days later. He was twelve miles from the place he had been 
taken on board. He had a story to tell that involved his waking up inside the ship and finding 
several very odd-looking creatures examining him, as well as four perfectly normal-looking human 
types.
Now, these details are pretty solid. Dr. James Harder, director of Research for the Aerial 
Phenomena  Research Organization,  personally investigated the case and stated that he felt there 
was no hoax involved. The lie detector tests given to the witnesses support the data. All 
indications are that this contact is authentic.
In spite of this, the news coverage was so conditioned  by the old ridicule lid of the ufos that 
few Americans  found out about it until months after the occurrence.




Various UFO research groups such as APRO and MUFON  (for complete listings, see bibliography)  put 
out many reports, such as that of the Travis Walton  case, which the national press passes  by. And 
so the underground becomes  more and more certain that UFOs are real and are communicating with us, 
while the cultural community as a whole continues to not know much of the important  data.
This gap in knowledge was at one time at least in great  part attributable  to the U. S.  government's  handling of investigations into the phenomena.  In the late Ip4os and early  ’Nos, 
when the sightings  and stories were gaining momentum,  the Air Force,  like almost  everyone else, 
was mystified.  In addition,  they were responsible  for the safety of American  skies.  They were 
embarrassed  and concerned about  these unidentified  flying objects.  These were the days of 
backyard  bomb shelters;  the national feeling was that Russia might well launch a nuclear attack. 
So it is quite understandable that the Air Force was extremely upset  about  their inability to 
explain  the phenomena.  The result  was that  the UFO    phenomena was brushed off, officially,  
as being a ridiculous  fantasy.  In this atmosphere,  the reliable witness was liable to refrain 
from reporting  his UFO    experience,  because it might  damage his reputation.  Dr.  J.  Allen 
Hynek spoke about  this problem in  If  y3:
.  nothing constructive  is accomplished  ...   for science in the long run—by mere ridicule  and 
the implication  that sightings  are the products of “birdbrains”  and “intellectual  flyweights,”  
...   Ridicule is not part of the scientific method and people should not be taught  that it is.i
After Project  Blue Book came into its own,  the Air Force became gradually more confident  that  
the UFOs were not a threat  to American  security,  but by this time the habit of ridicule of UFO  
sightings  and sighters was well set. Gradually,  the official nature of the ridicule lid has 
vanished,  although  still today  there is a military  injunction  against  servicemen  reporting  
UFOs before they have  been debriefed.  But the habit  of ridicule is still in effect, and has 
continued  to successfully  stop the free flow of information  on the subject  that  is so 
necessary for the average  citizen  to have before he can  really decide for himself about UFOs. As 
Jacobs notes in his book on the
history of the UFO    controversy,  Hynek first polled 44 astronomers  for their interest  in the 
UFO    phenomena,  and found that only 17% Of them were interested.  He  wrote them,  then,  about  
several particularly  unusual and
provocative sightings,  and re-polled  for interest:  nearly all of the




astronomers  had become  interested in UFOs. As Hynek said,  “their general lethargy  is due to 
lack of information.”4
In countries where UFO    sighting information  has been as freely distributed as any other news,  
there is a much more energetic  feeling among  the general populace about  the significance of 
UFOs.
There is a basic problem encountered  by those trying  to use the scientific method  to investigate 
 UFOs. When one begins  to investigate  a new phenomenon,  he needs  to start from some aspect of 
the phenomenon  which is linked to present  theory.  The UFO   phenomena does not easily
“compute”  on the calculators  of our present  system of physical measurements  and predictive 
judgment.  I  think that  it is this reason more than any other which discourages  most scientists  
and keeps even interested men from  undertaking  active investigation. Ufology is a frustrating 
discipline  to a scientist.  Since it is already unfashionable  to be a UFO investigator,  this 
frustration completes  the decision,  and only the most daring of the scientific community  will 
link their names with UFO   studies. This set of circumstances  is also true of the whole field of 
paranormal research,  of course,  of which UFOs is properly  a part.
It has been my personal  experience  that many of the researchers  in ufology will, while appearing 
 most conservative  for the record,  confide in sympathetic  company  their more esoteric  
theories.  Some of the more experienced of these people are truly daring  the outer limits of 
knowledge  in general.  I  think it's high time that  these outer limits  be made more generally 
known.
I've been at this pursuit  of UFO   understanding  for over z} years now. I've tried to maintain  a 
totally open-minded  approach  to the study,  considering no piece of evidence  too small or too 
ridiculous  to consider.  The theory which has gradually emerged  from this approach  may seem a 
bit wild or absurd,  but it is dealing with a wild and absurd  bunch of data.  The one thing that  
recommends  the theory is that  almost  all reports which come in day by day seem  to fit into it 
very well.  One   thing  to remember:  almost everything which we now accept  as normal in our 
present  technology  would have been considered  a wild and absurd impossibility  a scant  loo 
years ago. We do not know how many millennia ahead of our present  understanding the UFOs might be.
I  have chosen not  to abide within  the approved scientific method of verification  of accepted 
data within  the boundaries of currently  accepted scientific opinion because  this method has 
proven a tool ineffectual in



dealing with this phenomena.  I  make  the assumption  that  the reason  for this lack is that  the 
system  is set  up to investigate  the present  level of reality within our technological  and 
scientific nexus of thought.  I  make  the further assumption  that  the nexus of thinking  or 
technology  which underlies  the UFO    manifestations may not have any close connection  to our 
present Earthman's philosophy  of reality.  History is replete with examples  of the events in 
which reality itself proved unconformable  with the current scientific or philosophical  thinking.  
I  think it is happening  again. We
thought  that  the Earth was flat at one time.  Less than 4      years ago, Giordano  Bruno was 
burned at the stake for suggesting  that  the Earth revolved around  the sun. Now, again,  there 
really does seem  to be a growing amount  of evidence  pointing  to the existence  of a totally 
different  type of
reality  than is generally appreciated  by our philosophy.
If  you ask anyone you meet  on the street  whether he believes UFOs are real, over half will 
answer,  yes,  they probably  are. Most people have a lively interest  in the subject  and when a 
case is covered  in their newspaper,  read it and ponder  it. But because most UFO    cases are not 
covered in newspapers, the general public does not receive  a great percentage of the very 
prevalent UFO    contact  information.  The lack of coverage  is not the only reason  that many UFO 
  cases go unreported.  There are other reasons:
I.     The  person who is contacted  by the UFO is afraid to tell about his experience,  because he 
fears ridicule.
The contactee  has no knowledge of UFO  investigating  organizations, and receives only incredulity 
 from  the people  to whom he does  tell his story.  He  would like to share his experience  but 
does not feel he will be believed.
The  contactee may not remember  his contact experience  consciously, because of a memory block 
affected  by the UFOnauts.
UFO   researchers  have found these three causes for “silent” contactees  to prevail again and 
again,  and it is theorized  that a large percentage of contact cases are never discovered  by 
investigators. The pioneer ufologist,  Dr.  J. Allen Hynek,  has estimated  that  around the world 
there are about  too UFO sightings every day,  though most of these remain  unreported.
But there are still an incredible number of cases that we do know about. There is at present such a 
tremendous  number of well-documented cases of contact with UFO occupants  that Dr. Hynek has 
stated that it's high time we stopped looking for eggs, and started making the omelet. The problem



is, of course, that these eggs are so weird that we're afraid to crack them open to make the 
omelet. This book is intended as an attempt to make this omelet, even if its taste is offensively 
pungent to some theorists'  palates.
But before I  begin, I  would like to look at just  a few “eggs” with you. I want you to get an 
idea of just how strange  these eggs really are.  So I've taken a sample of some fifteen cases,  
all of them UFO   sightings  which include a close contact  with the UFO    occupants.  These few 
cases are taken from  the many which are reported by the investigating  organizations  such as 
APRO, MUFON,  and FLYING SAUCER REVIEW. Look in the Bibliography  at the back of the book for a 
list of these information  sources  complete with addresses.  I  will not  bore you with the 
well-known  cases of the If  JoS. This is a small sampling  of more recent cases,  in order  to 
establish how common these UFO    contact  reports  are,  and to give you the flavor of  the 
concoction these “eggs”  are going  to make.
CASE NUMBER i
Date: IQ63
Place: Fern Creek, Ky.
Investigators: Col. Verne Yahne,  Ky. Air National Guard; D.T. Elkins,
Independent  Investigator
Four young boys, aged } tO Iz, observed a disc-shaped craft as it landed behind a small woods near 
where they were playing. A humanoid  clad in a space suit, about four feet tall, emerged from the 
woods. Two of the boys threw dirt clods at the entity to provoke it into some action. The entity 
then shot them with a small black rod, producing a tingling sensation and slight pain. When the 
boys were individually questioned,  all four stories matched. The  description of the humanoid 
which they gave matched  information  in NICAP files of more than zoo other sightings in the Ohio 
River Valley area in considerable and exact detail.
The  boys' mother stated that she got a “message in her head”  (telepathic)  to call the University 
of Louisville shortly after she called the National Guard to report  the sighting.
Small footprints and clear landing marks were found. A day later, two unidentified  men visited the 
landing site and eradicated  the landing evidence. Although  they stated that they were from the 
University of Louisville,  this was checked out and found to be untrue.
CASE NUMBER 
Date: Ip6},  and continuing,  to the present.



Place: Spain
Investigators: Antonio  Ribera and Rafael Farriols,  both  ufologists in Spain.
A  planet called UMMO began contacting  various people in Spain in ip6  . The people were 
well-respected and educated:  a writer,  an engineer,  a lawyer, etc. The contacts would  be by 
telephone,  and the contactee was invited  to ask questions  of the Ummites.  Later,  a report  
answering  the question would come in the mail.
These reports were signed with a thumbprint  bearing  a distinctive  mark much like the alchemical  
symbol for Uranus,  an “H”   with a shorter vertical line through  the bar. The contactees  were 
told that  the Ummo craft would be at  a certain  place on a certain date.  The  craft  showed up 
on schedule  and pictures were taken of  it. On  the bottom of  the craft  there is the cross- 
barred “H”   symbol.
The reports have continued  to come in through  the intervening  years,  and speak on many 
technical subjects,  such as physics and biology.  The  “Ummo”  words which are used in these 
reports,  when collected  together  and considered,  form a self-consistent language structure.  
They say that  they are from a planet  which revolves  around a star which they have  tentatively
identified  as being our “Wolf 4*4.” and that  they were first  attracted  to our solar system  by 
a radio signal which was sent from Earth in Ip34.  They gave the frequency of the signal (4I3.44 
megacycles).  Between  the ages of it  and I6 the vocal chords of the children  become sclerosed  
and for this reason most of the adult  inhabitants  of Ummo are unable  to talk and must  use
telepathy.
These Ummo reports are an exceptionally interesting instance of UFO contact, and they continue at 
the present time. FLYING SAUCER REVIEW occasionally updates this continuing story.
CASE NUMBER 3
Date: May 4—s. 's*s
Place: Bebedouro,  Brazil
Investigator:  Hulvio B. Aleixo of CICOANI,  a research group of Belo
Horizante,  Brazil.
Jose Antonio da Si=lv4a,-ayear-old soldier of excellent  personal character and reputation,  was 
abducted  by small,  red-bearded  humanoids  who  forcibly took him aboard their craft. During his 
confinement  aboard their strange vessel,  a fair,  tall, human-looking  being appeared  to him,  
though  the smaller  aliens did not seem to be able to see him. This being warned da Silva of a danger which involved  the whole of mankind which might be avoided if man on Earth 
changed his ways. Da Silva was told that intervention  by unknown  beings, and possible calamities, 
 might  be involved.
Twelve days after his abduction,  da Silva was awakened  by a sudden urge to go outside.  He  did 
so and saw three of the red-bearded  aliens,  who had apparently  summoned  him telepathically. He  
quickly re-entered  his house and locked the door against  them, for he felt  that part of the 
danger  to come might  involve  them.

CASE NUMBER 4.
Date: Summer,  I973
Places: All over Pennsylvania
Investigator:  Stan Gordon, MUFON State Director
Because  this is a report  of  II8 separate  contacts with unknown  creatures,  the date and place 
have to be generalized.  These reports vary somewhat  but have the primary details more or less in 
common.  The salient  feature of these  cases is the creature or creatures who are sighted.  They 
are hairy,  ape-like beings with glowing eyes and apparent  ears,  large noses,  fang-like  teeth,  
and the long arms of an ape. Where Gordon was able to take footprint  casts,  the print was a large 
and three-toed  track.  The  sightings were,  in the majority,  in wooded  areas or near rural or 
small-town  homes.  During  the sighting, animals would be still,  but  before and after a 
sighting,  both animals and small children  acted as though they were quite disturbed,  cows 
huddling, dogs  barking,  children crying all night. These creatures  have been sighted often in 
connection  with UFO   sightings,  have been seen entering and leaving UFOs,  and on occasion  a 
telepathic communication  from a source connected with the creatures  has been reported.  In  three 
of  these
encounters,  a creature has been shot.  One  was shot with a 3o-o6 (see Case Number  6). Another  
was shot with a I6  ga. shotgun at close range,  and the third with a .38 pistol. The latter  two 
creatures  both disappeared  in a flash of light, like a photo-flash  bulb going off, on being 
shot.
CASE NUMBER  J
Date: Io-II-73
Place: Pascagoula,  Mississippi
Investigators: Dr. J. Allen  Hynek, Chairman  of the Dept. of Astronomy, Northwestern  University;  
Director, Center for UFO Studies; Dr. James A. Harder, Prof. of Civil Engineering,  University of 
California;  Director of Research, APRO.

I

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


Charles Hickson,  age 4›, and 18-year-old Calvin Parker were fishing when an oblong,  blue-gray 
craft 3j tO to   feet long descended  and hovered  near them.  The craft made a “zipping”  noise. A 
 door appeared in the craft and three humanoids  or robots came out and approached  the two men. 
Like their craft,  these entities did not  touch the ground but moved just above it, proceeding 
without  moving  their legs.  The entities were short and had elephant-hide  skin, slits for eyes,  
and pincer-like  hands.
When Parker saw the entities approach,  he passed out. Hickson was paralyzed,  but was able to 
continue observing  what happened.  Two of the entities picked up Hickson  by his arms and carried 
him inside  the ship.
When he was picked up, Hickson lost  all feeling,  including  that of weight. He  was taken  to a 
bare,  brightly-lit  room. He  could not see where  the light came from. The entities placed him in 
a reclining position, still “floating”  in air, and an eye-like  instrument  scanned  back and 
forth across his body with thoroughness,  as if  it were examining or photographing  him. This 
episode lasted somewhere  between If  and to  minutes,  Hickson is not at all sure about  the time. 
After the examination  was over,  the entities left Hickson alone for a while, and then “floated”  
him back to where  they had picked  him up on the river  bank.
About  an hour later,  the two shaken  fishermen went  to the sheriffs office  to report  their 
story. They were interrogated  exhaustively  and afterwards were left alone,  in a “bugged”  room. 
The recording  of their conversation  at that time reveals that  both men were quite frightened  by 
their experience,  the emotional  trauma having  been so great  to Parker  that, after Hickson  
left the room,  he began  to pray.  Ultimately he suffered a nervous  breakdown  as a result  of 
this experience.
Hickson,  though plagued with nightmares, and continuing feelings of terror about the experience,  
came through it better, and was able to work with investigators who wished  to ascertain  the truth 
about his experience. A z1/2 hour lie detector test, given by a highly skeptical  polygraph 
operator, revealed that Hickson was telling the truth. When Dr. Harder  used the technique of time 
regression  hypnosis on Hickson,  he too felt that Hickson was telling the truth about the 
experience,  for he said “a strong feeling of terror is practically impossible  to fake under 
hypnosis.”
CASE NUMBER 6
Date: IO-Li-73
Place: Greensburg,  Pennsylvania
Investigator:  Berthold  Eric Schwarz,  M.D., Consultant,  Brain Wave

I7

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


Laboratory,  Essex Co. Hospital Center, Cedar Grove, New Jersey,
Consultant  to FLYING SAUCER RFVIEW.
This case is perhaps the most  interesting  and many-faceted  of the i88 Pennsylvania creature 
sightings  included  in Case Number 4. It began at nine o'clock at night, when a young farmer,  
called Stephen Pulaski in the report  given in FLYING SAUCER REVIEW,  and at least  fifteen other 
witnesses  saw a bright red ball hovering over a field near them. Stephen grabbed a 3o.o6 rifle, 
and he and two ten-year old neighbor  boys went  to investigate  it. Stephen's  auto headlights  
dimmed as he neared the object,  and as the object descended  towards  the field, Stephen's  German 
Shepherd, back at  the house,  became very disturbed.  The object was now bright white, and 
appeared  to be about  loo feet  in diameter.  It was  buzzing much like a lawnmower  would.
They stood watching  the object on the ground,  and then the neighbor  boys saw something  walking 
along by the fence.  Stephen  thought  it looked like two bears,  and he fired a tracer  bullet 
over the “bears” heads.  The creatures were very tall, one 7  feet,  the other over 8 feet  tall. 
These measurements
were easier  than usual to get  because  the entities were silhouetted  against  the
fence and so could be accurately judged.  They were hairy and long-armed, with greenish-yellow 
eyes.  They made a noise like a baby whining.  A  smell like “burning  rubber”  was present.  
Stephen,  realizing  that  these creatures were not  bears and that  they were coming nearer to 
him, fired over the entities’  heads once more and, when they kept on coming,  fired directly at 
the larger creature.
When the creature was hit, the glowing  mo ft. diameter  object disappeared from the field, 
instantaneously, and the motor noise stopped.  The two creatures  turned around and walked back 
towards  the woods. In the field where  the object  had been was a glowing  area about  no   feet 
in diameter, which was gone by the next  morning.  While it was still there, a State Trooper  who 
came  to investigate  the story went  up to within zoo yards of  it,  then stopped,  went  back to 
call in the UFO    researcher  Stan Gordon.  The Trooper  felt  that Stephen was so disturbed  that 
 it was better  that  he be watched—and  Stephen wouldn't  go near  the glowing  area.
It was z a.m. when Stan Gordon's  Study Group team and Stephen  and his father went  back to the 
landing site. The animals were acting scared,  and Stephen's  dog was tracking something  which no 
one could see at the edge of the woods.  Suddenly Stephen  began rubbing his head and face and 
looking as though he were about  to faint.  Several people approached  him,  but he

I

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


threw them off, growling like an animal and flailing his arms. His own dog ran towards him and 
Stephen attacked  the dog. Two of the investigators
also experienced  some feelings of lightheartedness and difficulty in breathing
at this point.
Stephen  continued  running around,  growling  and swinging  his arms,  and then collapsed in a 
manured area,  face-down.  He  lay there for a time,  then began to come to himself,  and said,  
“Get away from me. It's here.  Get back.”  Sulfur-like odor was noticed.  Stephen  and the group 
got away from the area,  but Stephen  kept mumbling  that he would protect  the group.  He said he 
saw a man in a black hat and cloak, who told Stephen,  “If  Man doesn't  straighten  up, the end is 
near.” The man also told Stephen,  “There is a man here now, who can save the world.”  Needless  to 
say,  the investigators  present  felt quite concerned  about Stephen’s health,  and it was here 
that Dr.   Schwarz was called in. Dr.  Schwarz's  subsequent  psychiatric study of Stephen yielded  
results  that he feels point  clearly  to the incident having occurred just  as reported,  for 
indeed it would be terrifying for a man such as Stephen,  used to a very practical and realistic 
type of life,  to shoot and hit an 8-foot  antagonist  which then was not harmed in any way. The 
numerous  other witnesses  to the various phases of the incident  also  bear out its having 
happened.  Who was the man in black, and what do the predictions  about Mankind really mean?  That  
is a matter for interpretation. But that Stephen had the experience  has been thoroughly  
documented.
CASE NUMBER 7
Date: IO-2  -73
Place: Bahia Blanca, Argentina
Investigator:  Liria D. Jauregui, APRO Investigator
Very early in the morning,  truck driver Dionisio Llanca had a flat  tire and pulled off the road 
in an isolated area. As he set up the jack to change  the tire, he saw lights in the distance,  but 
 thought  little of them until, as they approached,  they suddenly changed to a brilliant  blue. 
When Llanca tried to get  up and look for the source of this odd light he found he was apparently 
paralyzed and could not move.  He  was able to see,  however,  as a dome- topped disc came  to 
rest,  hovering just  above  the ground near the truck.  On the ground  by the craft were three 
humanoid entities,  two men and a woman.  They had long blond hair and elongated eyes, and wore 
silver,  one- piece suits with high boots,  no helmets,  no weapons.
After the entities had talked among  themselves,  one of them lifted Llanca by the neck of his 
sweater.  Llanca was desperately  frightened,  but the man put

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


a small black  box against  his left index finger and instantly he began  to relax. In a few 
seconds,  he was unconscious.
The next morning  he awakened on the roadside  and made his way back to civilization.  He  told his 
story and investigation  was undertaken,  but although competent  doctors  used hypnotherapy  and 
truth serum with Llanca,  he could not  remember  a portion of his experiences  aboard  the craft. 
He  was able to tell the investigators  that  these entities had been contacting people on Earth 
“since If   o,”  and that  their purpose was to discover   whether Earthmen  could live in their 
world. He  described  the interior of the ship,  and said that he went  into the ship not  by 
stairs or a ramp,  but on a  ray of light. But he reported  that  the beings did not want him  to 
remember some of his experience  aboard  their craft, and he would not  be able to. The message  
that came from him after intense probing for information  was this, “I  have a message  from the 
beings in the craft  but I  can't  tell you what  it is.
No  matter what you or any other Earth scientists  do, there will remain  the
memory lapse while I was on the ship.”
The medical personnel working on this case agree with this statement,  and feel that  to probe any 
deeper in Llanca's subconscious  for this experience might  damage his health.  But  they feel that 
his experience  was,  though unbelievable,  quite real.
CASE NUMBER 8
Date: I-7—74
Place: Warneton,  Belgium
Investigators: Mssrs. Bazin Sr. and Jr., Mr. Bigorne,  Mr. Boidin, MUFON
investigators.
An anonymous  witness driving  along  the French-Belgian border experienced engine failure.  His 
lights and radio also went  out. At  this point  he saw a landed UFO    about  mo yards away across 
a field.  The   o-foot wide craft was shaped like a World War I British helmet  and was glowing  a 
patchy orange, with white light coming  from beneath it. Two entities were walking slowly
and stiffly toward the witness.  Both were about 4 feet  tall, with grayish skin, round eyes, a 
rudimentary  nose,  and a slit-like,  lipless mouth.  They wore helmets  and metallic gray 
coverall-type  uniforms.  One  had an object  in his
hand shaped like a short,  thick ruler with a pointed tip. He  was aiming it at the car.
When the beings came to within Iz  feet of the car, one of them opened and closed his mouth and the 
witness felt a slight shock at the back of his head and heard a low-pitched,  modulated sound. Then 
the entities  turned about

CrtAPTER  ONE: A VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


and reboarded  their craft, which began pulsating an electric-blue glow. Its tripod legs withdrew,  
it rose and hovered momentarily,  then rapidly ascended at a 6o-degree angle. As the witness 
prepared to leave the site, another car drove up; its driver had also seen the UFO and the beings.
CASE NUMBER p
Date: Easter Sunday,  's74
Place: Bardstown,  Ky.
Investigators: Lawrence Allison and D.  T.  Elkins.
A boy in his late teens was driving alone at night and wondering why he was doing so—he had almost 
compulsively gone out to take the ride and had no purpose in mind—when  a man appeared  beside him 
in the car. He asked the startled boy if he remembered  him, which he did not.
Then suddenly he was inside a large room, he and his car. The “passenger” welcomed him aboard, and 
proceeded  to show the boy around the craft.
After the tour was completed,  the guide, who looked like a normal Earth man and was casually 
dressed in a shirt and blue jeans, asked him to get back into his car. The boy did so and found 
himself suddenly back on the road.
Investigations to find more details of this encounter are continuing.
CASE NUMBER io
Date: 4—*   —74
Place: Whitehouse,  Ohio
Investigators: Earl Neff and Larry Moyers, MUFON field investigators.
“Sam” (an alias) had spent  an evening with a friend who claimed to be a contactee  of the UFOs.  
During this meeting,  he had asked the contactee  for proof of the UFO's reality.  On   the way 
home from work the next  night, shortly after midnight,  his car's engine and light died. As he got 
out of the car he noticed another car stop behind him. A very prosperous-looking, gray-haired  man 
got out of the car and came over to him. This normal looking human  then offered Sam “proof,”  by 
dematerializing a rock with a small hand-held  implement.  Then he told Sam to “save his marriage,” 
 and promised that he would  be contacted  again.
CASE NUMBER ii
Date: y-=*-74
Place: Mitchell Caverns, California.
Investigator:  Idabel Epperson,  MUFON field investigator.

II

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


This witness  had seen UFOs several times in the past. One  evening he was awakened  in his camper  
by a humming sound and pulsating lights. He tried to call his family,  but was immobilised.  He saw 
four pinwheels of odd- shaped colored lights, red, orange, yellow, and blue-green.  He awoke the 
next morning with bloodshot eyes and an aching body. It was two hours later than his usual rising 
time.
He  had impressions  of having been inside a UFO, but a memory lapse blocked out details. At a 
later date,  under hypnosis,  he recalled  being inside the craft  and described a row of 
gyroscopes  along an inner wall.  “The pinwheels  of colored lights energized  these  to form an 
artificial  gravity  field.” He  had seen eight  men, normal-looking, seven of them dressed  in 
maroon “foil-like”  uniforms,  the eighth clad in a soft, pale-blue outfit. He saw a view screen 
which was showing  a close-up  view of Saturn,  a control panel,  and three recliner-type  chairs.  
The entities examined his eyes with a magnifying  glass. The witness says  that he expects  to 
receive further contacts from these entities.
CASE NUMBER iz
Date: p—3—74
Place: Duxbury,  Mass.
Investigator: John Giambrone,  MUFON field investigator.
One  day, early in the morning,  this very reluctant woman witnessed a red pulsating  UFO    at 
treetop level,  and two light beams which shone across  the bog caused her car to die, while the 
radio gave out static. Not long after  this incident,  the woman got a telepathic  message  to 
drive her car down a certain road, which she did. Again the radio and engine quit,  but  this time 
four small humanoids  appeared,  moving rapidly  towards  her, each astride a small vehicle  that  
looked like a roto-tiller  but moving rapidly above rather  than on the ground.  One  of the 
entities approached  her car and telepathically asked her to open the door,  but when she did not 
comply,  all four doors flew open anyway.  The entity examined her and touched her on the nape of 
the neck with a small implement  which left five small puncture  marks.  She was told that  they 
have thousands of ships which have been visiting Earth for many years. They have a mother ship 
nearby, she was told,  and their home planet is called “Omnius”  or “Omnigus.”  They have examined 
many people,  not  all of them voluntarily.  She was asked not to touch them because of possible 
contamination  and was warned  that she would have severe headaches  for several weeks after this 
contact.  These entities were four to five feet  tall, had helmets  on which concealed  their faces 
 but  through which small,  shiny eyes

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


could be seen. They were dressed  in uniforms,  the belts of which featured an emblem with vertical 
wavy lines.
This witness was terrified by this encounter  and has refused  to allow any investigation  by any 
group. The details given here were supplied  to MUFON in strict  anonymity  by her husband. This 
woman denies  to any questioner  that  the event ever occurred.
CASE NUMBER i3
Date: Io-z›—74
Place: Medicine Bow National Park, Wyoming
Investigators: Dr.  Leo Sprinkle,  Prof. of Psychology,  University of Wyoming,  Investigator  for 
APRO and MUFON; Rick Kenyon and Robert Nantkes,  MUFON field investigators, and Frank Bourke,  
National Star investigator.
Carl Higdon was hunting elk in the northern area of the park. He  fired at one,  but saw his bullet 
 leave the rifle in slow motion and drop  to the snow about   o feet away.  Feeling  a tingle,  he 
turned and saw a humanoid entity over six feet  tall standing  nearby.  The entity wore a black 
jumpsuit  with a wide belt,  upon which was a six-pointed star and a yellow emblem. The entity had 
bristle-like,  straight  hair standing straight  out from his head, small eyes,  no eyebrows  or 
chin,  bow-legged,  long-armed,  and with rod-like manipulators  instead of hands.  He  might have 
had hands  but Higdon never saw them.
The entity approached Higdon and asked if he was hungry,  and flipped him a little bunch of pills, 
which Higdon swallowed.  (Perhaps  the entity felt  that Higdon would not be hunting unless he 
needed food.)
The entity pointed at Higdon,  and suddenly Higdon found himself within  a
transparent,  cubical “craft”  in company with two UFOnauts  and five elk. They told him they were 
on their way to their home planet some I63,ooo light years away, and shortly  they were there.  
They had put  a helmet with wires sticking out of it on Higdon's head.  He  saw a tall, Seattle 
space- needle-type  building and a type of sunlight  which was very intense and made his eyes 
water.  The  entities  told him  that  our sun does  the same  thing to their eyes.
The next  thing Higdon remembers  is being  back in the park,  about z1/2hourshaving elapsed since  
the first sight of the entity.  He  was cold, disoriented,  and nearly hysterical.  His  truck was 
not where he had left it; he found it about  three miles away,  stuck in a mud hole. From here he 
sent out

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


a distress  call over his CB   radio,  and the Sheriff picked him up at midnight. By now, Higdon 
was in a state of panic and near nervous exhaustion, shouting,  “They took my elk!” They took him 
to the hospital and checked him over; oddly,  his blood tests showed a very rich supply of 
vitamins— those food pellets must have been nutritive—and  old TB  scars on his lungs had 
disappeared!
Later investigation  found that Higdon's wife and  two others had seen a red- green-white flashing 
light moving back and forth across this area. When Dr. Sprinkle used time-regression hypnosis on 
Higdon, he found out more about his experience.  Higdon was able to recall that other “Earth 
people” had been present, and he said that the aliens had come to Earth  to hunt and fish for food.
CASE NUMBER *4
Date: 8-I3-7i
Place: Alamogordo,  New Mexico
Investigator:  NATIONAL ENQUIRER, APRO
Staff Sgt. Charles L.  Moody,  a jz-year-old Air Force man, was parked near Holloman Air Force Base 
in the desert,  watching  for a predicted  meteor shower,  at about  i:zo a.m., when suddenly like 
a flash,  an object  appeared, dropping from the sky about  too feet away.  It stopped  about  z} 
feet  above the desert  floor and “wobbled”  for a while,  then glided toward Moody. As it came 
closer, Moody could see that it was a disc-shaped craft which glowed a dull, metallic gray.  It was 
to   to   o feet across and I8 to zJ  feet high,  with three globes showing on its underside.
The terrified Moody leapt  back into his car and tried to escape,  but his month-old  battery was 
completely dead. Then the craft halted again, about yo feet away,  and Moody  began to hear a 
high-pitched  voice, and to see shadowy figures through a window which had appeared in the craft.
Quoting  the ENQUIRER  report:  “Suddenly  an odd glow enveloped  my car,  and I  felt numb all 
over.”  Immediately  after the experience,  this numb feeling was the last  thing Moody remembered  
before coming  to, sitting in the car, and watching  the craft  leave, shooting straight  up. But 
in time,  the memory of the hour and zo minutes he'd “lost” came back to him.
Two beings had come from the craft,  gliding rather  than walking.  They started  to open the car 
door and Moody panicked,  striking out at one of the aliens.  Then,  “the lights went  out.” When 
he regained consciousness, he was on a table, and an alien was studying  him. Moody was unable  to 
move. The alien, which was hairless,  large-skulled, with no eyebrows  and round,  large
*4

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


eyes, small nose, mouth, and ears, and thin lips, “spoke,”  but with no lip movement.  He asked if 
Moody was well, and told him he would release him from the paralysis if he promised  not to strike 
out. Moody agreed, so the frail, five-foot  tall being in the skin-tight white suit, with 
whitish-gray skin, touched Moody with a metal rod about seven inches long and half an inch thick. 
Instantly, Moody could move freely.
Moody asked if he could see the craft's propulsion system, and the alien agreed, so they left the 
circular  room in which the examining table was in, and went through an arched doorway and then 
into another  room, which, Moody reported, seemed almost as large by itself as the whole craft had 
looked from the outside. It was as though  the interior of the ship were larger than the outside. 
In this room, there were three other beings, one apparently a woman, floating about a quarter-inch  
above the floor. The  leader told Moody to stand on a certain  part of flooring, and as he did so 
it dropped, like an elevator,  to a room  below. Protruding up from the floor of this room were the 
top sides of the three globes he'd seen on the underside of the craft. The  globes contained  large 
crystals, on each side of which were rods which sloped in toward the crystal.
The  aliens gave him other information  too, says Moody. They said that this ship was a small 
observation  craft from a much larger main craft which stayed  y,ooo to 6,ooo miles out in space. 
They also told Moody that they would be making themselves  “known to mankind” within three years, 
though they plan only limited contact at first. These aliens belong to a league of races, which our 
human  race may one day be invited to join—if they decide to accept  us. But whatever  happens,  
the aliens will never hurt us.
After this conversation,  Moody was told to report to a medical facility, and he lost consciousness 
 again,  to wake up in his car. He watched the craft leave,  then easily started his car and went 
home. Both his wife and his superior officer are convinced  that the very conservative Sgt. Moody 
is telling the truth.
CASE NUMBER  i
Date: iI-j-71
Place: Apache-Sitgreaves National Forest, Arizona
Investigators: Coral and Jim Lorenzen,  Directors of APRO, Dr. James Harder, Dir. of Res., APRO.
Travis Walton  and six other men had been working in the forest all day, thinning wood with chain 
saws. They were riding back to town at about six

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


o'clock when  they saw a yellowish  glow ahead of them and to the right. The truck was on a 
right-hand curve,  and it  bumped along until suddenly  it  came to a clearing,  where they had a 
very clear view of the object  causing  the glow.  It was about Iy  feet in diameter  and 8 feet 
high, and was hovering about  i}  feet above  the ground,  about  to  feet from their truck.  They 
were able to estimate  the size of the craft  because it was hovering over a pile of slash and was 
about  its size. The craft was glowing with a color “like a Coleman Lantern  being lit.”
When Travis saw the object  he asked the driver  to stop;  then without waiting for the truck  to 
completely halt, he jumped out and walked quickly over to the pile of slash. The object  gave off a 
beeping  noise and began to oscillate  around its vertical axis. There were other rumbling  noises. 
Then a bright, narrow  ray of greenish-blue  light shot out from the craft  and struck Walton.  A  
bright, soundless flash surrounded  Walton's  body and lifted him a foot into the air and 
backwards,  with his head knocked  back and his arms outflung.  One  of the other men saw Walton 
fall to the ground after this, but all were busy running from  the scene.
They stopped about  a quarter  of a mile away,  just as a light lifted up through  the trees in the 
direction  from which they had just come and streaked  away. They decided  to go back and find 
Walton.  They were back at  the landing  site in If  minutes,  but could find no trace of the craft 
 or of Walton.  They finally gave up searching  and went  to the Sheriffs office to report  the 
incident  and the missing Walton.  The Sheriff noted later that these men were extremely upset,  
one even weeping.  Later polygraph  tests bore out  that  they were telling  the truth about  their 
experience.
In the next days, a thorough search, involving about Jo men, was made for Walton. After z days, the 
search was called off, and a missing persons report filed.
On   November  iIth, Travis Walton  called his sister from a telephone  booth in a nearby town. His 
 voice was extremely weak.  Her husband and her brother went  to find Walton,  and discovered him 
slumped on the floor of the booth from which he had called.  He  was twelve miles from the spot  at 
which he had last been seen. He  had a strange story  to relate,  and little by little the details 
were told. When he regained consciousness  after being hit  by the ray, he was lying on a table in 
a low-ceilinged  room. There was apparatus  resting on his lower chest. He  had pains in his head 
and to a lesser extent  all over his body. Around him stood three entities,  about  } feet  tall, 
with large eyes, small noses,  mouths,  and ears,  and no hair. They wore

CrtAPTER  ONE: A  VERY S   RANGE  PHENOMENON


brown coveralls.  Travis was panicked  by the sight  of these “human  fetuses” and knocked  the 
apparatus  off his chest,  striking out  at the entities.  The creatures calmly left the room,  
turning right out  the doorway.  Travis followed  them,  turning left. He  went down the hall and 
into another  room, which featured a transparent  wall through which he could see what  he thought  
were stars.  He   sat in a chair which had push buttons on its arm,  and pushed one of the buttons. 
 But  the stars then started  to move, so he left the buttons alone. A  man in a blue outfit  and 
transparent  helmet came into the room and beckoned  that Walton follow him. He  did not  answer 
his questions,  but merely led him out of the craft,  through an airlock,  and down a ramp.  He  
was now in a large enclosure  in which several disc-shaped objects were parked. The air was fresher 
 than before,  the light brighter.  His guide took him into another craft where he met  three more 
humans,  two men and a woman,  who wore blue clothing  but  no helmets.  They all closely resembled 
one another.  At  this point a mask,  resembling  an oxygen mask, was put over Walton's  face,  and 
he lost consciousness.
When he regained his senses,  he was lying on his back on a road. He  felt  the heat  of a 
disc-shaped  object  which was rising into the sky above him,  the doors on its bottom just 
closing.  Walton recognized  the road,  walked unsteadily  to the nearest  phone,  and called his 
sister.  Six days had elapsed.
Tests performed immediately  after Walton's  return show some dehydration but  no malnutrition  and 
no possibility  of drug use. The lost  time is blocked by a strong memory block, and APRO's careful 
report  stated that  it might be months before further information  about  the lost  time can be 
extracted from Walton's subconscious.
This concludes our small sampling of contact  cases.  These few interesting cases make up only a 
tiny percentage  of  the well-documented contact  cases, which now number  over z,ooo. This total 
increases  almost  daily.  Over z,ooo reliable witnesses  have reported contact  not only with 
UFO's but with their occupants.  Trained investigators  have found these stories  to be given in 
good faith by credible people.  Something is happening.



CHAPTER  Two
THE  TELEPATHIC  CONTACT
Do  a movie on Uri. Melanie is the one to do it. Work at  it; it will come out at  the right  time. 
You are not  to entrust  anyone with the secret  of ollr existence—no  one.z
This message was received  at z:oo p.m., April 14. IQ7*. It  appeared as if by magic on Dr. Andrija 
Puharich's cassette tape recorder, and was alleged  to
have been transmitted  from a UFO. At I:oj a.m. on August  ›7,  !97*. the following was received in 
the same manner  by Dr.  Puharich:
One  of our failures is that we cannot contact you directly. We can only talk to you through Uri's 
power on the tape recorder. It is a shame for such a brilliant mind we cannot contact you directly. 
Maybe in time we shall be able to contact you directly ...
This afternoon we heard the movie script  ...  it is a brilliant  movie but not the story we want. 
We want you to prepare the earth for our mass landing, a mass landing on earth. We landed in South 
America 3,ooo years ago, and we must land again. We want you to tell our story, what you call the 
UFO experience.  Use all the collected  data and literature.
A.P.: How do we know which is the relevant or true data?
Research the data published. You will know what is correct. Write the movie script carefully, 
slowly, properly, and cleverly.*
Six years earlier,  in Ip68, I had received  essentially the same message,  not on a tape recorder  
but by the direct mental  process referred  to by the source. I had been experimenting since Ip6z 
wlth dozens of subjects, pursuing an investigation  into the possibility of mental or telepathic 
contact with UFO
sources. By August, *97*. when Dr.  Puharich was being asked to prepare Earth for a mass landing by 
producing a movie on the subject, I was already in the middle of producing a motion  picture. My 
reason for doing so: a
UFO source had requested  the same task of me.
The  important  part of this is that each of us had received  the same information,  totally 
independently, and allegedly from a UFO source. In fact, most of the information from the UFO 
source recorded in the book, URI, by Puharich, correlated with the telepathically received data I 
had accumulated as a result of my own experiments.


z8

CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT


My  own interest  in the possibility of telepathic contact with UFO   sources stemmed from my 
original study of the UFO    literature of the If Nos.  Most
of the people who claimed contact  with UFOs were considered charlatans or crackpots  by the 
scientific community  in general.  It seemed  to me, however, that  this was the historically  
classic attitude of men of science toward genuinely new ideas.
This is true to this day, and was emphatically  true then. The numerous contactees  of the ’yos, as 
well as many of the more recent  contactees,  seemed to have a common  denominator:  most of them 
claimed direct,  mind-to- mind contact  with the aliens,  rather  than verbal communication.
It was not hard to see why the scientific  community would be sorely tempted to classify all UFO    
contacts in a lump  under cultist claims because of the metaphysical  or religious  orientation  of 
most of the messages.  On   the surface,  such contacts seemed like highly imaginative  science 
fiction stories, or like the creations of fanatic cultist  groups seeking frantically  for their 
new Messiah.
What  the scientific community  chose to overlook  was the independence  of many of the claims  
from other claims of contact,  and the extreme degree of consistency  in the content  of the 
messages.  This independence  was a fact  in several of my own contact  experiments:  the 
participants  did not know when they started what  their goal was or what  they should expect  to 
happen  to them.  The messages which they eventually produced were extremely consistent  in content 
with other alleged UFO    messages.
I  have found increasing  numbers of functioning  contact  groups  around the country,  in Canada 
and England,  and elsewhere  in the world. And in addition  to the growing  number of voluntary 
contacts,  one can come across many sincerely  told stories of involuntary contact.
An example of this which has been well documented  is Herb Schirmer's story.  Schirmer,  a highway 
patrolman in the midwest,  reported sighting  a
flying saucer during a routine patrol  in i»*7- The Condon Committee heard of this and put him  
through  time-regression hypnosis.  Under hypnosis,  8chirmer recounted contact  with the UFOnauts  
themselves,
rather  than a simple sighting of  a flying saucer.  Repeated  testing of Schirmer's  memory only 
proved  that he sincerely  believed that his story of contact  with extraterrestrials was true.  
The  Condon Committee  people could not shake his faith in what he remembered  of the UFOnauts.

CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT


Herb Schirmer's  story is told rather fully by an investigating  reporter  who seemed well versed 
in this area.  He  offered a list of general  observations regarding  the UFO    contactees.  Among 
his points was this one, concerning the way the contactee  allegedly receives  his messages from 
the UFOnauts:
While he is being interviewed  or questioned,  the contactee  often seems to be listening  to 
another  “voice” or presence in the room.  Often there are pauses in his conversation  which last  
as long as forty-five  seconds  to a minute. After this pause,  the answer  to a query is given 
with great lucidity.  In interview sessions wherein  the contactee  has been hypnotically  
regressed  to the time of contact,  he begins his entranced  re- creation of the experience  in 
“normal”  hypnotic  voice trance patterns.
When he reaches the time when  the “message”  was relayed to him (usually after the mental and 
physical examination)  his voice and manner changes,  even under hypnotic  trance and he recites,  
rather  than r6callS,  the dogma which saucer people have relayed to him.i
I recognized  this description  of the contactees'  manner when speaking as messengers  for alleged 
UFOnauts  as being similar to the style of speaking used  by all of  the “telepathic  receivers”  
that  I  had investigated.  Another extremely apt description  of this telepathic  contact  is 
found in John Fuller's book, INTERRUPTED JOURNEY.  Included in this volume is a great deal of 
directly  transcribed  and quoted material  from the file of Betty and Barney Hill. They had gone 
to a psychiatrist  with anxiety problems.  The doctor had performed  time regression  hypnosis  on 
both of  them, and uncovered  an alleged contact with the UFO    people. When Barney was asked  to 
recall  the language  used by the UFOnaut,  Barney stated that  the being did not speak to him by 
word,  but told him what  to do by the alien's  thoughts  making  his thoughts  understand.  When  
the psychiatrist  asked Barney if  this was some kind of mental telepathy,  Barney said that he did 
not know  the definition  of the word “telepathy.”  Yet he described its process quite well.
It seemed  to me to be rather an exaggeration  of scientific caution  to declare, as so many did,  
that  all of the people who claimed this telepathic communication  were suffering from identical 
forms of mental aberration.
The more appropriate  response  seemed  to me to be to attempt  to check  this common denominator  
out.
For this reason,  I  set up a control group of people whose sanity and habitual veracity I  could 
vouch for, and proceeded  to expose  them  to conditions which allegedly would produce UFO    
contact.  The instructions,  of course,


3O

                          CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT                           


had come from an alleged  UFO source which I had come across several times in my research.
Since ip6z, I have worked with over loo  of these human guinea pigs who were successful in mentally 
receiving what I believe to be messages from UFOs.
The data collected through these telepathic  receivers created a problem in evaluation.  I had 
originally hoped to be able to extract  material of a scientifically evidential  nature from these 
experiments,  but soon after the start of the experiment,  I realized that rigorous analytical 
control was not possible. Telepathy itself is still proving extremely difficult to investigate 
scientifically, when the receiver and the sender both can be monitored exhaustively. And, needless 
to say, if we could put our hands on the UFO senders to test them, we would have our experiment's 
end.
Yet it was possible to produce an unending supply of data. So I simply chose to generate a great 
deal of data, figuring that it was a mistake to expect material of this nature to fit any 
preconceived  notion  that I might have had.
After carrying on this experiment fOr over I3 years, I now feel that I can make the following 
statement:  The information  claimed to be received by numerous  UPO contactees can be duplicated 
in a controlled situation.
For example, in numerous  instances,  I have been able to produce the telepathic contact in people 
who have no previous knowledge of UFO literature.  In each case the message which they receive has 
correlated  in its content to a very high degree with other UFO contactees'  messages. The results 
of this experiment indicate to me that we should  take a very close look at this UFO contactee 
information. It is my belief that within  this information  is the key to creating a much more 
direct contact with the elusive UFO phenomenon.
When I work with Uri Geller, the results we achieve with telepathic experiments are remarkably 
good.








My drawing                   Geller's response




jI

                          CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT                           






Geller's drawing                   My response
Many professional  magicians have stated that Geller is actually a very clever trickster with no 
special mental ability. It seems that few of them have applied the scientific method of repeated 
experiment  to determine his ability.
I found that, for my own edification,  the most conclusive  tests were those performed  in a random 
fashion during the normal daily routine, completely unannounced. That is, Uri did not know that I 
was testing his telepathic ability as we carried on a normal conversation  during the day. The 
result: for me, there is no doubt that Uri Geller is a first-class telepathic sender and receiver.
Telepathy is not a difficult technique to learn. I am convinced  that it is a basic form of 
communication  that our civilization  has forgotten due to lack of use. It is analogous  to the 
ability to do one-arm pushups. Anyone can do them, with enough practice and conditioning.
Most of us can show evidence of a telepathic “muscle,”  since we've usually had experiences of 
starting to talk about a subject simultaneously with a close acquaintance.
Telepathic communication  is very similar to radio communication. If you think of everyone  having 
a radio transmitter and receiver in their brain, you have a close analogy. Our  problem is to learn 
to tune this mental  radio for clear transmission  and reception.  It is my theory that the UFO 
contactees are receiving, on often poorly tuned  receivers, the powerful and accurately tuned 
signal of the UFO's transmitter.
Learning to receive is very simple. It requires practice in making the mind a total blank. This is 
easier for some of us than others! One  way to do this is to make a daily practice of sitting in a 
comfortable  position and letting the conscious  mind “run down” or become less active. Finally, 
short periods of consciousness  with no thoughts can be achieved. This is the beginning to tuning 
the receiver, and is the condition  necessary for the UFO contact experiment  to succeed. Now this 
is still far from perfect tuning,  but it can be sufficient if, as in the case of the UFOs, the 
transmitter is very strong.

                          CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT                           


It seems  that language is no barrier  to telepathic communication. For instance,  a German sender  
may think,  “messer,”  meaning knife,  and the American  receiver will get  the impression  of a 
knife. The general  contact  of that communication  will have been achieved,  though perhaps 
nuances in meaning are lost. I  believe  this to be the case in most  UFO    contact 
communications, and accounts for the seemingly common  nature of the language.
Once the subjects in my experiment  were trained,  it was necessary  to attract the UFO    
transmitter.  The most efficient way of doing this seemed  to be a simple hand-off.  The trained 
receiver was exposed  to a contactee  for a brief period,  not long enough  to dilute the 
evidential quality of the data which the new receiver  might  be expected to produce.
Since a study of this nature takes years to produce, and since most of the evidential quality is 
extracted slowly and cumulatively  by the experimenter, it is difficult  to prove to the casual 
observer  the nature of the alleged contact. To most researchers,  this evidence is simply not 
conclusive.
Since I have observed over loo people go through this process and have read millions of words of 
contactee literature,  both published and unpublished,  I believe that I am now in a position to 
select the highly correlative material from the masses of communications. Moreover, the material in 
the body of this book is selected  by me to best represent the material received from the large 
number of contactees whose material I have studied.
I have no way of vouching for Ioo% accuracy; however,  I have tried to reduce my personal bias to a 
minimum  by investigating as much material as I could find.
The answers you find here are the result of a careful selection from literally millions of words of 
alleged UFO communication  spanning over zo years and involving contactees  both “silent” and 
published, as well as my own experimentally fabricated contactees.
I will make the following observations concerning the general nature of the alleged telepathic 
communications from UFOs:
I.     People who have had face-to-face encounters with UFOnauts  report telepathic communication  
more often than any other form.
z.    Those who claim communication  at a distance with a UFO source report that telepathic contact 
was used in an overwhelming majority of cases.

                          CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT                           


The same general  message permeates  over po% of the millions of words received  by thousands of 
people  around the world.
4-     I  have been able to experimentally fabricate contactees  who, with no prior background  in 
UFO   literature,  produced  the general UFO “doctrine”  in detail.
Most of my fabricated contactees who have seen a UFO   have done so shortly after becoming 
contactees.
‹.   There are over IoO contactees  which have been fabricated  in my group.
Their backgrounds  represent  a general sampling of our society with educational  levels ranging  
from grade-school  to post-doctoral.
Over po% of these fabricated contactees  experienced  identical physical symptoms  during the time 
of the contact.
8.     A  single message would sometimes  be delivered  through a dozen contactees,  a part  
through each one. Though the contactees  were of different  backgrounds  and educational  levels,  
the message would  be uniform,  of coherent  continuity,  and largely free from normal errors and 
hesitations  of speech.
Two of my fabricated contactees  were given only one day of training before returning  to their 
home some 6oo miles away.  Their progress was monitored  by mail,  and the result  was still the 
same.


IO.




›i
I  have found that some people can achieve  the contact  phenomenon simply by being hypnotized.  No 
 preparation  or training  is necessary  for this type of contact.  The content  of messages  
received is the same as the great  majority of all other contacts.
It is not necessary for the fabricated  contactees  to believe in UFOs or the reality of the 
contact  phenomena  to produce  the communications. One  of my best hypnotic contactees  has never  
believed,  and still refuses to countenance,  any part of the phenomenon,  although  her 
communications have in all cases  been excellent  and have matched in exact detail the bulk of 
other contactee  material.
Several of the contactees,  particularly  those with extensive  training in the physical sciences,  
maintained  a highly objective and somewhat skeptical  attitude  throughout  the experiment  and 
still produced excellent  communications, precisely  analogous  to the bulk of material received.


34

                          CHAPTER  Two: TiiE TELEPATHIC  CONTACT                             


The process of receiving  contact  is so simple  that it is difficult  to adequately describe  it. 
Some people seem  to have a terrific natural ability to receive  this contact,  and some almost  
none.  To  receive  the contact  it is only necessary that  a person learn  to clear his mind,  by 
any process  that seems  to work,  and then await  the contact.  I  realize  that  this sounds much 
too simplistic  to yield results.  Yet this is the method,  if you can call such a simple  concept  
a method, which has produced in my own experimental  work many contactees  who have produced many 
thousands of words of standard contactee  “doctrine.”



CHAPTER  THREE
ALITY,  Evc.
In our culture  there seems  to be very little communication  between science and religion,  and 
yet  the practitioners  of both disciplines  claim that  their studies  are fundamental  to an 
understanding  of basic truth.  What emerges from the UFO    communications is the attitude  that  
there is a single valid approach  to the complete  understanding  of the universe,  and that  this 
approach  blends what we presently consider  to be two separate  disciplines and philosophies.
My  personal  bias,  at least during  the initial stages of my investigation, was wholly on the 
side of the scientific  disciplines.  As the investigation continued,  however,  I  kept finding 
what seemed  to be a religious  or spiritual factor in the contact  phenomena.  My  determined  
bias towards open- minded  and impartial observation  led me finally to acknowledge  this factor as 
a genuine part of ufology.  At present,  I  no longer regard this factor as separate from a 
scientific understanding  of the phenomena.  The seemingly religious content of the communications 
is seen as such because of our own cultural  conditioning:  we interpret  these messages  as 
religious.  It is my belief that  the foundation  of a much more nearly absolute  and true 
philosophy  of natural phenomena is being made available  through  the UFO    contacts.  At 
present,  our languages  are inadequate  to communicate  anything  but  the first step in the 
evolution of our thinking.  It will be necessary  for us to make  this first step,  in order  to 
begin  to understand  how  to make  the second.

PARANORMAL  PHENOMENA
Several years ago, I  had the opportunity  to converse with some ghosts  that materialized  into 
our physical world and then vanished after our conversation.  To  many psychical researchers,  this 
phenomenon,  known as materialization due to ectoplasmic  emission  from a medium,  is an 
established  and accepted  occurrence.
It is my belief that  anyone following  the rules and conditions  laid down for this type of 
contact can achieve it, assuming  that he is in the presence of a suitable  materialization medium  
(an individual  capable of producing ectoplasmic  emissions.)
The most evidential of the ghosts which I saw and talked to was a tall, ghostly individual who grew 
solid before my eyes,  carried on a conversation with me, and then  to prove his ability  to 
manifest  in the physical world,

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


slapped me and my companion,  Carla, solidly on the arms. Then he slowly walked  through us, while 
we watched closely.  Thus in the space of a few seconds,  he displayed  both the properties  of a 
perfectly solid substance  and those of total absence  of solidity.
Psychic researchers  have for many years reported  and photographed  these ghostly 
materializations, but  because of their inability  to produce  the phenomena at the demand of 
skeptical observers,  little general interest  has been developed  in this research.
As we unravel more of the UFO    mystery,  we will discover  the reason why the skeptical or “prove 
it  to me” approach  is quite often the defeating factor in paranormal  investigations. I  also 
noticed  this same factor in evidence as I recently observed several hundred seemingly  miraculous  
bare-handed surgical operations  in the Philippines.  I saw native “psychic surgeons” seemingly  
plunging  their hands directly into the patients'  unanesthetized bodies,  pulling out all sorts of 
bloody parts while  the patients  remained perfectly conscious,  watching  the process and feeling 
no pain. The patients displayed  no wounds or scars after the operation was completed.  Here again 
the evidential quality of the operation witnessed was very dependent  upon the attitude of the 
witness.  It has been aptly stated that, with paranormal phenomena,  “believing  is seeing.”
There are many observers  who attend demonstrations of paranormal phenomena and who conclude that 
what  they have seen was all trickery.  I've had a lot of experience  in witnessing  these 
demonstrations, have seen several hundred authentic  ghosts materialize,  have watched much psychic 
surgery and had minor operations  performed on myself, and in every case I  have noted a common 
factor.  If  skeptical observers  were present,  the phenomena either didn't  occur at all, or 
their quality was so poor that  trickery would naturally  be suspected.
Now the skeptical observer doesn't  like this facet of the phenomena at all and uses it as evidence 
of the fakery.  His problem is that he doesn't understand why he,  as a skeptic,  can't  be given 
evidential  and inalienable proof of the reality of the phenomena.  He  absolutely  cannot  accept  
the necessity  under  the circumstance  of his skepticism  of taking  the word of some “believer,”  
whom he usually considers  deluded.  The reason  that  this lack of proof must  accompany  
skepticism  will become evident  as we further explore  the UFO    communications.
My  own stance is a balanced one, I  hope,  that of the believer who is skeptical of tricksters  
among the real practitioners. There are many

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


fraudulent  mediums  and many quack psychic surgeons.  I  have seen both practicing  their  trades 
and am aware of their methods.  Yet  their existence does nothing  to compromise  the reality of 
the paranormal  phenomena generated  by the real mediums and psychic surgeons.
A  pertinent  question when considering  psychic demonstrations is: how does the paranormal  event  
happen?  The answer  may well lie in the area of occult theory which is concerned with the 
existence  of various  “planes.”
The theosophists  say that  there are fourteen  mental planes associated  with this planet.  After 
death,  they say, an individual  finds himself at one of these If   levels of existence,  the level 
being dependent  on the spiritual nature or development  of the person  at the time of his death.  
The cliché  that covers this theory is a heavenly  “birds of a feather flock together.”  When a 
ghost materializes  into our reality,  it is from one of these 14 levels  that he usually comes for 
his earthly visit. In general,  it is theorized  that  a planet  is a sort of spiritual distillery, 
 with reincarnation  taking place into the physical world until the individual  is sufficiently 
developed in the spiritual sense  that he can reach  the higher states of existence,  and is no 
longer in need of this planet's developmental  lessons.
Most of this theory was developed  as a result  of reported contact  and communication  with the 
inhabitants  of these supposedly  separate  realities.
The most satisfactory  term I  have come across for these different  levels of reality is the word, 
 “density.”  I have come to believe that  these densities interpenetrate with our physical space 
and mutually  coexist,  though with very little awareness of each other. A  simple analogy,  to 
which I've referred before,  is to consider  the actors in two different  TV   plays,  both 
receivable   on the same set,  but each play being exclusive of the other. This seems  to be what 
we experience  in our daily lives: one channel or density of existence, being  totally  unaware of 
the myriad entities occupying other densities of our physical space.  The point  of all this is 
that our density or reality is not ultimate or singular;  it is in fact our reality only at  the 
present.
Many of the UFO    reports display  ample evidence  that  the object sighted has its origin in one 
of these other realities  or densities,  just as do the materialized  ghosts.  I  would like to 
emphasize  that  this does not in any way imply their unreality;  rather,  it displaces  the UFOs' 
reality from ours.  I'm
saying the equivalent  of  Channel 4 on the TV   is equivalent  to but displaced from channel 3 on 
the same TV.

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


If  you were told to build a scale model of any atom  using something  the size of a pea for the 
nucleus,  it would be necessary  to have an area the size of a football stadium  to contain even 
the innermost  orbital electrons.  If  the pea were placed at the center of the yo-yard line,  a 
small cotton ball on the uppermost  seat in the stands could represent  an electron of the atom. 
There is very little actual matter in physical matter.  When you look at the stars in the night 
sky, you probably see something  quite similar  to what  you would see if  you could stand on the 
nucleus of any atom of “solid”  material  and look outward  toward our environment.  To  
demonstrate  an electron  to you, a physicist  will probably show you a curved  trace of one on a 
photographic plate. What he probably does not  tell you is that  this is second-hand evidence.  The 
electron itself has never  been seen, only its effect on a dense medium  can be recorded.  It is 
possible,  of course,  to make accurate mathematical  calculations,  about what we call an 
electron.  For such work  we must know some data on magnetic  field strength,  electron charge and 
velocity.  But since a magnetic field is caused  by moving charges,  which in turn are empirically  
observed phenomena,  we find that  the entire mathematical camouflage  obscures  the fact  that all 
we really know is that charged particles  have effects on each other.  We still don't  know what 
charged particles  are, or why they create an action at a distance effect.
Senior scientists  would be the first  to agree that  there is no such thing as an absolute 
scientific explanation  of anything.  Science is, rather,  a method or tool of prediction,  
relating one or more observations  to each other.  In physics,  this is usually done through  the 
language  of mathematics.  Our scientific learning  is a learning  by observation  and analysis of 
this observation.  In the sense of penetrating  the fundamental  essences of things, we really do 
not understand  anything  at all.
A  magnetic field is nothing  but a mathematical  method of expressing  the relative  motion 
between electrical fields.  Electrical fields are complex mathematical  interpretations of a 
totally empirical  observation  stated as Coulomb's Law. In other words our forest of scientific 
knowledge  and explanations  is made up of trees about which we understand nothing except their 
effect,  their existence.
Baba Ram Dass, formerly Dr.  Richard Alpert  of the Dept.  of Psychology  at Harvard University,  
met Sai Baba in India and was given a small medallion by that  guru.  Sai Baba held out his hand, a 
glow appeared in his palm,  and the glow slowly solidified into the medallion.  Dr.  Alpert was 
amazed and commented  to one of Sai Baba's  associates on this miracle of creation.  “Oh, don't  be 
silly,  he didn't create  that,” replied  the devotee.  He  has a whole

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


warehouse full of those things.  He just transported  it here mentally.” Sai Baba's own attitude 
towards  this sort of thing is that all is illusion,  or maya.
This would seem to be a very accurate analysis of our physical world, which is most often apparent  
to mystics and atomic physicists.  For an example of the mystical approach  to our illusion, here 
is OAHSPE explaining about all the heavenly bodies which we cannot see,  because they are outside 
of our illusion:
When a planet hath attained  to so great age she no longer giveth forth light or heat to radiate 
upon herself, she cannot  be seen in the heavens. Of which kinds of planets there are millions in 
the etherean firmament. Some of these move slower than any of the planets man can see. Some of 
these at times eclipse the sun, and are taken for sun-spots, although, perhaps,  not a million  
miles from the earth,I
To  a person  unfamiliar with the inner workings of modern science it may seem that modern man has 
his environment  nicely under control and totally figured out. Nothing could be farther from the 
truth. The leaders of science who are researching  the frontiers of modern theory argue among 
themselves, with their followers dissenting in droves  behind them. As soon as a theory begins to 
receive wide acceptance as being a valid representation of physical laws, someone finds a 
discrepancy,  and the theory has to be either modified or abandoned entirely. Perhaps the most well 
known example of this is Newton's “F=MA.”  This attained  the status of a physical law before being 
found to be in error. It is not that this equation  has not proven extremely useful: we have used 
it to design everything from a moon rocket to the television  picture tube. But its accuracy fails 
when applied  to atomic particle accelerators like the cyclotron. To  make accurate predictions of 
particle trajectories  it is necessary to make the relativistic correction formulated  by Einstein. 
It is interesting to note that the reason for this correction  is based on the fact that the speed 
of light is totally independent of the speed of its source.
If Newton had penetrated  more deeply into the laws of motion he might have made this relativistic 
correction  himself, and then stated that the velocity correction would always be of no 
consequence,  since the velocity of light was so much greater than any speed attainable  by man. 
This was very true in Newton's day, but is definitely not the case now. We still tend to think of 
the velocity of light as a fantastic and unattainable speed,  but with the advent of space flight, 
a new order of velocities has arrived. We have to change our thinking from our normal terrestrial 
concepts of velocities.

4°

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


Instead of thinking  of the speed of light  in terms of miles per second,  think of it in terms of 
Earth diameters  per second.  The almost  unimaginable i86,ooo miles per second  becomes an 
entirely  thinkable z3 Earth diameters per second.  Or  we could think of the speed of light in 
terms of our solar system's  diameter  and say that light would speed at about  two diameters  per 
day.
Einstein's  assertion  that everything  is relative  is so apt  that  it has become  a cliché of 
our culture.  Let us continue  being relativistic  In considering  the size of natural phenomena  
by considering  the size of our galaxy.  If  you look up at the sky on a clear night,  nearly all 
of the visible stars are in our own galaxy.  Each of these stars is a sun like our own. A  
calculation  of the ratio of the number of suns in our galaxy  to the number of people on planet 
Earth discovers  that  there are 6z suns for each living person on Earth today: Earth's population  
is close  to 4 billion; and there are z  o  billion stars in the Milky Way! it  takes light over 
four years  to get  from Earth to even the nearest  of  these stars.  To   reach  the most  distant 
 star in our own galaxy would  take light Ioo,ooo years.
These calculations  are made using the assumption  that light has a speed. This may be an erroneous 
 assumption  in the light of modern  theory,  but its apparent  speed is a useful measuring  tool, 
so we use it anyway.
So we have a creation  in which we find ourselves which is so big that at a speed of z3 Earth 
diameters  a second we must  travel loo,ooo years  to cross our immediate  backyard.  That is a big 
backyard,  and it would seem ample for even the most ambitious of celestial architects,  but in 
truth  this entire system of z  o billion stars is just one grain of sand on a very big beach.
There are uncounted  trillions of galaxies  like ours,  each with its own zJo billion stars, spread 
throughout  what seems  to be infinite space.
When you think of the mind boggling expanse of our creation,  and the infantile  state of our 
knowledge  in relation  to it, you begin  to see the necessity for considering  the strong 
probability  that our present  scientific approach  to investigating  these expanses  is as 
primitive  as the dugout canoe is in relation  to the whole state of the art of Earthbound  
transport.
The most perplexing problem  of science has always been finding a satisfactory  explanation  of 
what  is called action at a distance.  In other words,  everyone knows  that  if you drop something 
 it will fall, but no one knows precisely why. Many people know that electric charges push or pull 
on each other even if separated in a vacuum,  but  again no one knows why.

41

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


Although  the phenomena  are quite different,  the equations which describe the force of 
interaction  are quite similar:
For gravitation:  F=Gmm'/r‘
For electrostatic interaction:  F=Kqq’/r‘
The attractive force  between  our planet  and our sun is described  by the gravitational  
equation.  The attractive force  between  orbiting electrons  and the atomic nucleus is described  
by the electrostatic  interaction  equation.
Now each of these equations was determined experimentally. They are not apparently  related in any 
way,  and yet  they both describe a situation  in which attractive force falls off with the square 
of the distance of separation.
A  mathematical  representation of an action at a distance effect is called a field, such as a 
gravitational  or electric field. It was Albert Einstein's foremost  hope to find a single relation 
which would express  the effect  of both electric and gravitational  phenomena; in fact, a theory 
which would unify the whole of physics,  a unified field theory.  Einstein  believed that  this was 
a creation of total order and that  all physical  phenomena  were evolved from a single source:
Over the years Einstein and other mathematical physicists  published many unified field theories,  
none of them successful.  A  famous one, put forth by Kaluza,  recast  the mathematics  of 
relativity in a space of five dimensions  instead of the customary  four. Kaluza hoped ...  that 
unification  of gravitation  and electromagnetism would follow by a suitable interpretation of the 
fifth dimension.  Einstein  took up Kaluza's work,  but once more no new physical  understanding  
appeared.  The most celebrated  unified field theory,  called  the generalized  theory of 
gravitation,  was published  by Einstein  in Ing  , and independently  by Schrodinger  at about  
the same  time. By then Schrodinger  was disillusioned  by quantum  mechanics,  which he himself 
had helped to create.  For some years both these eminent  men believed that  the new theory would 
solve the problems which they thought  still beset fundamental  physics.
The mathematics of the theory is very complicated,  and it is necessary to use approximate  
methods. With these it was shown that the theory failed to satisfy the basic requirement  that its 
field equations  must determine the motion of electric charges present. This was enough to convince 
Schrodinger  that the theory was useless. Einstein was not prepared  to accept the approximate  
results: he maintained  that the

4*

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


theory could be judged only if certain exact solutions of the generalized field equations  were 
found.  These exact solutions,  he believed, would represent  matter  by pure field.  This was the 
position he took up until his death.°
This unified field theory,  describing  matter as pure field,  has been accomplished  now. It seems 
 that  the entire situation was analogous  to the solution of a ponderously  complex Chinese 
puzzle. If  you can find the right key turns among so many wrong ones,  the puzzle easily falls 
apart.  Dewey
B.  Larson found the solution  to this problem,  and the puzzle not only fell apart,  but revealed  
an elegantly  adequate  unified field theory rich in  practical results. And,  like a good Chinese 
puzzle,  the solution was not complex,  just  unexpected.  Instead of assuming  five dimensions,  
Larson assumed six,  and properly  labeled  them as the three dimensions  of space and the three 
dimensions  of time. He  assumed  that  there is a three-dimensional co-ordinate  time analogous  
to our observed three-dimensional space.
The result  of this approach  is that one can now calculate  from the basic postulate of Larson's  
theory any physical value within our physical  universe, from sub-atomic  to stellar.  This long 
sought  after unified field theory is different  because we are not  accustomed  to thinking  of 
time as being dimensionally  analogous  to space.  We have thought  of time as one- dimensional,  
as a stream moving in one direction.  Yet once you get  the hang of it, co-ordinate  time is 
mathematically a more comfortable  concept  with which to deal.  Professor  Frank Meyer,  of the 
Dept.  of Physics at the University  of Wisconsin,  presently distributes  a quarterly newsletters  
to scientists interested  in Larson's  new theory which explores perplexing questions  in physical  
theory using Larson's approach.  I was interested  in testing Larson's  theory and made extensive 
calculations  using his postulate.  I became convinced  that his theory is indeed a workable  
unified field theory.  If  you are personally  interested  in checking  this theory for yourself,  
I recommend  obtaining his work and checking  it as I  did.4
I  had been pondering several interesting  statements  communicated  through contactees  by the 
alleged UFO    source prior to discovering  Larson's work in the early ’Nos. Although  the people 
who had received  these communications knew nothing of the problems  of modern physics,  they were 
getting information  which apparently  was quite central to physical  theory:  first,  they 
suggested  that  the problem  with our science was that  it did not recognize enough dimensions.  
Second,  they stated that light does not move; light  iS. Larson's  theory posits six dimensions  
instead of the customary  four, and finds the pure field, which Einstein  believed would represent  
matter,  to
4J

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


move outward from all points in space at unit velocity,  or the velocity of light. Photons are 
created due to a vibratory displacement  in space-time,  the fabric of the field. Furthermore,  the 
contactees were saying that consciousness  creates vibration,  this vibration  being light. The  
vibratory displacements  of space-time in Larson's theory are the first physical manifestation, 
which is the photon or light. According  to the UFO  contacts,  the UFOs lower their vibrations in 
order to enter our skies. The entire physical  universe postulated  by Larson is dependent  on the 
rate of vibration and quantized  rotations of the pure field of space-time.
The  contactees were suggesting that time is not what we think it is. Larson suggests the same 
thing. The  UFOs were said to move in time as we move in space. This would  be entirely normal in 
Larson's time-space  portion of the universe.
Lastly, and perhaps  most importantly,  the contactees were receiving the message that the creation 
is simple, all one thing. Larson's theory is a mathematical statement  of this unity.
The  New Science Advocates  is a group of scientists and philosophers currently promoting Larson's 
theory. In a recent news release,  they had this to say about Larson's Reciprocal System of theory:
No previous  theory comes anywhere near being a general theory in the true sense of the term. None 
of them is applicable to more than a relatively small part of physical science, and none is derived 
entirely from premises of a general nature. Everyone finds it necessary to make many assumptions  
specifically applicable  to its restricted field of coverage. A theory of atomic structure makes 
assumptions  about matter and about its basic forms; a theory of electrical phenomena makes 
assumptions about electricity and electric charges; a theory of quasars makes assumptions about 
quasars and about the radiation  through which these objects make themselves  known; and so on. 
Furthermore, all of these theories make use of a host of additional assumptions  of a more general 
character  that are embodied in the basic laws and principles of physics. But now we have a theory 
that makes no assumptions  at all, other than those contained  in the fundamental postulates as to 
the properties of space and time which define the theory. All conclusions,  including those with 
respect to the basic physical laws and principles, are derived solely by deduction  from those 
postulates, without invoking the aid of any supplementary or subsidiary assumptions, and without 
introducing anything from experience.

44

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


In our opinion,  this totally unprecedented  accomplishment is sufficient in itself to justify the 
most serious and painstaking study of the new theoretical structure  ...
An interesting extension  of Larson's work is a conjecture which I have entertained  that a more 
informed society might index events spatially rather than temporally. When IS talks with Puharich 
about time, it would seem that they do this, for they say that a certain event was planned hundreds 
of light-years ago.

THE   METAL-BENDING  CHILDREN
When Uri Geller performs  on TV,   mentally bending metal and fixing clocks,  there are often many 
kids who try to duplicate Uri's “tricks.” Sometimes  the kids succeed.  The number  of children  
that can cause bends and breaks  in metals  and other materials  just  by wanting  the break or 
bend to occur is increasing  daily. John Taylor,  professor  of mathematics  at Kings College,  
reports in his excellent  book, SUPERMINDS,  on the extensive tests run in England on several of 
these gifted children.
What physicists have never  before considered  worth investigating is now increasing at a very 
rapid  rate. Action at a distance, apparently as a result of some type of mental activity, seems 
repeatedly the observed effect. If the Gellerizing children continue to increase in numbers and 
ability, the Ip8o s will see such fantasies of TV as MY FAVORITE  MARTIAN,  I DREAM OF JEANNIE,  
and BEWITCHED  becoming a part of reality.
So far, most of the ability shown  by these children is in the area of bending and breaking 
materials.  But there is some indication  that  they, like Geller and Matthew Manning,  will 
develop other abilities  as well.
With controlled,  repeatable  experiments  like those conducted by Taylor and by the Stanford 
Research Institute in the United States, we begin to have good, solid data available for study.  
Gradually we are moving into a position from which we can begin to create a science of “magic,”  
for that which has been called magic through  the ages is now  being performed at an ever- 
increasing  rate,  primarily  by children.  In the future, we may even find this “magic”  added to 
the curriculum  of the sciences  at universities.  In point of fact,  the present  disciplines  of 
chemistry,  physics,  etc.,  are still basically “magic”  to us, since we are still in the position 
 of having no ultimate explanation  of causality.


4i

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


AGE           GRESSION  HvrNoSIS
During  the past  twenty years I  have done several hundred  age regressions, working with subjects 
from various walks of life. With very few exceptions, I  have discovered  that  the reasonably  
good hypnotic subject  can be helped to remember  experiences  which occurred  before his or her 
birthdate into this present  life. The large majority of these people remember  lives which 
occurred prior to this life but identifiable  as being in the recent historical past. I  have had 
people who are in this life quite ignorant  of a certain foreign language,  who under hypnosis,  
while re-experiencing moments  of a previous  life, are able to speak  that foreign  tongue.
While  there is no way to prove  the theory of reincarnation, it is interesting to note that many 
researchers  besides myself have reported many thousands of instances of these hypnotic  
regressions  to previous lives. As one examines the mass of data which these regressions  provide, 
one cannot  help  but  note that  the theory of reincarnation  is a more substantively  
satisfactory explanation  than some alternate  theories,  which attempt  to be conservative and 
scientifically “safe.”
Such latter explanations  of  the data of  a good age regression  case  take each confirmed  fact 
gained in the hypnotic  session  and say,  “The subject could conceivably  have known  this another 
way. The subject could be using telepathy.  The subject could be clairvoyant.”  The explanations  
offered in  this way strike me rather  as an instance of going around Robin Hood's barn, when there 
is a broad and well-trodden  path right  through  the forest.  I  say well-trodden,  because  
three-quarters of the world's population  ascribe  to religions which include reincarnation  within 
 their structure  of religious beliefs.

MEDIUMSHIP
The medium,  a person who is able to act as a link with discarnate  entities,  is probably  the 
most controversial  of the common psychic  types.  I  consider  a good working  knowledge  of 
mediumship  and its pitfalls essential  to the study of alleged telepathic UFO    contactees.  As I 
have stated,  there seem  to be many planes or densities of existence,  therefore  it is not always 
possible  to be sure of the source of a telepathic contact. A  person visiting  a medium  for the 
purpose of communication  with discarnate  Uncle Herman may actually contact  a residual  portion 
of Uncle Herman's consciousness, another entity claiming  to be Uncle Herman,  or in many cases  
the subconscious of the medium.  I  am certain  that many mediums and UFO   contactees  never

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


intend fraud, and do not  themselves  realize  the fraudulent  nature of what they “telepathically” 
receive.  The dedicated researcher  will attempt  to achieve  an attitude of unbiased 
discrimination, listening  to everything with suspended  disbelief,  yet reserving  final judgment  
until his data is ponderous in quantity and correlations  are extensive.

MAGIC
(PAL MAGIc,  Nov  PRESTIDIGITATION)
W. E. Butler defines magic as “the art of effecting  changes  in consciousness at will.”* 
Generally,  events are thought  of as magical if they defy all rational or “scientific”  attempts  
to explain  them. As a consequence,  as our scientific philosophy  has expanded our inclination  to 
view natural events as magical has shrunk. We no longer consider  thunderstorms  to be of magical 
significance,  because we know  the physical mechanics  which create  the thunderstorm.
That is, we think we do. What we have really done with thunderstorms  is to find our way back  to 
the more basic puzzle of electrostatics.
Born into this world,  we wake up in our crib and very slowly  become  aware of our surroundings.  
As long as these surrounding,  these conditions  of existence,  remain  the same, we are satisfied  
to call our environment “normal”  reserving  the label of “paranormal”  for that which is contrary  
to the great  body of our experience.  That  is, as long as we drop a stone and it continues  to 
fall rather  than float in air, we will accept  that as the natural event  and see a 
floating-in-air object  that  looks as though it ShoHld fall as supernatural.
It is a difficult  thing to do,  but  try to imagine for a minute a state of total lack of 
experience  with this world. Try to look at it as if  for the first  time. Without  labeling them,  
look at the people,  the animals,  the birds and insects; at foliage and sky. Feel the wonder  
creeping in. Now, in your mind, back off from the surface of the planet Earth and see it as a 
totality,  a ball in space with a thin cloak of swirling air around it. You and the billions of 
others who live on Earth stand on its surface,  the soles of your feet pointing inward,  towards  
the center of the ball; your heads pointing outward,  towards space.  As you hold this in your 
mind, perhaps magic seems not so limited on our “normal”  world.  I  believe  that  in truth, we 
have only a tiny sliver of understanding  of reality,  if indeed we have any at all. When a child 
stares at a spoon and it curls up, or breaks, we somehow find this more

47

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


amazing than the magic of our daily experience.  Perhaps these “magical” new events are clues to 
the real nature of man.

THE   MECHANISMS  OF  PAL     MAGIC
Motion in our physical world is usually the result of a potential energy such as gravitational, 
chemical, or electrical. The magician also works with potential energies, within consciousness, in 
order to create motion or displacement  in mind. The magician works with potentials in 
consciousness similar to the physical activity of storing electrical charges in a battery. Just as 
a battery has a positive and a negative pole, so does consciousness. Many call this 
positive-negative polarity good and evil. There is ample evidence that it is possible to create a 
large potential through the manipulation  of consciousness, whether it is done by intentional  
magical manipulation  or by political rhetoric or religious exhortation.
I would suggest that consciousness is more fundamental  than physical matter. I find it hard to see 
even the possibility of physical matter creating consciousness. The magician,  then, is working 
with the more fundamental of energy fields, to attain a more fundamental objective.
The objective of the magician  is to obtain predictive and manipulative control of consciousness. 
The white magician clearly defines for himself the limits of this manipulation  of consciousness: 
his objective is the development of his own consciousness. The black magician  is less careful 
about what consciousness  he wishes to be able to manipulate, and thus becomes interested in the 
“evil” aspects of control over others' consciousness.
The white magician wants  to develop his consciousness, for he knows  that  it is the only thing he 
will be able to carry with him  through  the physical  death. His attitude  towards  this physical  
life is that its one purpose  is to provide him with the catalytic effects of physical experience  
for use in the development  of his thinking.  He  sees himself as a micro-consciousness dwelling 
within macro-consciousness, and attempts  to consciously  unite himself with all that  there is, so 
that  the microcosm  is one with the macrocosm.  To  put  it another way, he is attempting  to 
achieve realization  of union with his creator.  The key to this attempt  is control of 
consciousness.
The more closely  the magician approaches  this goal of realized oneness with the creation,  the 
more able he is to do seemingly magical  things. He  is tuning his mind to that of the Creator,  
and thereby displaying  some of the abilities of creation.

48

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


The  black magician  has the reciprocal orientation in that he is attempting  to achieve separation 
 in mind rather  than  unification.  He glorifies his own individuality and gains power  by 
separating himself from all of creation  and then declaring himself its master.  Both white and 
black magical attitudes and practices are able to build high potentials in the field of 
consciousness, quite analogous  to the creating of potential difference in electrical fields  with 
positive and negative charges. Once a sufficient charge of consciousness has been stored, it may be 
used to create motion or change in consciousness, which in turn effects the physical world for what 
we call good or evil.
Because the essence of man is his consciousness, the true nature of man is perforce magical. All 
men have infinite potential to create whatever changes they may desire. But at present, man on 
Earth seems lacking in the knowledge of his true nature and the abilities of his mind. Most men 
fluctuate as a matter of daily habit between slightly good and slightly evil, building up a slight 
potential in one direction and discharging it, then swinging back a bit the other way. This puts 
him down in a “potential well” of thought. Since he is not polarizing steadily in either direction, 
he can do no magic. Those sufficiently polarized—like Jesus the Christ—perform this “magic” with no 
difficulty. Everyone does have the innate ability to do such magic. The  beginning of the Gospel 
according to John in the Holy Bible contains this statement:
The  true light that enlightens every man was coming into the world  ... to all who received him, 
who believed in his name, he gave power  to become children of God, who were born not of blood, nor 
of the will of the flesh, nor of the will of man,  but of God.7
I am not in any way suggesting that the unity with God, or Creator, or the Christ, is only valid 
when approached  through the doctrines of any particular  religion,  but the concept is clearly 
stated here.
When Jesus told his Disciples:  “These things and more shall you do,” he intended  that those who 
heard those words polarize their consciousness until they regained the natural abilities which we 
presently call miraculous.
Many of the UFO sources indicate that they feel that man on Earth has trouble recognizing in many 
instances the difference  between  positive and negative thought, and for that reason is 
vacillating between  the two.
There are lots of people who have heard about or read a little of the UFO contactee literature, who 
dismiss it as being a series of ridiculous fantasies, like the French peasants  reporting stones 
falling from the sky.

45

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


If  a handful of people reported  contact  instead of thousands,  and if  the communications they 
reported varied widely in content  instead of matching,  then there would  be a much poorer case 
for UFO    contact.  I  have worked with teenagers  who had no previous background  at all in UFO 
research or literature who, after a very short  training period were able to receive,  in a 
telepathic  manner,  hours of communications of the exact  type reported  by UFO   contactees.  
Comparison  of this information  with information  obtained  by other widely separated  contactee  
sources  over the past  zo years always results in the same conclusion:  that  the basic message 
content,  no matter where or who the receiver was, is the same.  Earlier I spoke of the UFO    
contactee  picture as a kind of puzzle,  and a fairly big one at  that.  Some of the pieces of this 
puzzle seem silly or even crazy when one first picks  them up, but carefully pieced  together,  
these contactee  stories begin  to form a recognizable  pattern  of UFO   motive.  I  think this 
pattern  is not easily recognized or understood  for the same reason  that Gellerized spoons are 
hard to accept,  there is very little previous experience  on which to base an analysis.  But that  
the pattern exists is hard to deny. As ufologist Brad Steiger puts it:
For the past  three years I  have been conducting  a serious study of  certain contactees,  whom I  
call “flying  saucer  missionaries,” and I  have noted that a certain  percentage  of the 
information  dispensed in their cosmic sermonettes  has contained a good deal of  accurate  
information and that certain predictions  have been realized.  In my opinion,  many UFO   
researchers—and nearly all news media and orthodox scientists— have been too hasty in their 
assessments  that  the contactees'  messages  are just so much nonsense and 
science-fiction-inspired pseudo-religious prattle.  Although several  of  the contactees  seem  to 
parrot  in a tedious manner  a great  amount  of  the same  basic  “message,”  there may be 
important  clues hidden for us in their fanciful distortions  if only we were to work a bit harder  
to separate  the cosmic wheat from the celestial chaff.
And long-time  researcher,  Professor J.  H.   Bruening of the University of Mississippi,  has this 
to say about  UFO    phenomena,  after studying  it closely fOr 3o years:
UFO    phenomena is a contrived paranormal  event  created for the benefit of the viewer with a 
specific stimulus  content.  This phenomena is a show-and-tell  device precisely  geared  to the 
culture  to which it is presented.

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


Note that all historical UFO    sightings  are always just slightly advanced for the viewers  of 
the time. Medieval sightings were of a fully rigged sailing ship sailing along in the sky! The I8p7 
sightings  looked like a Victorian  science  fiction book illustration  and the crews were all 
reported as being dressed properly  for I8po. Current  sightings  are “space ships”  with 
astronauts  as pilots dressed  in space suits.  Obviously neither a sailing ship fully rigged nor a 
Jules Verne ship could possibly  travel through interplanetary space in those forms from another 
planet  to the earth and back. They all were here in physical form to be sure and were reported as 
such,  but  they did not get here in that  form  by flying here.
This display is intentional  and is a part of a controlled  program  of cultural diffusion of 
special forms of information  into current  earth civilizations. The information  is, however,  in 
coded form! It is not obvious  at all but is mixed in with considerable  “noise.” Not  to be 
melodramatic  but Toynbee has amply demonstrated  that cultural advancement  periodically  is based 
on the productivity  of a small number of creative people who are able to pick the signal out of 
the noise and come up with new conceptual  patterns  as described  by Sorokin  and Kroeber.  It 
would appear  that  the last quarter of this century is such a time,  and perhaps  ...   (the)  ... 
  Invisible  College may be that  group who can decode  the signal and thereby extract  the key 
information.  I  hope they can do this before the Russians do it. The coded data in fact contains  
considerable  information  in the fields of technology,  culture,  philosophy,  religion  and 
sociology.  To  paraphrase McLuhan  the phenomena is the message.  The whole pattern must  be 
considered as a total thing and not examined in a Spencerian  fashion.  If a piecemeal  approach  
is used the total pattern will be lost with a resulting  loss of information.
The rest of the model (of the UFO    phenomena's  meaning) is built around  the proposals  put 
forward as early as Ip47 by the discussants  in the Mark Probert  group in California.  I keep 
coming  back to these  ideas because  they simply do in fact explain details of the UFO phenomena.  
(See THE   COMING OF THE GUARDIANS,  SEANCE REPORTS AND  TRANSCRIPTS 194a-›p6o, ROUND ROBIN ip  o-
ip6o, Vista,  Ca., The Borderland  Science Research Association.)
This model is also found scattered  around in a large part of published UFO data, especially in 
contactee reports,  most of which seem to be true. The  ones I have investigated  do have a ring of 
truth about them. Now, the Extraterrestrial Intelligence  (ETI)  model which is an

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


extrapolation  of our civilization  fails to account for either paranormal phenomena or for the 
reported engineering designs, while the continuous violation of the known laws of physics and 
aerodynamics eliminates  the simple mechanical  model of UFOs. The obvious limitations imposed on 
the use of a space vehicle of a mechanical sort by the sheer distance between solar systems again 
excludes the jet or ion-driven space ship as a possible model.
The  model that does appear  to fit the data is, incredibly enough,  the one which is constructed  
around  the concept of a multidimensional universe which contains technically advanced 
civilizations some of which have reached the capability of multidimensional travel. This travel is 
a space-time  phenomenon where a change of frequency is equivalent  to an instant change in 
location; i.e., they dematerialize “there” and materialize  “here.”  Once here the ship or vehicle 
operates as a physical object in our dimension.  It can violate the laws of physics  by partially 
dematerializing. Its physical appearance is determined  by its mission,  not by any engineering 
demands, and the crew may appear either as themselves  or as manifesting a contrived appearance, 
again depending on the mission.
It would appear  that what  is considered as a change in frequency  is that matter comprising other 
dimensions  varies from our matter in that  the distance from the electron shells  to the nucleus 
is much lesser  there than here. In  a sense  their matter is more “dense”  than our matter is, so 
they expand  their matter in order  to materialize  here and must  hold it in this abnormal  state 
in order  to remain here.  To  return  to their place  they relax their energy field and 
immediately  return. This difference  in matter allows our mutual dimensions  to normally coexist  
without interference  except  in some rare cases where a sort  of  splash-over  takes place during 
which people and objects may appear or disappear suddenly.
The  general cultural impact of the UFO phenomena through its persistent and deliberate 
performances  has been to create a knowledge revolution  of a dramatic sort in the general 
population. This gives the creative minority a really favorable social climate in which to work. In 
a sense the phenomena have created a demand for new ideas—now someone has to come up with them.
I have worked  these ideas out in considerable detail and the more the concept is expanded  the 
more it fits. You know the real problem in

CrtAPTER  TiiREE:        ALITY,  E   c.


theory construction  is timidity. We are all too often reluctant  to move boldly into new domains 
and thus are unable to come to grips with intellectually explosive phenomena.7
What I am saying, then, is that the UFO phenomena are forming a pattern, the heart of which is a 
structure of being and thinking, or a philosophy, which can begin now to be put together. The 
contactee messages especially gives important clues toward the construction  of this philosophy. 
These cosmic sermonettes,  as Steiger terms them, do yield a harvest: there is “cosmic wheat” among 
the “celestial chaff.”



CHAPTER  FoUR
THE  NATUnr  OF  MAN
Few of the many thousands of communications allegedly from UFOs which are available  to the 
researching  scientist  are acceptable  on face value  to him. The reason  for this is that  the 
scientists  have not  formulated  a general  theory which can contain  the contactee  information.  
The scientist  is not  being particularly  stringent  or hard-nosed  in this exclusion  of data; 
this data  simply does not  “compute.”  Some scientists  reject  the data as being unworthy  of 
their attention.  Other, more interested  researchers  look rather longingly at the more dramatic  
aspects of the UFO-related  evidence  and declare  themselves  ready to forge ahead until the new 
understanding  is reached.  In his excellent  consideration  of the metal-bending  and other 
unusual  talents of Uri Geller and the children who are currently demonstrating  the Geller-type  
abilities,  Professor Taylor says:
Part of the job of looking at  the world through  the eyes of a trained scientist  is to look for 
ways of improving our current  scientific models of the world.'
Hopefully,  this is the thrust  of this investigation  as well. This chapter will begin  the 
presentation  of a theory of reality formulated  as a result  of long study of UFO   and paranormal 
 phenomena.  The theory is still speculative, rather  than conclusively  proven. However,  I  
believe  the time has come for it to be presented for consideration  by researchers  and by the 
general public, because familiarity  with the theory offers an entry into the myriad of UFO 
phenomena and contacts which seems  to make sense.

THE PAL   NAvunc or  MAN
Imagine yourself encased  in a heavy rubber suit  and the cumbersome  divers' apparatus,  with the 
big bell face mask on your shoulders.  You are carefully and with some difficulty walking about on 
the ocean floor. The suit, and  the relative difficulty of movement  within  it, is a fair 
representation of the physical  body in which we are encased  and with which we usually identify 
ourselves.  The body that animates  this awkward physical  body may be  called,  as St. Paul did,  
the “spiritual  body,” or, as some occultists  do, the “astral  body.” It has not  been proven  to 
exist in a certain  known manner,  no one yet has ascertained  the precise composition  of the 
astral body; yet there is enormous weight  of common  belief in it, stretching  back to the 
Egyptian belief in the “Ka.” Ghosts and apparitions  throughout  history have appeared

54

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

as witnesses  to the reality of this body. In their well-researched book, Muldoon  and Carrington  
treat rather carefully  the whole array of astral projection  data that  also lends credence  to 
the assertion  that  there is an  astral body.° And Kirlian photography  is catching a luminescence 
 around the physical  body that, according  to some clairvoyants,  comes  not from  the physical  
but from the astral body.  “We look,  they say, something  like an eclipse of the sun by the moon,  
the luminous  astral body.”? This astral body which all of us have,  then,  is the “double”  of our 
physical  body and in fact acts as the electrodynamic,  or bioplasmic,  mold from which is created  
that configuration  of chemicals  that manifests  as our physical body.  This finer body leaves  
the heavy material  body at  the time of  death and is related  to the spirit  or soul. This again 
is not scientifically proven,  but  there is a great deal of descriptive  evidence  to indicate  
the truth of the statement.  Much research has been done and is now in progress  on the nature of 
death and dying by Dr.  Elisabeth Kubler-Ross  and others,  and at this point in their research,  
they are asserting  the presence of a good deal of collected data indicating  a continuation  of  
the individual  consciousness  through  and after the death of the physical  body.
Dr. Lyall Watson creates an elegant exposition  in defense of the non-reality of what we call 
“death,”  but then concludes  that in investigating  the paranormal,  the researcher  is perhaps 
“kept in check by a cautious cosmic nanny.”4 It is his suspicion, and I share it with him, that in 
the investigation of the paranormal we are treading on the edges of a type of knowledge we are not 
intended to have, at least  until we learn to use some new tools for understanding. And the study 
of UFOs very much falls within  this category.
The  spirit body is the more basic of the two bodies. We spend more time exclusively in the spirit 
body than in the physical, for besides dwelling within it before birth and after physical death, we 
remove our consciousness to the world of spirit regularly in sleep. It is a cliché of several 
religions that the spirit world is one in which we have greater abilities, freedom from the 
problems and pain of the flesh, and in general a better deal.
Much research has been done to investigate this spirit world, and the findings are that there are 
not one, but many spirit planes of existence.   Our physical plane, then, is not one of two worlds, 
 but is very much in the minority,  one of many worlds. The  physical world which we are now 
experiencing is the anomaly. This point is getting at the crux of our problems with understanding  
UFOs. It is necessary to understand  that we are forms of consciousness  of a much more flexible 
and immaterial  nature than is appreciated  in our present state of awareness.

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

As we progress on to higher planes of life, we shall incarnate in bodies far more ethereal than 
those now used by us, just as in the past we used bodies almost incredibly grosser and coarser than 
those we call our own today.*
Many people have either voluntarily or involuntarily experienced  out-of- the-body travel for short 
periods. Perhaps the most common experience occurs in the pre-sleep, drifting period, when the 
person feels a floating sensation and discovers himself near the ceiling looking back down at his 
prostrate physical body. This ability to travel out of the physical body is learnable, and there 
are various methods taught to those who are interested, by such groups as the Theosophists  and 
Paul Twitchell's Eckankar. As Twitchell has noted, this type of information  is also in that area 
where knowledge is difficult to come by or to express:
“He who has fully accomplished  soul travel finds it nearly impossible to communicate  his 
experience  to others once he has returned  to the physical form, especially when his traveling has 
taken him above the astral world into the higher planes.”7
So, hard though it may be to prove, my scheme of things into which the UFO phenomena seem to fit 
has as a basic tenet the concept that the physical body does not alone signify life, but 
consciousness signifies life, and that consciousness  exists in a continuum  of reality which 
includes what we now know as life, and death. When the physical body is no longer animate, still 
that consciousness  exists in a continuing  reality, having passed merely to another, lighter 
density of existence.
A  natural addition  to this line of thinking  is the belief in reincarnation, that we have each 
existed through many incarnations,  in various densities of existence,  going from one to another  
largely  through  the gates of physical birth and death. There is an untold number of these 
densities  throughout the universe.  All are equally real. And each, presumably,  has its own 
characteristics so that from many dimensions,  other portions  of reality are not perceivable.  
This is what has happened on our physical plane on Earth. We presently  are experiencing  an 
apparent  isolation.  Here we are, in the rather  gross physical  plane,  moving about  in the 
heavy physical  body, restricted  by the limitations  of five physical senses,  with little obvious 
 reason to develop  the psychic or non-physical  senses which are part of our finer body.  Why are 
we so limited in this density; why is it so difficult  to expand our awareness?  What is the reason 
 for life in this density?  In fact, what  is the reason  for life in all the densities?

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

Most of us Earthmen  have some goals, usually concerning financial security or some accomplishment 
producing  physical reward during our lifetime on Earth. Intertwined with these goals are other, 
more intangible goals, which show forth in our physical lives as feelings for the arts, for beauty, 
for philosophy,  or for the ideal companion. The invisible side of existence constantly tugs at our 
awareness,  through emotion and thought. This sort of pursuit of truth or beauty is one good 
example of the reality of more than just the visible,  physical plane. At various levels of 
density, our objectives as an entity are quite different. Once we are completely removed from the 
physical density of experience,  we realize the infinite nature of existence,  the eternal span of 
our own conscious lifetime, and we begin to get a clearer sight of our primary objective. We become 
aware that there is something worth striving for that is lasting. This is the impulse,  brought  
back into the physical density, which is responsible for the creativity in all areas of life: we 
see in our spiritual selves that which we wish to bring back into our daily lives. The  religious 
impulse, in its pure and unchurched form, is the opposite impulse: to seek while in the physical 
plane to visit and experience the higher reality of eternity. Life is therefore redefined in terms 
of the physical death, which in religious terms becomes a gate to higher life. Both in aesthetic 
pursuits and in pursuit of spiritual understanding there is the key concept: life is not limited or 
tarnished as it seems,  but life and the  living are infinite and eternal. You cannot  take your 
earthly gains with you when you die here. All your goals will die with your physical body, but one 
thing you may take, and that is your consciousness: your mind, your spirit, the eternal you. And in 
this dense physical atmosphere,  you are presently at work shaping not just your earthly self, but 
your eternal self.
Whether we realize it or not, we are all in this process of self-change together. We are growing.  
Not in the physical  body only or primarily,  but most of all in the higher body. This is the real 
evolution. This is the reason for our present Earth experience.  We have chosen to come into this 
Earthly density to experience the emotional catalyst of physical life. The  experience we gain here 
has its results in the evolution  of our minds, our consciousnesses.
You notice I am assuming an intended direction, an  ultimately predictable path, to this evolution. 
I predicate that this evolution  is in the direction towards  the thought of our Creator. As we 
grow in mind, we more closely approach  the fundamental  thought of our Creator. I believe that 
this is our primary objective.  No matter what path we think we are on, this one is

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

either advanced within our experience,  or it patiently waits for us to finish with our dawdling 
and get about the main  business.
The  aura is the observable edge of our higher body, seen  just outside the surface of our physical 
body. People with well-developed psychic senses have seen them throughout history; hence the halos 
around revered models rendered  by many an artist through the centuries.  Now it would seem that 
Semyon Davidovich  Kirlian of Krasnodar  in the USSR has developed a process whereby this aura is 
rendered  not only visible but recordable  by photography. Through his process, a whole world of 
color and life becomes visible to the physical eye. All living things,  plants and people, have 
these auras. The  color and intensity of the aura is an indication  of the nature of the higher 
body as well as the state of the physical body. The  aura seems to change in response to mood or 
the health of the subject,  but its nature is not limited by those qualities of intellect and 
education  by which we set so  much store within the physical illusion. A janitor, for instance,  
may possess  a more intense aura than the well-respected physicist whose office he cleans.
As OAHSPE  puts it:
A man may be wise as to books and philosophy and mathematics  and poetry and great learning,  and 
yet be low in grade as to spirit. A man may know little of all such knowledge,  and may be poor 
withal, but by hardship and experience,  developed  in sympathy and good works done unto others, 
and be high in grade as to spirit.
Each of us, no matter what our circumstances, is experiencing life on Earth for the same purpose: 
further refinement  of the spiritual, auric body. The condition  of our auric glow is a quick index 
of our spiritual development.
There are z  o billion stars in our galaxy alone, and there are uncounted trillions of galaxies  
besides ours. The  creation seems to be infinite,  in terms of the present physical science as well 
as in philosophical  terms. What is it that limits us from experiencing  this infinite creation? 
Anyone who has ever tasted  the heady taste of what lies in store for the developed consciousness 
knows that somehow,  he must continue to seek that awareness of infinity again.
Many of the UFOs are attempting to play a part in this evolution of ours. A large percentage of 
them are in a different density than our physical world most of the time,  becoming “real” to us 
and to the physical world for only short periods. The  UFOnauts  have good reason to act as they 
do, most of


8

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

the reason  being linked to this concept  of the evolution  of mind.  They wish to assist  us in 
the evolution  of our minds.
There is much evidence  that there is a wide variance between sources for UFO activity in our 
skies. Some UFOs are in contact with, and working with other UFOs. Some seem to be operating alone, 
as unaware of other UFOs as we are of the finer densities. Various  UFOs come from various 
densities  both within our “real”  universe and outside of our reality. Their mental state of 
evolution varies widely, some entities not so far ahead of us, some incredibly beyond our ken. But 
they are all interested  in Earth now. This present time seems to be centrally important.  In our 
contacts with the UFOs, we find out why they feel this is so.

THE   FLAT  EARTH  S      DROME
It wasn't so long ago that man considered himself to be living on a flat Earth, with edges  that 
dropped  off into the abyss.  The night sky was a velvet black  bowl, studded with small points of 
light, which turned about  us. At present,  we have made some progress in our understanding  of 
Earth and stars. We see that  the Earth is round, we see that it moves in space; we see that  the 
points of light  are either planets like us or self-luminous  entities like our Sun. We have found 
that  instead of the sky's darkness  being a close and protective  bowl-surface,  space is 
unimaginably  vast, so that even within  the celestial  backyard  of our nearest  star neighbor,  
it would take us 8o,ooo years
to traverse  the distance  thereto.  This is figuring  a velocity of 7  miles per second,  the 
reported escape velocity of our fastest launched space vehicle  to date, Pioneer Io.v  So far has 
our understanding  brought  us: space  travel is a
reality,  but the thought  of doing it, in person,  is still absurd,  especially  if you begin to 
consider  travel out of our planetary system. This is where our science is now: within  the 
boundaries  of our technology  and daily routine we have a serviceable  and solid philosophy  of 
reality.  But  at the frontiers  of physical space and time, we have a vast  uncertainty.  We are 
not equal  to it yet. Its challenges  lie there, waiting patiently for us to seek  them out.
It is in this context  that I  feel the UFOs have arrived here. Perhaps we are on the brink of an 
unfoldment  of understanding  even greater than that which rounded  the flat Earth and gave depth 
to the sky. And the UFOs are acting this time as the insistent  clue to the new reality.  That  
they do not “compute”  according  to our present  understanding  is a welcome characteristic, for 
it is this quality of data which historically  has heralded  a new level of advancement  of man's 
knowledge.  The careful study of UFO and UFO-related phenomena has brought  me to a conclusion  
about  the

                                  CHAPTER  FouR: THE NATUnn  OF  MAN                                
         

nature of reality  that  is the kind of departure  from accepted doctrine  that the flat-to-round  
earth claim was in its day. The  theory has its seeds not just in the ufology data but  in 
disciplines  far afield: atomic physics, parapsychology,  theosophy,  and theology.  I  have paid 
attention  to science and also to pseudo-science. I  cannot  and do not  claim that  the theory is 
scientific,  properly  speaking;  nor do I claim myself as an infallible observer, or receiver  of  
ideas.  I  attempt  to state my theory in such a way that  it can be quickly comprehended.  The 
pleasure and challenge of further investigation is then yours as well as mine. Most of this theory 
is the work of others.  I have only combined  the ingredients,  adding  a few refinements.  Parts 
of this theory may seem absurd at first,  but  then so did the idea of  a round Earth, no doubt.
There is one aspect  of UFO   study which does not yet equal  the round-Earth story: Columbus  and 
his demonstrated  proof has not yet arrived for us!
There is ample data to substantiate  the theory developed in this text. But  a goodly portion of 
this data is not evidential:  it lacks provable  validity.  This means that many a sane and 
sensible man will back off right here. James Randi,  the prestidigitator, puts this point  of view 
well:
I  have often been asked,  “Do   you deny the existence  of ESP and other paranormal  occurrences?” 
 The answer  is that I  doubt  their existence simply because I  have never had evidence presented  
to me that would prove  their existence.  I  cannot  choose  to believe something  because I want  
to. Give me some hard proof, and I will change my mind: until then, I am burdened with Rea1ity,IO
And so are we all burdened with reality:  a reality which is sending  us numerous  and obvious 
clues of an even greater reality.  True science,  I submit,  is not only the explainer of the 
familiar,  but the explorer of all that there is to explore.  The UFO   phenomena seem so often 
like the functioning in physical  reality of the wildest  imagination  of our race.  Carl Jung 
ascribed this phenomena  to just  that source,II Yet  these UFO    events are occurring, and it is 
a valid response  to strive to understand  them,  using all the available material.  This is what  
I  have done; the material treated here is in my opinion  the best material  available for the 
formulation  of a workable solution  to the UFO    mystery.  The test of any theory is its value as 
a predictive and explicative  tool. For several years now,  the UFO    events have been fitting 
comfortably  into this theory.  It is as though I have gotten enough pieces put  into my puzzle so 
that  the remaining  ones are quite easily fitted into the developing  picture of the whole.

                                CHAPTER  FouR:  THE NATUnn  OF   MAN                                
      

The body of the theory has been distilled from z} years of collection of alleged contacts with 
UFOs. No single piece of evidence was judged when received;  but only added to the mass of other 
data. Out of this mass has precipitated a surprising amount of correlation of data with regard to a 
high percentage of UFO related phenomena.



































I



CHAPTER  FIVE

A  SOLUTION  To   THE  MYSTERY  OF  THE   UFO
In the If Nos,  there were many contactees  who wrote books,  gave lectures,  and in general  
profited from their alleged private liaisons with extra- terrestrials.  The most well-known  of 
these contactees  included  George Adamski,  Orfeo Angelucci,  Major Wayne Aho, Truman Betherum,  
Dan Fry, Howard Menger,  George Hunt Williamson,  and George Van Tassel. Serious UFO    researchers 
 of this period tended  to feel considerable  animosity towards  these contactees  because  they 
confused and polarized public  opinion. Most scientifically motivated  researchers  did not and do 
not feel that  these contactees  were anything  but either charlatans  or self-deluded crackpots.
I avoid this judgment, and include the data from some of these sources. Historically,  it is the 
exclusion of data such as this that has at times  inhibited science. I may point out here that 
there is a great distance between the accepting of data and the eventual weighting of it. I've 
carefully read the material published  by the contactees,  and have become personally acquainted 
with several of them.
The twenty years which have passed since the first contactee flurry have produced a plethora of new 
contactees around the world. However,  because of the lack of respectability accorded  to the first 
avowed contactees,  the newer ones have tended to keep the contacts to themselves, except for 
reports to one or the other of the UFO investigative organizations. It has become downright  
unfashionable  to be a contactee.  I personally know numerous silent contactees,  and am familiar 
with the cases of others who have related their strange experiences with UFOnauts only in strictest 
confidence.
The important thing about all of these contactees is that there is a remarkable correlation  of the 
information which they receive, which becomes apparent  to anyone who has taken the trouble to 
research the available literature.
One  of the  more prestigious silent contactees was cited in the television documentary,  UFOs, 
PAST, PRESENT, AND FUTURE. Since he was a full commander  in the U.S. Navy, it is not difficult to 
see why he was reluctant  to have his telepathic contact publicized.  Here is a partial account of 
the contact. It was made at z:oo p.m. on July p, IQ Jp, at CIA Offices at yth and K Streets NW, 
Washington,  D.C.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

D.  Cmdr.             pointed out that during  the latter part of June he and another Naval Officer 
had flown  up to Maine and visited Mrs. S              for the purpose of witnessing  a contact  
and to interview  the lady. Mrs. S
, after the interview  and contact,  asked Cmdr.             why he didn't make a contact  himself. 
 The officer             then tried,  but was unsuccessful.
E.  After his return  to Wash.  Cmdr.             was discussing  the case with Mr.              
and Lt.  Cmdr.             at CIA. At the insistence  of these two gentlemen  he attempted  another 
 contact  and was app. successful  in receiving  messages  from a person called AFFA,  an 
inhabitant  of the planet Uranus.  Cmdr.             would pen his question on a large sheet of 
paper (ques.  put  to him by other z) relax, and some unknown force would guide his hand in writing 
 the answers.  During  the time  that  the message  is being transmitted,  is subjected  to a very 
great physical strain. Of   the many questions  put  to AFFA—some  samples:
@.   Do you favor any government,  religious group, or race?
A.    No, we do not. Signed AFFA.
@.   Will there be a third World War?
A.   No. Signed AFFA.
@.   Are Catholics  the chosen  people?
A.    No. Signed AFFA.
@.   Can we see a spaceship or flying saucer?
A.   When do you want to see it? Signed, AFFA.
@.   Can  we see it  now?
A.   Go to the window. Signed AFFA.
(Mr.            , Cmdr.            and Lt. Cmdr.            all go to the window.) @.   Are we 
looking in the right direction?
A.    (answered vocally) Yes, signed AFFA.
At this time,  approximately  iqoo, 6 July If}p,  these three men saw what they have indicated was 
a flying saucer.  They described  the object  as round, with the perimeter  brighter  than the 
center.  Lt.  Cmdr.              checked with Washington  Center (radar)  and was informed  that 
for

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

some unknown reason radar return from the direction  in which the ship was supposedly  seen had 
been blocked out at the time of the sighting.
.  H.   On  July Io,  it}p, Maj. Friend in the company of Cmdr.               visited the office of 
ONI   to study  the case file of Mrs. Swan.  The record indicates  that Mrs.  Swan has been in 
touch with the following  persons from  the planet  or (system):
AFFA—Uranus Crill—Jupiter ALOMAR—Mercury
PONNAR—Mercury (wanted to leave human  race alone  to stew in its own juice.)
ANKAR—Centaurus
The Navy indicates  that  through  these contacts Mrs. S             has been able to answer  
technical questions  beyond the level of her education  or background.  The case contains records 
of some of the exchanges  that Mrs. S             has had,  and while there is some loose mention 
of how spaceships work and of what  they are made,  there was little of value.  ...
indicated  that  the Canadians  had exploited  this scientific angle.
I.  The S             record indicated  that  there was an organization  OEEV which means  the 
Universal Association of Planets,  and that  the organization  has a project EU   or Euenze (?)  
(earth)  which is being conducted.  What  this project  was to accomplish  was not  mentioned.*
In George Hunt Williamson's  book, THE   SAUCERS SPEAK! we find
some interesting  correlation  with the silent  Commander's  contact. Williamson  was reporting  on 
hls IQJz contact  by radiotelegraphy and telepathy.  He  included contacts with AFFA of Uranus, 
ANKAR-zz  of Jupiter,  and PONNAR of the planet Hatonn in Andromeda.  This is an example of the 
correlations  I'm talking about.  One  of these would prove nothing.  Dozens of such coincidences  
begin to add up to a reasoned description  of a theory which makes some sense out of the massive 
UFO chaos.  One   note: in dealing with these contacts,  you have to remember  that AFFA, PONNAR,  
and ANKAR-zz are most likely not denizens of our particular  density of reality,  and therefore 
would not  be visible  to astronauts landing  on their planets.
The really significant  bulk of correlations  becomes  evident  during  the reading  and 
deciphering  of the messages  and meanings of the alleged

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

communications. I have selected a small, representative portion of the millions of words of 
contactee communications that I have read through the years, in order that the essence of what I 
have come to believe is the message from the UFOs may be made easily available to the reader. I 
make heavy use of the Hatonn source in these two chapters to come because the material has been 
gathered by the experimental  group which I set up and consequently,  I have the confidence of 
knowing precisely how the information was  obtained.
I  am in a craft,  high above you. I  am aware of  your  thoughts,  even though I  am quite some 
distance  above.  I  am,  at  this time, in a craft which is capable  of interplanetary flight.  
This craft has been seen by some of your people.  It will shortly be seen  by more of them.  It may 
shortly  be seen  by yourselves  if  you look for it. The time is closely approaching now when we 
must  be seen much,  much more  by the people of this planet.  The time is now closely approaching 
when we must create a high degree of inquisitiveness among your people.  They are quite inquisitive 
 at  the present,  but  they are not yet seeking.  This is what we intend to do: we intend to 
provide a stimulus  for them,  to increase  their seeking.  The larger percentage  of your people,  
although interested  in our craft,  are not sufficiently  interested  to seek an answer to what  
they see. This we intend to alleviate by stimulating  a more intense interest.^
And Yolanda channels an echo of this reason for the continuing UFO sightings:
Remember  the purpose of these sightings. They are only to open the minds and hearts of the 
skeptical ones ...i
And another contactee, an Arizonan,  relays this from his source:
The  man whose body and mind I am using to speak to you is being used by his own full cooperation.  
Had he not reached out, I would not have been beamed  to him in answer. Yet all who reach out are 
not answered, for all do not reach out in honesty of purpose. Some wish to acquire some personal 
gratification of the moment; therefore,  they do not reach a point of open acceptance  necessary to 
receive me. I am beamed  to many on your world. This man is not unique.4
It seems that they want the people of Earth to seek on their own some answers to the mystery of the 
UFOs.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

I am speaking to you from a craft known  to you as an otevana. It is a very, very large craft 
compared  to your standards.  It is several miles in length. We have been aboard this craft here 
above your planet for some numbers of years. It  is like a world in itself, and is used for 
intergalactic travel. Aboard  this craft we have all of the facilities  that you have in your 
world,  plus many others.
They seem  to be describing  an often-sighted, cigar-shaped  “mother  ship,” which is normally not 
in our dimension of reality and is therefore  not usually visible to us. An interesting  
correlation  here is from the book, OAHSPE,  written by Dr.  John Ballou Newbrough,  first 
published in I88z. The book is said to be the product  of automatic  (telepathic)  writing.
OAHSPE tells of etheric  beings  traveling  to Earth in spaceships  to aid in the evolution  of 
mankind.  One  type of ship mentioned  by them is the “otevan.”*
Here is more about OAHSPE's ships, and their purpose:
As I taught corporeans  to build ships to traverse corporeal seas, so have I taught ethereans  to 
build vessels to course My etherean seas.
As I bound  the corporean  that he could  not raise up in the air above corpor, save by a vessel, 
so created  I My heavens for the spirits of men, that by manufactured  vessels they might course My 
firmament.7


Go build me an avalanza capable of carrying three thousand million angels, with as many rooms, 
capable of descent and ascent, and east and west and north and south motion, and prepare it with a 
magnet  that it may face to the north whilst traveling.


And in this same time the descending stars of other Gods and Goddesses,  the etherean ships from 
far-off worlds, were drawing nearer and nearer; and, on every side, the firmament was as if alive 
with worlds on fire.v
Another  telepathic contact states:
. we are thousands  upon this ship no. iz3y, twenty-three  hundred and fifty three persons,  to be 
exact. We are not persons exactly as you see persons but we are of the different dimensions, 
different  planets. We

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

congregate on this etheric ship, which is the size of a city; as you understand it would  be, to 
accommodate  the comings and goings.
The  purpose of this ship in orbit is to stimulate and to work with all those who are being trained 
to be key light centers in the Western hemisphere  of the Earth ...*°
This is a more specific description,  given  by a channel in a Miami light center group called the 
Mark-Age MetaCenter. And how long has this type of help been coming our way?
We have attempted  throughout  what  you would consider  ancient  times on your planet  to bring to 
mankind,  to those who would desire  the knowledge,  the knowledge  that is necessary for 
experiencing  all of the infinite experiences  created by our Creator.  Some of those who dwelt 
upon  this planet  in the past  have accepted  these  teachings  and have benefited  from them. 
Benefited  far beyond anything  that could be imagined  by those who are not experiencing  the 
benefits.  We have attempted  for many of your years  to bring to all of  those who desire  the 
teachings,  the very simple  teachings  that allow you to know all.
However,  these  teachings  have not  been understood very well.II


How long have they been coming into our atmosphere? For thousands  and thousands  of years.”12

What is life like on your planet, as compared  to our life?
Life on our planet  at one time was much like that  upon planet Earth.  However,  at  this  time 
our entire population  of sentient beings has developed  into a completely  unitary and combined 
ability of each  brother of the planet  known  as Hatonn. The combination  is so strong  that  we 
are able to do many,  many  things. Feeling and being as one, we are seeking as one, and as our 
seeking has led us forward,  we have found our way to be pointed directly at service,  
ever-expanding service.  Service  to all parts of  the creation.
“And as our service has been needed, whereas before we were not capable of discovering the means to 
perform the service that we saw as our service.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

“In this manner,  we have developed  abilities which you may call miraculous.  We have the ability  
to transcend what you know as time and space.  We have access  in a conscious  manner  to knowledge 
of which you have access only during meditation,  in a sub-conscious  manner.  The freedoms  which 
we enjoy,  my friends, are there because we have begun  to see that we are all one.
Realization  is all that  is between  planet Earth and the planet Hatonn.  On  your planet  as on 
our planet,  each blade of grass  is alive with the knowledge of the Creator.  The winds sing His 
praises.  Trees shout for joy in the creation  of our infinite Father.  If you are not able to see 
the Creator,  my friends,  it is a matter  of seeking,  and seeking,  and continued  seeking.  And 
then, my friends, you will begin to realize,  and to understand,  that  the Creation of the Father 
is all around you.
“Planet Earth, my friends, is indeed a lovely planet. It will soon be vibrating in a vibratory 
manner which is far more associated with realization of the Father's creation.  Begin  to realize, 
and move with your planet, as we moved with ours. There is only that which is in your mind, and 
within your consciousness, and within your faith, between the pain, the lack, and the limitation 
which you experience, and the complete freedom which in our vibration we experience.”I3
Here we find the Hatonn identification once more and another reference to seeking. When they speak 
of their vibrations,  they are saying in another way that they are not within our physical  
reality. There is also an indication  here that the planet Earth may be moving into a different 
vibration or area of reality.
We have aided many other planets within this general vibratory level. The aid is given to this 
level by us because we are, shall we say, at the next level of awareness, and are best able to 
communicate  to those people who wish to enter into understanding which we share.
We have dealt with many planets who are beginning a new phase of vibration. We have aided many a 
graduating class, and we have done so successfully. We have also failed, not once but several 
times. It is completely possible for us to fail if it be the will of the people of the planet we 
are attempting to aid.


68

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

We come because we feel the desire  that  brings  us here. And we give what  aid we can to those 
who wish it. Our  thoughts  are available  to those who desire  them.  However,  we attempt  to do 
this in such a way that  no individual  is ever in a position where he cannot  accept  or deny our 
thinking  as he so pleases. Those who are vibrating within  the level that will appreciate  the 
information  that we give surely recognize  that which is truth.
At the present  time, we are far behind where we had hoped to be at  this point while helping 
planet Earth.  We had hoped to have  been much more successful  at reaching  the people of this 
planet.  It is possible  that there will be a smaller graduation  than we had hoped,I4
The reference  to a graduation  concerns  the transition  from our present reality  to the reality 
in which many of the UFOs normally exist, one which is a comfortable  environment  for our higher  
bodies.  These graduation  and transition  references  are found in many and various places:
Our purpose  in coming  at this time is to help speed up these reactions so you will be prepared 
for the change-over  in the Earth's frequency.
This is taking place over a number  of years.  Many of your people are being affected  mentally and 
spiritually  in a discomforting  way,  and some of them in a very spiritual way,Ij

The program  that  is in operation  is to prepare  the Earth for a major rise in consciousness,  to 
what you call Christ  awareness  but what we term communication  with Universal Energy.'*


They are making  themselves  known  to the world as a whole to lead mankind thereby into a New Age 
as the Earth enters  the more intense vibrations of Aquarius,l/

To  sum up just what  Flying Saucers  are, we would say that  they are mechanical devices  
intelligently  controlled  by men like ourselves.  These men originate  from many planets  and 
planes and although  they are different  from one another in spiritual evolvement,  they are banded 
together in an Interplanetary Brotherhood or Confederation  of Solar

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION To  THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

Systems in this area of the Universe. The  purpose of this organization  is to aid their  
brother-man on the planet Earth as the New Age dawns.
The Saucers constitute the “Host” which is the forerunner of the promised  “Second Coming” of the 
Elder Brother. The ORIGIN of the Saucers, however, is not the important consideration—but their 
MISSION is!'


The   ...   most important  reason for their visitation to Earth at this time is that our whole 
solar system is at this time in transit into a new area of space, a new density, and that this is 
changing the vibratory rate of the nucleus of every atom in our planet,  raising it to a higher 
frequency.


“@. Why do they come here—what is their purpose?
“A.  To  try to awaken within  us a yearning for higher  understanding so we can help ourselves in 
preventing any further destruction of our planet, which could conceivably have a bad effect in our 
solar system. It is about time we grew up as a humanity.”*°
Of  course UFO    sources are not  the only ones to sound the graduation theme. The Book of 
Revelation  in our Bible discusses  it in detail, as do the Edgar Cayce readings and that odd book, 
OAHSPE. In SECRETS  OF  THE  ANDES,  a contactee  entity called Aramu-Meru  says,  “Upon the 
horizon Armageddon  is shortly  to come to pass.”21Occult  analysis of  the Great  Pyramid at Giza 
seems  to predict  a transition  period,  as do the   ancient  predictions  of Nostradamus.  These 
references  to “the end” of things as they are,  are certainly  not  a new thing. We  devote a 
chapter  to this  subject  later in this book. For now, I'll just say that  basically  the theory 
has all of us moving into a new area of space,  a new vibration.  It will be a higher vibration.  
The higher  body of each of us will be our basic body, just as the physical  body is here.  This 
higher vibration,  in which many of the UFOnauts  already dwell,  allows for a much more direct  
control of the environment  by mind.  Back in the ’yos,  contactees  were talking about  that time 
in the near future when telepathy,  telekinesis,  and other paranormal abilities would  be 
commonplace  due to the advance of our solar system  into the higher-vibration space. As G.  H.  
Williamson's  contact,  Brother  Philip put it,

7

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  


. the messenger  shall come unto you, even as it was in the days of Pentecost. And the living 
tongues of fire shall descend  upon you. The gifts of the spirit will come unto you. And some shall 
manifest  the gift of healing, and some the gift of tongues, or discernment, and the others.°°


Man has the capacity to express the full spectrum of creation in all of the variations and 
harmonies of the Divine Thought for man was created as a creator.  He has only to learn to express 
these harmonies from his Creator, and there is no end to the extent and the beauty of the 
expression of life which he can manifest.°i


You are beginning to know things. You are beginning to hear things. You are beginning to sense them 
and to use mental telepathy. You are beginning to see beyond the physical vision. When you close 
your eyes, pictures form; colors that you do not see in the three-dimensional, or in the Earth  
plane,  begin to flash before your eyes. You do not know where they come from, because you are 
going into the fourth dimension.
Man has always been in the fourth dimension,  because man always has contained an etheric body 
while he lived in a physical  body on this planet. But that physical body is now being transmuted  
into the etheric body, more closely attuned so the etheric body can be the operating or dominant  
body while on this planet.*4
One  can only wonder if the continually increasing number of children  now beginning to display 
these abilities might  not be the promised harbingers of the new vibration.
So the UFOs are here, they say, for a specific purpose, at this specific time. There are like a 
“red alert”  to our inner self: an alert that it is time for us to remember who we are, and why we 
are here.
“Behold a fairer time is with you than any men have dreamed of; behold there is a gladness again in 
the heavens when a host not of earth
is seen of all shepherds.”*i



7I

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

We of the Confederation  are here,  as I  have said,  in great  numbers.  We are allowing your 
people  to see us: at present  we are allowing  more of your people to see us. You can see us, as 
this instrument  has. I  will appear  to you in the very near future.  I  will be seen in your 
skies.  It is only necessary  that  you continue  in your seeking.  You see, my friends,  it is 
truly written  that, in order  to find,  you must seek.  That is the scheme of things at this time. 
All of our efforts have been directed  towards fulfilling  this simple phrase:  “Seek and ye shall 
find.” Why do you think we have been so elusivei This was wisdom,  my friends,  that  it is 
necessary  to seek in order  to find. You will understand  this wisdom,  if you think about  it. It 
is a very old and tried system  of producing  an increase  in the awareness of an individual,  for 
only he himself can produce  this increase  in awareness.  We  cannot  impress  it upon him.
But he can very easily increase  his awareness  many,  many-fold.  But  the
seeking is necessary.**


And we will always continue  to learn,  for, take away curiosity and take away  the thrill of 
living and seeking and man could not exist. There would not even be a creation.  So we shall never  
reach the end of that road. We shall always seek.*?
Boiling this basic desire of the UFOs to help us down to a workable  plan seems to entail first of 
all the requirement  that the UFOnauts have a great deal of patience. They want to help us without 
pushing us around. In advertising  jargon, one could say that they're giving us the soft sell of 
all time.
I am aware  that many of the people of your planet  consider  that we have wasted too much time in 
our attempts  to awaken  the slumbering population of your planet.  We would greatly prefer to act 
much,  much more rapidly,  but  the speed and the degree of our activities must be regulated,  not 
by us, but by you. The acceptance of us by the total population of this planet  is the only 
governing  principle  that controls our activities.
We will, very shortly, increase these activities.  More and more of our craft will be seen by the 
people of your planet. This can be done because they are willing to accept  us. We will do this, in 
order that their curiosity will be stimulated. This curiosity will then lead them to

7*

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

seeking the truth of our presence. This truth is what they desire, even though  they do not 
consciously realize it.°*


Give help without obligation. Lead without dominating. This is the Mystic Virtue.°v
The  UFOnauts report  that  they have quite a bit of experience  at making contact  with 
populations  such as ours.  Their  technique  seems  to be  gradually acclimatizing  the people of 
this planet  to their presence.  From the days of the first widely-publicized sightings,  and Orson 
Welles’  historic  radio broadcast  of THE  WAR OF  THE  WORLDS  that caused such panic, we have 
come to a time when there is a high degree of acceptance of the UFOs among young people, with 
little indication  of fears of attack. We may think that, OK,   if  they really are here,  they 
should get on with it! Land!
Make contact  now! But in the light of their statements  about  the speed of their actions  being 
regulated strictly  by our acceptance  of  them, we can begin  to understand  their elusiveness.  
For though  the young do tend to accept  them,  many of the rest of us do not. Also, we 
occasionally  find indications  that  their lifespan does not have the limitations  of ours. As the 
contact  “Hoova”  tells Puharich,  “We occupy our physical  bodies for about  a million years at a 
time.”i° This would definitely make a time difference  of fifty or a hundred  years much more 
acceptable.
We of the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the Infinite  Creator are here to serve you. 
It is a great privilege,  yet we must remain aloof. This is our understanding  of proper service,  
for in serving your fellow man,  it is necessary  that  you serve his exact wants and needs.  You 
cannot determine  for him what  these are. Therefore,  if his wants and needs lie outside  the 
limits of your ability or your desire  to serve,  it is best  that  you remain  aloof,  as we. 
There are, however,  many,  many of your people who desire exactly our service.  For this reason it 
is impossible  at  this time to come among you. For this reason it is necessary  at this time to 
act through instruments  such as this one.i*
It is necessary  that  if an individual  is to make progress in a spiritual sense,  that it  be a 
result  of an inner-directed seeking  of his own,  rather than an outer-directed commandment  given 
 to him by an organization of a religious  or other nature. For this reason,  it is necessary  that 
we do not make ourselves  too generally known and accepted  by the people of

73

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

your planet.  If  we were to do this,  then the inner direction of their seeking would be for the 
most part lost. This is the basic reason  for the conditions  that  you experience  in your present 
 physical environment.
These conditions  have  been selected by yourselves,  and by others,  and they are a natural 
consequence  of the creation,  so as to act  upon the consciousness  of the individuals  and create 
an atmosphere  which will produce the inner-directed seeking for truth of which I  spoke.
Unfortunately, many of the people of this planet  at  this time are so involved with activities 
that are of an extremely  transient  and unimportant  nature  that  they do not have opportunities  
for experiencing  the growth of an awareness  that is necessary  in order  to accomplish  the 
seeking  that  they actually desire.
We of the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the infinite Creator have attempted  to 
balance  between  too much exposure of our craft  to the people of this planet  and too little 
exposure.  If  we were to become  too much a common phenomenon,  so that our presence was beyond 
question,  then we would eliminate,  at least in part,  a large interest  in seeking for spiritual  
truth. This may seem  to be a strange  or unusual point of view,  but we have observed this in the 
past,  and since the basic reason  for the physical isolation  of a people such as yourselves is to 
cause an inner-directed seeking,  then it is evident  to us that we should follow,  as closely  as 
possible,  this plan.
Our craft and our people have visited this planet many, many times in the past. This was done only 
after the civilization  that we visited was ready to accept  us. This was done only after  the 
civilization  had reached a satisfactory  level of inner-directed seeking of the truth of the 
creation, and therefore  it was displaying  the principles of love and brotherhood that are the 
product  of this seeking.
We are at  this time forced by conditions  over which we have no control to visit  the 
civilizations  of your world, even though  they have not reached a state of spiritual awareness  
satisfactorily high enough for our contact.  This presents  a problem.  The problem is that we must 
approach  a part of the peoples  of this planet without distressing  the rest.
We are attempting  to do this. It is necessary  that  the evidence of our visits and our 
communications be of such a nature  that it can be rejected or accepted by anyone who is exposed  
to it. There will be, unfortunately, a degree of infringement  upon the people of this planet
74

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

who do not wish to accept  our contact.  This is an unfortunate condition,  but it is one with 
which we must deal, since at  this time it is necessary  that  those of the people of this planet 
who are seeking  truth be given truth.
It will not be necessary  to prove to these people  that what we are giving them is truth, for if 
an individual has reached an understanding  of truth through  the inner-directed seeking of which I 
spoke,  then he will recognize  this  truth when it is given  to him.  It is therefore  only 
necessary  that we,  by some means  that will not  disturb  those who are not seeking our contact,  
give to the rest  of  the people of  your planet  that which  they seek in a form that  is 
suitable.
This,  then, is our service:  to lend a helping hand up the ladder of spiritual evolution  to that 
part of the people of this planet  at  this particular  time,  a time that  is unique in the 
history of this planet, a time that must  be dealt with in a more direct and forceful way than 
previous times and experiences  in the history of this planet.
We are extremely privileged  in being able to offer this service to those who seek it: and our 
service  is largely given  to them  through  the process of their daily meditation.  If  they are 
to avail themselves  to this service,  it is necessary  that  they do so through meditation.i°


It is not our policy to fraternize with the natives of any of the worlds we supervise.  We did that 
 in eons past and it  brought  disaster  to all and gave rise to fantastic  legends in your own 
world.is


Karmically we cannot overrun  or overrule,  as you would put it in your parliamentary  terms,  your 
mass desire.  We could not do that.  Don't you understand  that?  You are there to set  up the 
desire and to help them have the desire for us. But we cannot  interfere,  or cannot  overrun them. 
Please understand  this basic rule of the universal law.  Please,  it is very important.  Don't 
expect  us to come down and force you into seeing  us or accepting  us. This must  be accomplished  
from the Earth plane level. Please  understand.?4

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  



We must remember  that  according  to Universal  Law,  our space visitors cannot  interfere with 
our progress on Earth.  Since the Earth is only a classroom  in the Father's  many mansions certain 
lessons must be learned  before Earthman earns graduation  to higher spheres.  An eighth grader 
doesn't  enter  the first grade  to make fun of the students  because they do things more simply 
than himself.  Likewise,  spacemen  aren't going to step in and dictate to us; they are going  to 
let  us learn our lessons in our own way, even though they will undoubtedly  be painful lessons,  
for the history of the Earth has proven  this to be always true on this sorrowful  planet!ii


The  Space People themselves state that by Universal Law they cannot interfere with man's 
progression  upon the Earth.s*
The  one thorniest question asked of ufologists is “Why don't they land?” Or,  put another way, 
“Why don't they contact our governments?”  If you accept these contactees'  messages,  then this 
thorny question is thoroughly laid to rest.
The  UFOnauts in this particular  group look upon  planet Earth as a place with one function: the 
growing of people.  Not their bodies,  but their spirits. Hence they are concerned only with this 
people's spiritual growth. They are celestial gardeners  here to enrich the etheric soil of mental 
communication which is available to everyone through  meditation.
We cannot  come directly  to you, and land upon your surface and speak with you. For it would do no 
good. We must provide a spark,  a clue, something  for a start,  a start of seeking.  Seeking  that 
 results in finding the truth  that is within you. This, my friends,  is the only way to help the 
people of your planet.  For they must help themselves.  They must find the truth  that is within  
them. They must initiate the seeking.  All that we can do is to provide a stimulus  for their own 
initiation of this seeking.37


We of the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the Infinite Creator avail ourselves  to this 
knowledge  through meditation.  For this reason,  we do not come among your people,  giving  them 
our service

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

directly,  for we are aware of detrimental  effects upon them in doing  this.  Our service is aimed 
at what  they actually desire.  What  they actually desire is an ability  to realize  truth.  In 
order  to give to them  this ability,  it is necessary  that we bring about  a condition  to cause 
within them a personal  seeking of service and a personal  seeking of knowledge of the truth of the 
creation.  Only through  this process can they understand  the truth  that is within  them. It is 
something  that cannot  be too effectively given to them in an intellectual  manner.i*


Allow people to read transcripts  of these transmissions  only when they ask. And only ifthey 
ask—never  at any other time. We cannot stress this enough. Never force either our, or your, 
opinions on anyone.
People will come to you when they are ready to accept what we have to say.In


Each man, and hence each world,  must learn the lesson and make its own progression.4°


.  they look upon us as younger  brothers whom they love dearly,  but whom they know must solve 
their own problems  in order  to learn  the lessons well.  ...   Growth and progress  are 
individual  matters.  The way may be pointed,  but each must  travel it for himself.  He  may 
choose to travel  the main highways,  meeting  and mastering  the lessons  brought  by each moment, 
 or he may choose detours.  The choice lies with each one alone.JI
At  this point, we can see fairly well the reason  that  the craft  are here, according  to the 
contactee  messages.  The   UFOnauts want  to help us, if we want  to be helped,  by sharing with 
us their philosophy,  if you will, or their concept  of truth.  Or  call it  their religion,  if 
you must. I personally hesitate to use any of these terms,  but especially  the term  “religion.” 
There is a good deal of feeling caught  up in the word itself.
Many scientists  think that  the studies  and beliefs of religion  are unscientific. And many 
clergymen  find science  to be unreligious  or even sacreligious.  I would like to remove  this 
discussion  from  both camps,  and refrain  from

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

getting  tangled up in semantics.  Whatever  your  bias,  just look at this data with an open mind. 
Remember  that  there are always problems encountered in the communication  of both scientific  and 
religious concepts.
There is another consideration,  too, in studying  these contactee  messages. We must make 
allowance  for the limitations  of vocabulary  and religious  and scientific expertise  of  the 
telepathic  receivers  of  these contactee  messages.
They could only repeat  that which was to some degree comprehensible to their own minds; therefore, 
 we receive  largely simplified versions  of the original UFOnaut's concepts.  Yet  these views are 
most provocative.  Here, an entity from Hatonn blends science and religion in a discussion  about  
life itself:
Life is composed  of two materials.  One   of them is what  you might call consciousness. The other 
is light.  But my friends,  consciousness  is love, and light  is its physical manifestation. All 
that you are able to experience in the way of a physical  universe  is composed of one ingredient.  
This ingredient  we will call light, since  this word is closest  to what we wish to express,  and 
it is the only word that we have available in your language to express  the basic  building block 
of our Creator.
Originally,  the Creator expressed  a desire. This desire was expressed  in a state of 
consciousness  that  is best described in your language using the word,  love.  The Creator,  then, 
expressing  desire  through love,  caused the creation of all matter.  He  caused  the creation  of 
light. This light was then formed  in its infinite configuration  in the infinite universe  to 
produce  all of the forms that  are experienced.  All of these forms,  then, are molded or 
generated  through  the expression  of consciousness  that  is love.  They are composed  of a 
fabric that is light. For this reason we  greet you each evening,  with the statement  “in his love 
and his light.” For this,  then, encompasses  all that  there is.
The  consciousness  that  creates,  and the fabric  that  is love and light.
The love that produces  the configuration  of light occurs in what we term various vibrations,  or, 
using a word in your language  that  is not sufficient  but somewhat  descriptive,  
“frequency”—love occurs,  then, in various vibrations or frequencies.  These vibrations  or 
frequencies  are the result  of free will. When  the Creator produced  this original concept,  the 
concept  included  the gift of freedom of choice to all of the parts  that he created.  These parts 
are then totally free to change  the original  thought.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

In doing so, they change what you understand  to be the vibration of some portion of the original 
thought.
Each of you here this evening have a vibration. This vibration  is yours, and you have control over 
it. Your freedom of choice has created the love that manifests  the light  that is the fabric 
molded into your physical form.
This is the simplest analysis of all created forms of all of the creation. Each part of it is able 
to utilize its own consciousness, through the principle of freedom of choice, to vary or change the 
original vibration. The  creation,  therefore,  continues to be self-generating, in an infinite 
variety. This was provided for in the original  thought of the Creator. It was provided  that he 
might generate, in an infinite way, in an infinite number of forms.
Through  this use of freedom of choice,  man  upon  planet Earth has generated  many forms. Some of 
these forms were never envisioned  by the Creator with the original thought.  However,  they were 
allowed for, due to the principle of freedom of choice.
This is perhaps  the most important  principle in this creation: that each of the Creator's parts  
be able, throughout eternity,  to select for themselves what they desire. In experimenting with 
this desire, there has in some instances become a slight problem in straying away from thoughts and 
desires that would  be most beneficial. In experimenting with these desires, some of the created 
parts have lost contact with the original desire.
This has occurred in many places in this creation. We are here at present to communicate,  to those 
who desire to find their way back to the original thought,  information  leading those who desire 
the path back along the path to the original thought. It is necessary that we act in such a way so 
as to lead only those who desire this pathway along it; therefore not violating the important  
principle of total freedom of choice.
As I was saying previously, each of you, as do all parts of this creation, have a particular 
vibration or frequency. This vibration  or frequency is the only important  part of your being, 
since it is an index of your consciousness  with respect  to the original  thought.


79

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

When an individual is aware of life in its infinite sense, he is also aware of the benefits of 
matching this vibration with the vibration of the original  thought. It is our effort to match our 
vibration with that of the original  thought. This is the reason that we of the Confederation  of 
Planets in the Service of the Infinite Creator are here now. For this service that we perform is a 
service that would be in harmony with the original  thought. This, then, produces within  us a 
vibration  more harmonious  to the original thought.
We are attempting  to give instructions  to those of the planet Earth who would seek the 
instructions  how to produce within  themselves  the vibration  that is more harmonious  with the 
original  thought.  This, as I have stated before, was demonstrated  upon your planet  many times 
before  by teachers.  The last one of whom you are familiar was the one known to you as Jesus.  He  
attempted  to demonstrate  by his activities his thinking.  His thinking  was in harmony,  much 
more than those about him, with the original  thought.  His  vibration  was,  therefore, much more 
in harmony  with the original vibration.
For this reason  he was able to work what were called miracles.  However, the original  thought  
was  that  all of  the parts of  the consciousness  that were of the original  thought  should be 
able to generate  by thought  and consciousness  what would  be desired.  The man known  as Jesus 
desired, and therefore  created,  since  the vibration  which he generated was in harmony  with the 
vibration  which the Creator  used to form the creation.
It is only necessary,  then,  that  an individual  become  in harmony with the vibration  that 
formed  the creation  in order for him to act within  the creation  as did the Creator,  and as 
does  the Creator.  This was demonstrated  to you by the one known  to you as Jesus. Not  only did 
he demonstrate  what  could be done in a very small way,  but also how to think in order  to do 
this.
Unfortunately, man  upon planet Earth has misinterpreted the meaning
of this man's life.
At this time we wish to point out the true meaning of this man's life. It was desired that those 
who were aware of his thinking and his activities then follow the example, and as he did, become 
more in unison and in a harmonious  vibration with the thought of their Creator.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

We are here to bring you information  and to impress  upon you in a nonintellectual way during 
meditation  the idea that is necessary  for you to increase  the vibratory  rate of your real being 
so that it is harmonious with the original  thought  of our creator.  Our   teachings  will be 
simple, as were the teachings  of  the one known  to you as Jesus.  It is only necessary  that you 
attempt  to understand  these  teachings.  Understand them in depth.  Understanding  in depth can 
be done only through meditation.
And then, once these teachings are understood,  it will be necessary that they be applied, and that 
the individual so desiring to apply them demonstrate in his daily activities and in his daily 
thinking the concept that was the original thought. The concept  that we have spoken to you as 
being love. We have used this word, as I have said, because it is as close as we can come,  using 
language,  to the original thought.
However, this word is miniature compared  to the original thought. The original  thought can be 
obtained in your intellect, only to a very small degree. It  must be obtained in your total being, 
through the process of meditation.
Once this is done, and once your activities and thinking reflect this thought, your vibration will 
increase. At this time you will find the kingdom  that has been promised  to you. It is truly all 
about you. It is only necessary for you to grow in order for you to receive it. This growth is 
simple: spend time in meditation  and learn of its simplicity.4*
All exists,  then, in the love and light of the Creator, or to say it another way, all that exists 
is made of light, directed  by love. The concepts of love and light are not exact, the space 
contacts tell us, but they are the most appropriate words available in our language.  Here are 
correlating  passages from several other sources, which repeat the basic thought: some use the word 
“love,” some the word “light,” and one the word “energy,”  but they all are aiming at the same 
concept.
But until all men agree about the principle taught by the collective prophets and principal  
teachings,  you can have no equation  by which to work all your difficult problems. The  equation 
is that God is love, and love is all; and love is the key, or Spirit is the force, by which all 
love is possible between  men and between  planes, planets and forces of nature.4i

8z

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  



Love is the essence of all creativity.  Without  love,  there would  be no  life. For it was 
through love that God   received  the spark of the idea of creation  and conceived  the vision of 
creating man to be a part of Him.44


...  attune  the frequency of your own individual  being nightly,  calling upon  that  being  by 
whichever  name you know  that  being—the Infinite One, God,  the All-Knowing  One, Our Radiant  
One—to send forth His light  to assist  you in attuning  with those frequencies  of Light which are 
being sent forth now at  this time into the very core of your own beings.4


My   friends,  remember  that  you are living in a universe of energy.  Even you, yourself,  are 
pure energy.4*
This concept of a vibration forming light is in precise agreement with the findings of Dewey B. 
Larson's revolutionary  unified field theory which he calls the Reciprocal System.  Larson says:
If  this is a universe of motion in which matter is a complex  of motions, then motion is logically 
prior to matter.47
Let's take a look at a further application  of the UFO    concept  that consciousness  is prior to 
matter:
The creation was initially conceived  by our Creator  to be of a property so as to reflect  the 
impressions  given to it by man.  It was so designed  as to express his desires in any way that he 
chose.  There are various levels or densities  in this creation:  levels and densities  that are 
not yet suspected  by your physical scientists.  Each of these levels is expressing the desires of 
those of the Creator's  children who are acting within  it.
Each level or density is moldable  or may be acted upon by the thoughts of the individuals  within 
it  to a greater or in some cases a lesser extent than that  appreciated  by those who dwell upon  
the surface of your planet  at  this time.  It is only necessary  to desire an effect  to create 
it.
This is what  the Creator of us all provided for us. This is not understood  at present  by the 
population of the surface of your planet: however,  it is in actuality the truth of the Creation  
that  they are
8z

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

experiencing  at  this time.  The conditions  that you experience  in your daily activities  are a 
result  of  your  thinking  and the thinking  of those about  you and others on your surface.4*
And again:
.  Thought  can also  be transmitted  on many frequencies  ...   The effect that  these frequencies 
will have in the envelope  of your earth will depend on the frequencies of thought. Now you say,  
“What  determines the frequency  of the thought?”  There are several  things there too; the motive 
back of the thought  will determine  somewhat  the frequency— also the type of thought.  For 
instance,  thoughts  of resentment,  of hate, of fear, each has its frequency,  and this frequency  
has its effect,  and will eventually seek out  the same vibration  or level of vibration  in the 
envelope.  As this builds up in the earth's envelope  and becomes  greater and greater in quantity, 
 it will have its effect  upon the earth  ...4v
It is interesting  to note, in the context of these messages,  that all of the people who are 
currently able to produce Geller-type effects are generally of the opinion  that the way they cause 
the direct alterations  in their physical environment  is to want those alterations  to occur. They 
desire that the metal change its shape, or whatever,  and this change happens. I speculate that the 
mechanism  of this bending and breaking of materials  by mind has to do with the mind's affecting 
an alteration  of the basic vibration or space- time mismatch which Larson identifies as the most 
basic building block of the material  universe,  the photon, or light.
A much greater refinement  of this ability would theoretically  allow the individual  to create his 
own reality  by arranging  the vibration  of the fabric of space-time  as he desired.  As he 
thought,  so would it be. It is the reported condition in the finer planes of existence,  as 
reported by astral travelers  too numerous  to cite. Indeed,  the ability  to cause changes in our 
environments by our own efforts of will seems a desirable  talent  to cultivate.  The UFOnauts  
tell us how to go about  achieving  fantastic abilities.  The instructions  are seemingly simple,  
yet because of their need to put  their concepts  into our language,  there is always the big 
question  of whether we are able to fully understand what  they mean.
Seeking, my friends, is, as we said, extremely important.  First, I would like to explain why 
seeking is important. Seeking is a way of growing. It is in truth for the people of this planet at 
this time their only way of truly rapidly growing; growing, my friends, in a sense that is 
spiritual.
8

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

The people of this planet at this time are almost  all children,  in a spiritual sense.  Most of 
them are not at this time seeking spiritual growth.  This is very important,  if an individual  is 
to rapidly  grow, spiritually.  All of us throughout  all of space are growing,  in a spiritual 
sense.  However,  some of us are growing much more rapidly  than others. The reason  for this 
growth is simply  that  these are the ones that are seeking.
It is written in your holy works  that it is necessary  to seek if  you are to find. This is with 
reference  to finding spiritual enlightenment. This is in reference  to developing  the awareness  
that is necessary  for man on earth to develop  if he is to take his rightful place in the 
creation.
We of the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the Infinite  Creator are aware that seeking 
is necessary  if  one is to get where he wishes  to be, and he wishes  to be at a higher state of 
awareness.  Look about you,  upon your planet.  There are many conscious  beings,  in  many forms 
of life. There are the animals,  and birds,  and the fish,  and man on earth. And each has a state 
of awareness.  But it seems  that man has the higher state of awareness.  And yet we tell you that  
this awareness is very minimal. And the awareness of man on earth can be raised to an awareness  
that he would consider  godlike.
But, my friends,  this is what was meant  for man to have.  This is what was the original concept  
of the Creator:  that  this awareness would be possessed  by all of his children.  This is what  it 
is necessary  to seek,  if you are to find this awareness.
The   reason  that  it is necessary  to seek this awareness  is that  it cannot  be given to you. 
It is something  that each individual  must find for himself. It  is not a difficult  thing to 
find. It  is a very simple  thing  to find. It  is only necessary  that  the individual  go about  
seeking in a proper way. We are here  to attempt  to aid those who desire  our aid in seeking our 
awareness,  to find it. We will not attempt  to confuse  those whom we wish to aid with complex  
lectures on various  problems  and concepts.
We will simply give to them  the simplest  of  the Creator's  ideas.  For, my friends, His  ideas 
are not  complex.  It  is man, especially  man on earth, who has made a complex set of rules and 
conditions  for spirituality.  The Creator's concept,  my friends,  is extremely simple.  This we 
are here to bring to you. It is only necessary  then  that  you seek an understanding  of this 
simplicity.  Then,  upon understanding  it,  demonstrate  it in your

84

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

daily lives,  and in your activities  and associations  with your fellow man. Then,  my friends,  
the awareness  that was meant  for you will be yours.  It is an extremely  simple  process.  It is 
only necessary  that, first,  man on earth seek.
Seek, my friends. This is what is necessary. This is the first step. Seek awareness. Seek the 
spirituality that was meant to be yours, and surely you will find it. For this is the Creator's 
plan: that all of his children should have this.
Seeking, my friends, is extremely simple. And yet, through the powers of your intellect, with the 
best of intentions it is possible to make it seem complicated.
There is the complication  in your vision of the concept of time; and there is the complication  in 
your vision of the concept of space. And you say “Where, and when, may I seek? In what place may I 
find holy ground? And at what time may I seek the Creators”
My friends, you are the Creator. For the Creator is you. And, my friends, as it is written  in your 
holy works, the place whereon you stand is holy ground.
There is no complication  in time, for all time is here and now. There is no complication  in 
place, for all place is here and now.
My friends, there is naught  but seeking: there is naught  but the Creator. It is only necessary 
for you to turn inwardly, into the light, and enter the light.
These words are poor,  but they lead the way to a new understanding. It is not necessary to have 
the most perfect meditation  or the most proficient spiritual moments in order to be seeking. It is 
necessary only to turn your will.i°


So we must desire, we must have the desire, and then we must be willing to work for it, to 
practice,  to develop. You see, we have many powers within  us, greater powers  than you can 
imagine,  but we must develop them, you see, and as we master one, we become aware of others and we 
master  them, and so we do, on and on, but it requires great effort especially in the beginning. As 
you gain more confidence in

8

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

yourself and in your powers  to do these things, you see, it becomes easier and easier, for it 
becomes, it's like it's natural to do this.i*
So we are supposed  to seek. But how do we go about seeking? And what is the object of our search?
There are many ways,  my friends, of gaining what you seek.  However, what you seek now will 
change.  It will change as you seek it, for this is the nature  ...   of seeking.  For as you seek, 
you find, and as you find, you understand.  And  as you understand,  you continue  in seeking,  but 
at a different  level.
So do not attempt  to understand  that which at present  seems  to be beyond you. Simply go within, 
 and you will be led to an understanding that will place you upon a new plateau,  from which you 
will be able to view much,  much more of reality.
Seeking, my friends, is not a direct attempt to understand  each intellectual question which 
crosses your mind. Seeking is the attempt to know one's Creator. There will be in your seeking an 
unfoldment  of understanding. Each step will show itself to you. When it does, raise yourself upon 
it, so that you may find the next one.
We bring  to man of Earth understanding, and yet we cannot speak  to him and cause him  to 
understand.  We cannot  communicate  through channels  this  understanding. We can only point  out 
directions for his seeking.  For it will be necessary for him to change  his point of view,  and to 
change  it, he must  understand;  and to understand,  he must seek.
There will be many paradoxes  in your seeking,  for this is the nature of seeking.  But as you 
continue,  these will dissolve,  for you will reach a new plateau,  and a new understanding. And 
the seeming paradox  that you have bypassed will appear in its true light. Meditation,  my friends, 
is the only method of which we know  to allow an individual  to rapidly form  this new basis for 
his understanding. For this is not dependent upon preconceptions. It is not dependent  upon  the 
definitions of a language  that was never intended for spiritual seeking.
Redefine that which you experience.  Redefine it through your seeking, and through your growing 
awareness of the creation and our Creator.
And then,  my friends,  you will not question,  for you will know. For you will have grown  in your 
understanding.

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

It is sometimes  frustrating  to be unable  to find answers  to those questions  that seem 
paramount,  and directly in the path of your seeking.  But these too will fade,  as you pass  them 
by, and become more and more aware of the single  truth  that permeates  all things,  and answers  
all questions.  We will continue  to aid you in any way that we can,  but primarily we will point  
out to you the wonders and the joys of the creation  that  you experience.  And we will attempt  to 
bring  to you an understanding  that will be the result of your meditation.i*
They realize that they cannot really express themselves fully through our words:
This is the sad part of their contacting  us on this earthy plane of expression,  where we are very 
limited in interpreting mental impressions and meanings into words.ii
But they are not hampered critically by this communication  handicap, because what they want us to 
do more than anything is meditate and get in touch with our own higher awareness:
. we should consider  the highest state of spiritual harmony, love, an awareness of which we can 
conceive and so make this state of consciousness our own personal goal. We should keep revising our 
goal upward as our concepts and realizations of the nature of our Creator grow and blossom within 
us.i4
How can we seek this higher awarenessi The UFOnauts  refer again and again to a quotation from our 
own Holy Bible:
Ask, and it shall be given you; seek and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you. For 
every one that asketh,  receiveth; and he that seeketh, findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall 
be opened.»
Once we begin to come into this higher consciousness, say the space brothers, we begin to learn a 
new way to live, a way focusing on service to others:
Service,  my friends, is very natural. It is the way of the Creator. It is the plan of the 
Creation. Everything in the creation is performing a service. The vegetation  that is abundant  
upon your planet performs a service.
But your people ignore this. The animals upon your planet perform a service,  but this is largely 
also ignored. The flowers, the very air, the water perform a service, but this is ignored. If it 
were taken fully into

87

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

consideration, it would  become obvious  that everything  in the creation is there to perform  a 
service.  This includes  all the Creator's  children.
Each of you is here to perform  a service.  This is the plan of this infinite creation.  This is 
how it works. It is only necessary  to understand  this, and then all things are possible.  
Unfortunately, upon  the planet  that you now enjoy,  this principle  is not understood.  Very, 
very few of those who inhabit  the surface of this planet  understand  the simplicity and totality 
of this plan.  It is the way the creation  functions.  It is only necessary  that  you understand  
this, and then perform with the best of your ability. Perform  these services  to your fellow man, 
and then you too will be functioning  the way that  the Creator of us all planned.i*


.  we must learn  in spiritual work to be flexible,  to be open,  to be of service  to one 
another.i?


It is because all things are interrelated  and all parts of the whole must cooperate with each 
individual  segment  of the whole; giving,  flowing  to one another  the priceless energies and the 
goodwill of love and comradeship  which must  bring forth the highest  in each part of the living 
creative force field on the planet at this time,  and with those who work in and through  the 
planet at this time.i


The  Lord answered: Serve thy Creator  by doing good unto others with all thy wisdom  and strength, 
and by being true to thine own highest light, and all knowledge shall come to thee.iv


You cannot grow by taking in all the truth and beauty of the inner life which you can find and just 
holding it there. You must bring it forth into your daily life and live as best you can by its 
tenets and share it with others who ask to know. We may only grow by being agents in the great 
river of life which flows into our world from our Creator. We must let our Light shine forth. If we 
do not give of that which we receive to those who seek, in the same spirit that it was given to us, 
we become a full and stagnant  pond and we can receive no more.*°

88

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  



I gave thee Light of Life that you might extend My action; that others might feel the joy of Me 
that are in darkness  bent, who are trouble- blinded and cannot see that I am there.6I
All right, we understand  that we should attempt to be of service to others. But that is not as 
simple as it might seem! How are we supposed  to go about determining what “service”  is?
Service,  my friends, is an extremely difficult task to perform effectively. It  is necessary first 
to define the objectives of true service in order to understand  how one may serve. There are two 
classifications under which all services may be divided. The first classification includes those 
services that are of a transient or unlasting nature. These are the services that you perform in 
your daily activities for your fellow man, and they are truly services.
But there is a test that may be administered  in order to determine whether  the service performed  
is of a transient or unlasting nature, or whether it should fall into the second classification, 
which includes all services of a permanent and not-transient  nature. The  test is to determine 
whether or not the service is of such a nature to cause spiritual growth for the one served.
This, my friends, whether it is known to the individual or whether he has forgotten,  is in truth 
his only real objective.
The  people of your planet are, for the most part, in a state of ignorance with respect to their 
real objective, which is the evolvement  of their spiritual awareness. This, then, is what must be 
served if the second classification for service is to be met.
Each of these two classifications are desirable, and we would like to perform for the people of 
your planet acts which would  be classified under both classifications. However, since we are aware 
that the second classification is by far the more important of the types of services that may be 
performed,  it is necessary at this time to postpone performances of services of a direct way, to 
aid in a physical or more transient  nature. We are quite fortunate that we are able to act as we 
are doing now, to provide the people of this planet with information  that they may use in order to 
augment  their seeking in a spiritual sense.*°


8p

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  



Fragapatti  said: Quick,  now, seize the goal; go forth practising  thy light for others,  and it 
will grow,  giant-like.  And Hoab was strong in faith, almost  mad with the delight of such 
wondrous change; and he rushed forth, commanding,  in the name of Jehovih,  raising up hundreds  
and thousands,  even as he had been raised,  crystallizing.*i


Love is mental or spiritual and can be done with your thinking.  Love through your thinking is the 
only way. Outward expressions  of your love do not mean anything unless they have love in the 
thinking  behind the expression.<4


The reason  for life in the physical sense is to experience  service.  For this is very effective 
in creating  a deep and complete  understanding  of the Creator's  plan for the creation.  In this 
plan was the concept  of service. Through His love, He  instilled in each of the parts of this 
creation  the desire  to serve. This desire  to serve is within everything  that  exists.  It is 
within  the planet  that  you walk  upon.  It  is within  the vegetation.  The atmosphere  itself. 
Everything  about  you exists  to serve,  and unless  an entity  becomes  involved  too deeply in 
thoughts generated  as an action of his freedom of choice,  he will maintain his awareness  of his 
desire  to serve,  as does  the vegetation  upon your planet,  as does the atmosphere that you 
breathe,  as do we of  the Confederation  of Planets  in the Service of the Infinite Creator.*i


This is really your purpose, service to your Creator and your fellow man.**


For know ye all, that whoever aspireth  to Me  shall come to Me;  but  the nearest way for many is 
round about.  Ye being above grade fifty are already more to Me  and for Me  than against Me  or 
from Me,  and in equal degree are cast  upon your own responsibility. For such is the light of My  
kingdoms,  from the first  to the highest: To  the child,  no responsibility; to grade  
twenty-five,  one quarter;  to fifty, one-half;  to

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

seventy-five,  three-quarters; but to the emancipated  in my etherean realms, responsibility not 
only to self but to all who are beneath.
Wherein My highest worlds are responsible for the lowest,  being bound unto one another  through Me 
for the resurrection of all.
In this day am I come to deliver My Gods down to the earth, to walk on the earth with mortals,  
raising them up in My name. 7


You have desired our presence, and we are with you. We are of the Confederation  of Planets in the 
Service of the Infinite Creator. We are always with those of the people of this planet who desire 
our presence. This is our service to the people of this planet at this time. This is our technique 
of seeking.  It may seem strange that we would seek through service,  but this is our understanding 
of seeking.
It is stated in your holy works that it is necessary to seek in order to find. We have found  many 
ways of seeking. One  of these is to serve your fellow man. And this is our form of seeking at this 
time. We are seeking understanding of the Creator. For this is our desire. We are seeking this 
understanding through service. Through serving our fellow man on Earth, and aiding him in his 
desire to understand  the Creator.
And through aiding him, and fulfilling his desire,  we aid ourselves  in fulfilling our desire.  
For in doing this,  not only does man on Earth perhaps  learn more of  this creation  and the 
Creator,  but  also we: for it  is a law of  this Creation  that  only through  service,  may one 
be served.  In serving  others,  we serve ourselves,  as even does man on earth.  For this was the 
original idea that generated  the entire infinite Creation:  the idea of mutual service.  The idea 
of mutual understanding. And the idea of mutual love.
This we are bringing to man on Earth: an understanding of that that is within  him. An 
understanding  of that which created him. An understanding of our service and the need for his. It 
is unfortunate  that there are so many that do not understand  the true principles of this 
creation. We are attempting to help them realize this truth. It is within them, and this is our 
service: to help them find what they desire to find: the realization of the thought  that generated 
 not only them, but all that


JI

CitAPTER  FIVE: A  Soro+ION To  THE MYSTERY
                                                         OF   THE   UFO                             
                                  

there is,  and the thought  that  provided  that  all that  there is act in such a way to serve  
all that  there is.68


We wish to help you find the Father and His blessings as we have done. Sharing with others is one 
of the great  pleasures  of life. You will never know great  happiness  until you can share  the 
love of the Father with someone else.*s


We are all one,  beloved ones: and to serve others is only to serve yourself.7°
The ideals of both our churches  and our statesmen  are very much in line with this “space brother” 
 philosophy  of service to others. It is just  that on Earth, we seldom manage  to put  these 
ideals into action. Missionaries  and diplomats  alike want some return for their service.  Indeed, 
 the UFO concept  of foreign aid is a revolutionary  one!



CHAPTER  SIX
THE  DEVELOPMENT  Or   MAN
According to the communications from space contacts,  man on earth has something to learn about 
long-forgotten abilities. According to some of these communications, we all should  be able to work 
“miracles.” The problem is diagnosed as being the atrophy of Earthman's  basic mental muscle. 
Therefore, we see a lot of contactee material on how to regain the natural abilities which at 
present we now call psychic or paranormal.
Their general attitude is that this mental muscle is not synonymous  with the intellect as we know 
it. Instead, it is a process whereby the basic personal consciousness  or vibration of the 
individual is strengthened  through expanding the awareness  in an intuitive or non-thinking sense. 
This process is achieved  by means of very simple mental exercises and then is distilled by what 
you might call the subconscious.  The  mental exercises have to do with daily meditation.
Much can be said for the magnificence  of silence,  for in silence one may hear the musical voice 
of God. Listen just for a moment  and feel life as it exists.  Look into your brother's  eyes and 
see the love of God  in the reflection.  Don't look  aQ for God, look in, for it is within each man 
 that He  exists with powers  unlimited.'


It is necessary,  in addition  to practicing  this form of meditation,  for you to become  aware of 
the original creation,  and not creation of man.  Pay attention  to that which is natural.  Become  
aware of it. People of your planet  are not aware of the original creation.  They have created a 
very false illusion.  Therefore,  they are not in awareness of reality.  If  you  think that  you 
are totally aware of the original creation  at  this time,
then you are mistaken.  For, if you were,  you would see us, for we are part of the original 
creation.  There is a technique for increasing  your awareness.  This technique will be given to 
you a little at a time, so that you may employ each step.  The first step will be to seek to 
understand each thing that you see that is a portion of the original creation.  Take these things 
one at a time,  and consider  them in detail, and try to establish  in your mind a totally detached 
 understanding  of them.

                             CHAPTER  SIX:  THE  DEVELOPMENT   OF   MAN                             
      

If this part of the creation  happens  to be a leaf,  then study it with care. Become  aware of it. 
Do  not  rely on old impressions.  Develop an awareness of each thing. This will be the first step.
This instrument  receives  my thoughts,  and relays  them  to you. These thoughts  are not  my 
exclusive  property.  They are the thoughts of an entire creation  of  our infinite  Creator.  It 
is not necessary  for this instrument  to be used for you to know these  thoughts.  They are 
available  to all people in all places at all times.  For they are the thoughts of the Creator. And 
these thoughts  were meant  for all of mankind,  in all places. These thoughts  are the thoughts  
with which  the Creator created us.
These thoughts  are very simple.  They are a simplicity  that is unique,  for they are the very 
foundation  of the creation.  This is what we are attempting  to give man on earth:  this original  
thought. This is what  he needs at  this time. This thought  can only be approached  using pure 
language.  It is not a common concept  among  the people of your planet. This is the reason  for 
their difficulties.  The Creator never imagined difficulties  in his creation.  They are the 
product  of man's erroneous thinking.*
Meditation  begins with a simple increase of awareness of the natural world around you.
As you move down  the corridors of time, let your awareness  grow. Observe the beauty that  lies 
about you; observe  the handiworks  of your Creator in His Creations.  Observe Nature in the raw, 
in your plant life, your animal life; and then peer into the heavens  and truly see the great 
works.  Observe closely,  allow your consciousness  to open wide and really  take in the beauty 
that  lies therein,  and soon a realization  will begin to dawn in your consciousness  of the true 
greatness of creations


It is important  that we see the beauties of creation  and begin  to catch glimpses  of the 
Creative Consciousness  behind it. We recognize  that  the ability  to sense these qualities  of 
life is the direct  verification  that  these properties  exist within ourselves.  Otherwise  we 
could not respond to their qualities.  It is only by mutual resonance  that we experience.4



54

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN



Thinking is not something  one does. Thinking is the act of becoming aware of what  already exists. 
 One   does not try to think to become aware.  One   only has to remove  his own  thoughts  and the 
Universal Mind rushes in to fill the void.i


It is evident  that all creations  throughout  this infinite creation  are the works in either a 
direct  or indirect sense of the creator of us all. It is unfortunate  that  the people of this 
planet  are unaware of the principles that were provided for the extension  of the principle of 
creation.  Our creator provided each of his children with abilities quite similar  to his own. Each 
of you has within you these abilities.  They are not possible to be removed.  They are within all 
of the children of the Creator,  and will always remain with them. It was so designed  by our 
Creator.  He wished for all of his children  to have and to use the abilities  to govern and mold 
their environments  at will.  Unfortunately, the people of this planet  have forgotten  the 
principle  that was within each of them. It is only necessary  that  this principle  be remembered  
for each of the children of our Creator  to fully manifest  them. The teacher  that was known to 
you as Jesus was able to use many more of the abilities  than the people of this planet.  He  was 
no different  from any of you. He
simply was able to remember  certain principles.  These principles  are not at all complex.  They 
are very simple.
And an understanding  of these principles  is what we of the Confederation  of Planets in the 
Service of our Infinite Creator are attempting  to give to the people of  this planet who would 
desire  them at  this time.
These principles  are not  necessarily  of an intellectual  nature.  They are of extreme 
simplicity,  and may  be realized  by anyone at any time. It is
only necessary  that  you avail yourself to our contact  through meditation in order  to begin  to 
re-realize  that which is rightfully yours; the truth of the creation and the truth of your 
position  in it.
Unfortunately, on this planet  there is what we might  term as interference.  This interference  
occurs  because of erroneous  thoughts that are manifested  in most of the areas of your planet. 
These erroneous thoughts  are of a nature so as to cause a problem in the realization  of truth.

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


These erroneous  thoughts must  be totally obliterated  from the thinking of an individual  if he 
is to be successful  in returning  to the original thinking  with which he was created.
We have attempted  many times to suggest  to you that  this original thinking  is one of total love 
and brotherhood.  This is not enough. It is very difficult  for the people of this planet  to 
understand  these concepts in an intellectual  way. They have for a very long period of time been 
mentally conditioned  by erroneous  thinking,  so that  they cannot easily become intellectually 
aware of the principles  that are simplicity and truth  themselves.
It is therefore  suggested  that  the intellectual  mind be circumnavigated, and the principles  be 
directly communicated  to the soul or spiritual mind through  the mechanism  of telepathic 
impression  in a non- intellectual  or a conceptual  sense. This we have found to be highly 
effective with respect  to any attempt  to get from an intellectual  thought to a deeper  
understanding  and awareness of the truth of the principles of our infinite Creator.  It is for 
this reason  that we have asked that  the individuals  who wish to understand  these truths avail 
themselves  in daily meditation,  so that  these impressions  may be analyzed  by them at a deeper 
level,  and therefore  a true and complete understanding  be arrived at.
If  this process of daily meditation  will be continued,  then each of those who avail themselves  
to this will find that  they begin to become aware of things about  them in a new sense,  and that  
they find that  they begin to appreciate  the true creation  in a greater and more  beautiful way.*


Pluck from your mind all resentment,  fear,  hate,  anger; leave not one stone unturned  to take 
these things from your mind and close the door—close  the door tightly against  them—for  where  
these things exist, the seeds of Truth do not grow well.7


As our world is bathed in the violet frequency,  only Truth will be able to exist; all falsity will 
fade away of its own accord. That which has blinded  man's eyes to reality will pass away before 
the Pure Violet Fire, like fog passes away before the dawn.*

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


So meditation  is a process of becoming  aware of the creation  about  us in a new way, of quieting 
the preconceived  and negative  impressions  of our world and letting  the higher reality of the 
true creation  take its place in our conscious  awareness.  This is decidedly  not an easy thing 
for most of us to do.
It is very difficult  for man on this planet  to look about him and realize the truth for what  it 
actually is. He  has been conditioned,  through his thinking  and through  the thoughts of others,  
for a very long period of time,  to see things as they are given to him,  rather  than as they 
really are. The way that  they really are, my friends,  is extremely  simple.
This simplicity is within each of the children of the Creator. Each of them possess all of the 
knowledge  that was the original creation.  It is only necessary  that  they avail themselves  to 
that knowledge.  And this is very simple.  It is done through  the process of meditation.
When  this is done, all the truth and beauty of the original creation become apparent.  And then it 
will not be possible  for the individual  to be fooled by the illusion.  He  will not see his 
fellow man in any form but perfection,  even though within  the illusion  he has  been taught  to 
disdain.  This was not planned  by the Creator.  The Creator only  planned that each of his 
creations should express  itself in any way that he chose. This, my friends,  is perfection.  If  
man on Earth could only realize  this, he would once more think in total harmony with the original 
creation.  This may be done on an individual  basis.  It is not necessary  that  this  be 
understood in an intellectual  sense, or by anyone else than the individual endeavoring  to reach 
this understanding.
This has been demonstrated  upon your planet  before.  The man most familiar  to you having 
demonstrated  his understanding  is known to you as Jesus.  He  made the simple realization,  and 
then demonstrated  it  by his activities this understanding. It was not  necessary  that he be 
understood  by his fellow man,  for it is impossible  to force externally upon another  individual  
this understanding. It is only possible  that  this understanding  be attained  from within.
But yet  this man demonstrated  this understanding, pointed out a pathway,  a guidepost  for 
others,  so that  they too could find the original creation,  and once more lead themselves  from 
darkness  to light.
For light, my friends,  is eternal and infinite and real. The rest is illusion. Go  within.  Become 
 aware of reality.  It is within each of you.v

97

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN



. it is not in complexity  that we find the Father. It is in simplicity that
we find him,IO
Contactees who are members  of the different  cultures of Earth receive messages  about  the 
spiritual leaders in their particular  culture.  In our Western culture,  the messages  most often 
relate to Jesus.
This man known to you as Jesus was  born into the physical  upon your planet.  He  was able to 
realize  the truth of the creation,  and then he was able to demonstrate  this truth to those about 
him. This man came into the physical on your planet  as have many teachers in the past. Each of 
these teachers  came into the physical for the purpose of serving  the people of this planet. 
However,  it was up to them  to carry out this service.  Each of them did it in his own way. This 
is within  the limits of our understanding  of the intent of our Creator.
These teachers  were limited: limited by the same conditions  that each of you and that each of all 
the people on the planet experience.  The people of this planet  have misinterpreted the meaning of 
these men. The  people of this planet  are at this time misinterpreting the meaning of the man 
known to you as Jesus.  His purpose in his life was to demonstrate that  it is possible  through an 
awareness  of the Creator's  truth,  to experience  what  the Creator  planned for each of us. This 
man worked what was called miracles. These were truly miracles  to those who thought  of them as 
miracles,  but  this was given to each of the Creator's children.  He  was simply demonstrating  
the result  of thinking  in the original way as planned  by our Creator.  He  was also 
demonstrating  that it is possible  for anyone,  at any time,  to demonstrate  this type of 
thinking,  and therefore,  the abilities  that  accompany  it.
Unfortunately, the people have very much misinterpreted this man's life and teachings.  He  was 
attempting  to provide an example of understanding  so that each of the children of the Creator 
could seek the same  understanding.
This is the task of any teacher  upon this planet  or any other place in the Creation.  This is our 
 task at  this time.II


This man Jesus  taught  brotherly  love of one another,  and love of the Father. Through His 
understanding  of the Father and His creation,  He

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


was able to demonstrate  miracles,  as you call them. These were not miracles  but normal,  natural 
 things  that man can do when he realizes his kinship with the Father,  and expresses  this love of 
the Father.        All
mankind are the sons and daughters  of the Father,  not just one. We respect  and love this man 
Jesus because He,   out of many, was able to realize and demonstrate  His true relationship  with 
the Father,  as all peoples  of this planet  are capable of doing if they would  but learn  the 
truth.      12


There was a teacher once known  to you as Jesus. This man had desire. His desire was to serve his 
fellow man by demonstrating  a knowledge of the Creator's  love.  Through  this desire  he 
accomplished  things  that you know as miracles.  This man had true desire.  It is only possible  
to achieve  true desire  by initiating  this yourself.  If  you are able to initiate  a desire  
that  is a true desire,  then you will achieve what  you desire,  just as the man known to you as 
Jesus achieved what  he desired.  He  achieved what he desired  because he desired  to serve his 
fellow man in a way that was in harmony  with the desires of the Creator,  for he realized his 
unity with  the Creator,I3
The master known as Jesus,  then, was demonstrating  the understanding  that he was one with the 
Creator.  His vibration  thus came into harmony  with  the vibration  of the creation,  a vibration 
 of total love. This vibration  of the Creator was understood  by Him, and he desired  that we 
understand  it also. Hatonn speaks  to us also on this theme:
At this time I wish to speak to you upon our  understanding  of truth. We could give to you many 
things.  We could tell you of many mysteries  that  ...   would interest  you. However,  we 
consider  that it is first  necessary  to first provide for the peoples  of this planet  a simple 
truth,  that is in reality all that anyone in this creation  needs to know. After  this truth is 
understood,  the rest of the mysteries  vanish,  for this truth is the key to a total understanding 
 of creation.
This truth is the pathway  to all truth.  I shall at  this time speak upon this truth.  I and my 
brothers,  who are with me in the name of the infinite Creator,  understand  a simple  truth,  that 
 is r6r important concept  in this creation.  This simple  truth is that  the creation is one 
thing. Everything  that you can imagine; everything  that  you can see; everything  that you cannot 
see; all that  there is, is one thing.

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


This is not realized  by most of the people of this planet at this time. Due to this, they are 
experiencing conditions  that they do not desire. It will be necessary,  if an individual is to 
find the pathway that he desires, for him to realize the truth of this simple statement: there is 
no separation. Separation is an illusion. All things are one thing: the creation. To effect one 
part of the creation is to effect the creation.
We are here to aid the people of the planet Earth,  but we are here to aid ourselves. It is 
impossible to give service to others without serving yourself. For you and those whom you serve are 
the same: you are one,I4


Man continually progresses  up the ladder toward  perfection, and though a rung may break under the 
weight of his many errors, still his goal is to reach the top and one-ness with the Infinite 
Father.*i


I am Oxa1. My friends, this is of no consequence, for I am the Creator. Yes, my friends, you are 
listening to the voice of the Creator. You hear the voice of the Creator each day, my friends, as 
you go about your  daily activities.  It is only necessary to recognize it. As you meet your fellow 
man in your daily activities; as he speaks, then you hear the voice of your Creator. Birds singing 
in the trees, my friends, speak with the voice of the Creator. The very winds that blow through 
these trees  speak to you, my friends. And this noise that you hear is the voice of the Creator.
For his expressions  are infinite.  It is only necessary  that you hear and see these expressions.  
And then when you hear and see them, it is then necessary  that you understand  them. To understand 
 that  these are the Creator.
This is what is missing upon your planet, my friends: the simple understanding that all of these 
things are the same thing. They are the Creator. This knowledge is self-evident.  It does not 
require a complex analysis.  It does not require that I prove to you that what I am saying is true. 
Truth, my friends, speaks to you. It is all about you. It is the Creator.
It is only necessary for you to recognize this, totally, with no reservation,  and then you will 
think as the Creator thinks. For the

IOO

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


Creator recognizes himself, and there is no part of himself that he does not accept. For it is him, 
and he is one thing: the creation.
It is impossible  to separate yourself from the creation. It is impossible  to isolate yourself 
from the creation. You are it, and it is you. And all of its parts speak to you, saying, “Be of the 
creation.” It is only necessary that man on Earth listen to this voice, and then  understand its 
words.
Understand and then demonstrate  this understanding, and then man on Earth will take his rightful 
place with those of us who roam through this infinite Creation.
For this is our privilege. And this is your privilege. For we are all the same thing. We are love, 
and we are light.
All of the children of the Creator throughout all of the universe, all of this infinite Creation,  
my friends, are truly seeking only one thing, whether they realize this or not. They are seeking 
understanding. For this is all that is necessary.
For once this understanding is accomplished,  then all things are possible, for this is the way 
that the Creator designed it. This is the way that He provided. It is only necessary that you 
realize this. It is only necessary that you demonstrate in each thought this realization. And then, 
my friends, you and the Creator are one, and you and the Creator
have equal power. For this is truth. Each of us is the Creator,I7


For I can only Be, through you.**


As you serve,  remember  each and every one of your fellow-men  is deity. Think of each one that 
you meet not as this man or woman or child but that each one that comes  before you is the  father 
in essence.  If  you
would think on Earth of each one as part of the Father, with due respect  in that degree,  then the 
Earth's problems would dissolve instantly,IQ


Man is limited  but God is unlimited, infinite, expressing in all men, all forms.°°


IOI

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


To see the Creator in every man is a beautiful idea, but exquisitely difficult to accomplish from 
day to day. Yet the Confederation  contacts say that this message of “love and brotherhood”  is the 
only reason they are here: they truly want us to have this truth before us. They do not seem to 
care whether we believe that they are who they say they are; they care only about getting the 
message of love out, to those on Earth who want to hear it at this time.
Earth's last mile, we sad.21


(The UFOs)  ...  are orbiting your planet in answer to the many prayers for help from your 
population of many beliefs, colors, creeds, races. We would not come to the aid of Earth unless 
there was a call for help on a mass scale.°°


We of the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the Infinite Creator have used this method of 
contact  in many, many places, with many,  many people.  Upon your planet  at present,  there are 
people in almost  all areas  that are receiving  our communications. There are many of these people 
who do not  understand what  is happening  to them.
They do not  understand  who we are, as do you. They simply receive communications. The reason  
they have no idea who we are is that  they have no concept  of people coming to them from the 
stars.
This is unimportant. The only thing that is important is that they understand  the message that we 
give to them: the message of love and brotherhood. There are many other people who receive our 
messages who do understand  our identification. In this case, it is also only important that they 
understand  the message that we bring to them.
This is what we are here for: to bring this simple, single message. This is what is necessary for 
the people of your planet to learn at this time.
We of the Confederation  have lived an example of this knowledge for many, many of your years. We 
are totally aware of the results of living the type of life that results from the understanding of 
the principle of love. We are not unwise in our attempt to give these principles to you, for we 
have experienced  the effect of using these for quite some time.
I  am aware  that  these principles  are not  understood  by the people of your planet, not even 
the people who have been given  them directly, through channels  such as this one. There seems to 
be a barrier  to this
101

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


understanding  that has been generated  through  thousands of years of an ignorance of these 
truths.  This barrier is so solid at  this time that  it is very difficult, even for those who 
desire  this knowledge,  to accept  it and put  it to use. They are able to hear the words and 
understand  them,  and even though  they agree totally with the concepts  that  are present,  they 
are still unable  to assimilate  them into their own  thinking.  We have suggested many times that  
in order  to assimilate  this knowledge  into your thinking  it is necessary  that you meditate.  
But  this is something that  is also misunderstood.
It is extremely difficult for the people of this planet to remove their thinking from the hypnotic 
state that has been created. Everything that they experience is created  by their own thinking. You 
cannot experience something that you cannot think,  because this is all that there is: there  is 
nothing but thought. It is found in many forms and expressions,  but thought is the source of all 
that there is: the thought of the Creator.
And this is what you are. And you are able, like the Creator,  to generate thought.  The thought  
that you generate is your responsibility. The people of this planet each generates  thought,  and 
communicates  these thoughts  to others.  If  the thoughts  that are generated  are of a low 
quality,  then  they will in turn generate low-quality  thoughts  in others. This is a 
self-perpetuating action. And this is the reason  for the strife and confusion  that is so abundant 
 with the people of this planet.  It is erroneous  to say that  you cannot  do anything  about  a 
situation as complex as this one which has been created  by millions and millions of minds  through 
thousands and thousands of years.  It is only necessary that  the individual  remove  himself in 
thought  from this sea of confusion  and express himself in the true love and light of the Infinite 
Creator.  This may  be done at any time. It is up to the individual.  If  he desires  to do this,  
then it is only necessary  that  he do it. This has been demonstrated  to the people of  this 
planet  many  times in the past  by the teachers who were here to demonstrate  to the people of 
earth life and the expressions  of  the Creator  as they were intended.  It is a very simple 
lesson,  but  man on Earth desires  to ignore  this. Very few accept  these teachings,  and stand 
in the light  and express only the love and understanding  of the Creator of us all.
This is unfortunate.  It is a situation  that we who are in the service of our Infinite Creator are 
attempting  to remedy,  by giving instructions which are not only verbal,  and which have 
difficulty  in penetrating  the barrier  which  the mind has erected,  but instructions  of  a 
nature  that
IOI

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


will bypass  this intellectual  barrier  and reach  the spiritual self directly. This is done, of 
course,  during  the process of meditation.  This is why we have stated,  for so many years  that  
meditation  is extremely important.  It  is only necessary  that  you avail yourself to these 
concepts for these concepts  to begin  to cause  the individual  to realize once more his proper 
stature and position  in the Creator's  scheme of things. It was stated  by your last great  
teacher:  “Know ye not  that  ye are Gods?”  This man understood  the true created purpose of all 
of mankind.  Why is it necessary  for people, especially people who have been made aware of truth  
through  their seeking,  to stop short of achieving  the knowledge of their  true created purpose  
and being?
We have  been puzzled,  at times,  by the inability of the people in general of  this planet  to be 
awakened  to this simple  truth. We  suggest  that  it is necessary  to maintain  a continual  
awareness  of  your objective.  We suggest  that  that  objective  is to realize your  true 
position  in the creation, and then to act in a manner  intended  by the Creator.  In order  to do  
this, it will be necessary  that  a considerable  effort  be put forth. We find that  the state of 
hypnosis  brought  about  by the evolution  of thought  of the people of this planet  is so great  
that if  an individual  is to free himself from it,  it is necessary for him to maintain  a 
constant  awareness of  his spiritual  nature  and purpose,  and to augment  this awareness  with 
meditation.  The effort put forth to do this will be much more
rewarding  than any other activity  that  the individual can engage in.
This step must be successfully made by each individual of this planet at some time or other. 
Wouldn't it be reasonable  to do it at the earliest possible  time? For it is an extremely 
beneficial step. We would suggest that if progress is seemingly slow, then additional  meditation  
may be necessary,  for only in this way can the people of planet Earth free themselves from the 
erroneous  thoughts  that have been impressed  upon them for so very long.°i
Each part is a portion of the Creation.  Each holds equal rank.
I am aware that there are many upon your planet who would not understand  this concept. They feel 
pain, if it is within their individual being, but they do not feel the pain of others.
This is not so with the Confederation  of Planets in the Service of the Infinite Creator. We feel 
your pain, and this brings us to you at this time. To  serve you. For in doing so, we serve 
ourselves, since you and we are one. Your pain is felt throughout  all of the creation, and for 
this
104

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


reason  there are many,  many here to serve you at  this time. We serve you in the very best way 
that we can. To  eliminate  this pain. We give to you the information  that you need in order  to 
eliminate  this pain. It is something  that may be done in the twinkling  of an eye. It is the way 
that  the Creator planned.  He  did not, however,  anticipate  that his children would create from 
their own desires  the pain that we now feel emanating  from your planet.
This is a result of the desire of the people of this planet.  Unfortunately, these desires affect 
not only the ones generating  the desire,  but also others who live on the surface.  It is what  
you call a contagion.  It requires  an extreme degree of understanding  to live upon your surface 
and not experience  this contagion.
It can be done,  my friends.  It is only necessary  that you know and demonstrate  the Creator's  
truth in every thought  and deed. And then you will be freed from the effect of the desires of your 
brothers who live about you on the surface of your planet.
At this time, very few of the people upon this planet  are seeking anything outside  of the 
physical illusion  that  so constantly  busies their minds with trivialities.
We of the Confederation  of Planets are aware of the trivial nature of the things  that  involve 
most of the people of your planet.  These things seem of great  importance  to them.  However,  the 
importance  of their
activities is a function of their inability  to still their active minds,  and return  to the 
awareness  of reality  that is possible  through meditation.
The activities  that seem so important  to the people of this planet  at  this time are so very 
transient  as to be in reality negligible,  as are all activities within  the physical,  except  
for that  activity of service to one's fellow man. For through service,  one builds one's awareness 
 of truth.  This is the reason  for life, as you know it, in the physical.*4
Truth is all about you, very obvious  to those who have stilled themselves for the very short  time 
that  is required  to become aware of it. It is very obvious,  to those of us who view the creation 
of the Father in its original form. All of its parts act  to support  all of its other parts. All 
that sustains each of us is a gift of our Creator. All of the joys and experiences  that come to us 
are gifts of our Creator.
It is only man upon  this planet  who has become lost in a complex creation  of his own,  with many 
thoughts of a complex  but  trivial nature

IO}

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


that keep  them very busy,  in an effort  to reach  that which is of no value—a  minor creation  
that will last only the shortest  period of time— which has no value, once it is attained,  for he 
will lose it, and once  again return  to the creation.°


Never allow your mind to be your sole ruler.  A  man who allows his heart  to think will not 
perish.°*


The thing is that Man of Earth, in so many cases,  has a distorted idea of what  is necessary  and 
he becomes  rather controlled—under pressures that he feels are necessary  and are required  by his 
environment,  rather than controlling  it. It becomes  difficult  to withdraw  and bring about
the realization  of his true I  AM.   When man becomes  truly conscious of his oneness with 
Creation,  this takes precedence  over all other things, and as this becomes  more and more a part 
of his consciousness, it becomes  easier  and easier  to have a true realization  of this.°z
One   of the larger questions which faces the entity who claims  that  the Creator is one universal 
 thing,  that  God   is Love,  is the question  of evil. How can it possibly exist if  the universe 
 is all one thing?  Here are some thoughts  from the space contacts on this.
There are groups who express  themselves  in ways that were never conceived  by the original  
thought.  The original  thought,  however, provided for no limits on expression.  It is possible,  
therefore,  for any of the Creator's  children  to express  themselves  in any manner  that  they 
desire.  For this reason,  throughout  the creation,  there are individuals and groups expressing  
themselves  in infinite numbers of ways. You, at your present  state of understanding  consider 
some of the expressions  to be evil. We consider  them  to be expressions.  We find that for our 
purpose,  certain  expressions  to be of a more  beneficial  nature  to our own enjoyment  than 
others.  There are, however,  expressions  of an infinite quality and an infinite quantity 
occurring  throughout  the creation.  We attempt  to serve those within  the creation who desire 
our service.  They desire our service because  they are interested in our concept  of truth.  We 
believe  that our concept  of truth is correct.  In our understanding, we know that our concept  is 
correct.  There are many who would disagree  with what we understand.  This is their privilege.

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


They do not desire our service. We would freely serve them in any way that we could. However,  they 
do not desire this. Therefore, we do not serve.°


Evil does not exist. It was not created in the beginning  by the Father.  It has been created in 
the mind of man, and can only be gotten rid of by man,  through a change in his thinking.°9


For evil is not of My creation,  O  man. Evil is brought about by those who falter on the way to 
Me.1°


There are many, many myriads of populations  throughout  the cosmos. Many of them are extremely 
advanced, and a few of them are not only advanced  but also of a nature which you might call evil.
The Creator is at  the end of your path. Your faith is far stronger,  if  you indeed realize it, 
than any evil.  Remember  this, my friends.  It is completely within your power,  through 
meditation,  to gain  the love of the Creator  that conquers  all lack, limitation,  and pain. But 
my friends, be aware that  the only true nature  of  evil is separation  from  the Creator. It  
cannot  touch you if you maintain  your contact  with the one who is all. Nothing from the outside 
may come in to harm.  From the universe of truth and understanding  you may show love and light  
upon all who come into your view.
Do  not fear, my friends. There is nothing  to fear. Never waste time in fear, or in hatred,  or in 
anger,  for it is only another opportunity  at such a time to experience  and to demonstrate  the 
love and the light of the
infinite Creator,jl
There is one last  thing  to be said about  evil and our perception of  it:
This is one way of designating  in your own consciousness  who is of Christ  force and who is of 
the anti-Christ  force. You will see many, who will cry out  that  there is no God, come and fight 
shoulder  to shoulder with you for peace and love and brotherhood  equally for all men for all 
time. This is truly one who is of the Christ  force. Yet you will see  others,  who profess  to be 
of God, speaking words of God, who will say that some are to be saved and some are to be damned. 
These you will
1 7

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


know are not of the Christ light, for the Christ light speaks of brotherhood  first and foremost 
and will defend the right of all men everywhere  to share equally with their brothers.
It is not  just evil in the abstract,  but all sorts of troubles of every kind that seem to 
surround  us in the physical plane. As Israel Regardie, a practitioner of white magical arts, says:
. early in life an impenetrable  barrier is erected within  the psyche itself. A barrier of 
inhibition  is built  up between  the unconscious and the conscious  thinking self—a  barrier of 
prejudices, false moral concepts, infantile notions,  pride and egotism. So profound is this 
armored  barrier  that our best attempts to get past it, around it, or through it are utterly 
impotent. We become cut off from our roots.ii
There is a reason for this, according to the UFOnauts:
Every person creates their own world—whether  they want to be or not, they are creators. We create 
our own situations, surroundings. The conditions  that we find ourselves in today are a result of 
past thinking. That is why it is so necessary, so very, very necessary to weed these things out of 
what you call the subconscious.?4
Hatonn on this subject:
You are aware upon your planet of night. This darkness is real to you within  the illusion  that 
you know as life. There is a simple physical way in which you can intellectually imagine that 
darkness  to be only a local phenomena. The  method of that understanding is to imagine that you 
are observing the solar system from the standpoint  of the object that  you call your sun. From the 
standpoint of your sun, there is no night. There is no darkness. There is no lack. There is no 
limitation. There is only light: an enormously wasteful amount of energy,  infinite, self- 
perpetuating,  a type of light that expresses itself in all directions with all of its heart and 
strength. The  concept of darkness, lack, limitation  or any petty restriction of any kind is quite 
foreign to the point of view of the inhabitant of the sun. It is for this reason,  my friends,  
that we often describe to you the love and the light as being like sunlight or some form of light. 
This light, this phenomena called light, is a spiritual Phenomena. It is one of the two building 
blocks of your entire universe. Light, with no limitation of any kind, vastly energetic and 
infinite in its capacity, is the basis for all that is in a physical sense. The  shaping, the 
creating,  the molding force is the Consciousness, the Thought which we

108

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


call love.  Love shapes light into  the vibration  that we know as the physical world. The 
Creator's  love is completely,  down to the very smallest  detail,  a spiritual  thing. The lack,  
the limitation,  the darkness and the want is the creation of that most chief of the Father's 
creations—that being mankind.  Mankind is a creator even as his Father wished for him to be. He  
has created.  And those  things which he desires are things which he does not truly desire.  He  
has invented a great  many different  ways to experience  lack, limitation,  and want. This, my  
friends,  is only true thought  from the point  of view of the dweller  within the illusion who 
rotates with the planet  and sees  the sun go  down and disappear.  A  simple shift  in point of 
view, from the point of view of the planet,  to the point of view of the Source of light for the 
planet will enable the understanding  of the conditions  of the planet upon which you now enjoy the 
physical  existence  to come into much clearer focus. We are aware  that  this is a far more 
generalized statement than requested.  However,  there are many things which do not have the 
spiritual answers  themselves,  but deal only with the illusion.  The ability to change one's point 
 of view will often banish a question  and replace the question with understanding  simply by the 
realization  of a shift  in point  of view.ii
So the basic distinction which separates  the experience  of wealth from that of poverty  is the 
inner orientation  either towards a state of love and oneness with the Creator and man, yielding 
abundance,  or towards  desires  and emotions within  this physical illusion, which yields lack and 
limitation.
Here the contactees  say this in two more ways:
Earthman  ...   must  learn  to distinguish  between  love and emotion. Emotion is a desire—love  
is a state of  consciousness  where you realize a state of  oneness with Creation  and all mankind, 
 and you see all mankind in a consciousness  of  love.  Not   a possessive  love,  nothing  to do 
with sex,  not  a state of  desiring  but  a state of  giving,  a wanting  for another  that which 
is for the highest  good and rejoicing in them receiving,  with no thought  for self.i*


There was a man upon your planet who had great wealth and in this wealth,  he saw much power.  For 
his fellow man would eagerly do his bidding  to share part of this wealth. And, for this reason,  
many of those who dwell upon  this planet,  known  to you as earth,  require vast quantities  of 
material wealth. And,  therefore,  acquire what  they

IOI

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


consider  to be much power.  What  is not understood  by these men is that  in acquiring  this 
wealth and in attempting  to possess much power through  this wealth,  they are giving up an 
infinite amount  of power for that which is in actuality no power at all.
The man of which I spoke, who had much wealth,  used it  to satisfy his desires.  And his desires 
were for things which he thought  that he wanted and needed.  For he saw in this wealth,  not only 
a great happiness which would come from possessing  those things that  he desired  and having 
dominion over all of his fellow man about  him,  but also great security in that he would need nor 
want for the rest of his days. And,  therefore,  he coveted  greatly his accumulation  of wealth.
And had at his command everything  that he desired  and great status.
But he lacked one thing.  He  lacked love. For it was not given  to him by those about  him,  and 
this he did not understand.  And he became  aware of his need for this experience  that he called 
love and he set about  to discover  how to obtain it. And he questioned  those about  him, and 
asked them why he was not given love. And they could not answer for they did not know. And he went  
to a wise man and offered  to pay him much of his wealth if he would  but tell him how to obtain 
love. And the wise man gave unto  the rich man all that he possessed,  for all that  he possessed  
was but a pitiful small amount. And the man of great wealth accepted it. For he had long ago 
resolved never  to turn down a gift. And he left the wise man and went  to his home and pondered  
this gift, leaving  the wise man penniless.  For he had not paid the wise man. For the wise man had 
not  told him how to find love.
And as the days passed, he returned  to the wise man, for he could not understand why he had been 
given all that was possessed  by the one  who was said to be so wise. And when he asked him he was 
answered  by the wise man, who said,  “It is because I  have a great love for you and you desire 
wealth.  Therefore,  I  give you that which I  have to add to  your riches for this is what  you 
desire.”
And at that moment,  the man of great wealth looked at  the wise man and said: “And in turn, I,  
for the first  time, know love.”
And he gave to the wise man great wealth. And in doing so, he felt an even greater love.  For, for 
the first  time, he had learned  the truth of the Creator's  gifts to his children.  And this man 
was very fortunate for he had been able to discover  a way of generating  love. And yet, man on 
earth continues  to seek within his material illusion.  Continues  to seek
HO

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


that which is of no real value.  For he lacks faith. He  stands  upon  the surface of this planet  
and experiences  all of the gifts of his Creator.  He breathes the air and smells  the fragrance  
of the flowers  and is in the company of his fellow man and finds many things provided for him; 
and, yet, he does not understand.  He  does not have faith that within this Creation,  he is 
supplied,  and due to this lack of faith,  he finds hardships,  for he does not  understand  faith. 
Therefore,  man, in many instances,  does not seek the knowledge of the wise man. But he seeks a 
security  and a power  that  is not secure and is not power.sz
Again and again,  the contactee  messages stress  the basic technique for acquiring  the spiritual  
understanding  of which they speak:  meditation. There are many forms of meditation  already long 
in use upon planet Earth. Christian contemplation  has yielded many mystical revelations  from the 
saints; yogic meditation  techniques  have produced yogis who can baffle scientists by their 
abilities  to control supposedly  non-controllable bodily processes such as breathing,  temperature 
 of the body,  the rate of bleeding of a wound,  etc. The contacts which I  have seen do not  urge 
the adopting of one or the other techniques  of meditation;  they simply suggest  the basic 
process.  We can choose the technique we find the best for us.
If  there is dissension  amongst  you we will not contact  you. Be calm and quiet.1


Unfortunately, there has been much misinformation about  us, and much misunderstanding, even of the 
ones who are aware of us, of our real message.  We have attempted  to maintain  a simple message,  
for man on earth has confused himself for many generations  with complexities.
We have attempted  to maintain  a simplicity in our teachings,  in order to remove man on earth 
from the web of his entangled complexities. What we here present  to those of the peoples  of this 
planet who would desire  it is the simplicity of truth itself. The truth of this creation,  and the 
truth of man's part  in it.
It is, my friends,  very, very simple.  It is not necessary  to get lost in the complex web of 
intellectual seeking  that man on earth seems  to be so fond of. It is only necessary  that he 
avail himself to an understanding that is not of an intellectual  nature. And this he may do in 
daily meditation.  It is only necessary  that he raise his awareness,  so that  he grasps  the 
understanding  of his unity and oneness with the creation and

III

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


the Creator. This we bring to man of earth. This we offer in hopes that he will accept it.iv


Many of you are very much aware of the fact that words themselves  are traps, for they mislead you 
and you go into a state of argument over the meaning, the finer nuances,  of words and of phrases.4
The  contactee  messages  emphasize  again and again that we should not put our reliance in the 
fruits of our intellect,  which expresses  itself in words,  but instead should become silent  and 
begin  to listen for that  “still, small voice.” Like Thoreau,  they ask us to simplify  the way we 
think our life, so that our reactions  to circumstances  are not  totally dependent  upon our 
mentations, but instead have their grounding in the awareness  of  the Creator  that can only come 
from meditation  and contemplation.
I am the voice, O  mortal man, that whispers in the silence of your
Being,4I


Allow your mind to stop. Think of nothing. It is difficult to change quickly, in the confusion  
that you meet during your daily activities, and the intense use of the intellect that you 
experience.  This is one of the great problems on your planet.
It is not necessary for man to use his intellect  in such a manner. Everything that man desires is 
provided.  It is only necessary that he realize his true relationship  to the Creation. It is only 
necessary that he realize that he is the creation.
And this is not done by intellectual complexities.  This is done through a simple process; a very 
simple process of becoming aware. We call this process meditation,  but it is not necessary that it 
be so formalized.  It is only necessary that man realize that this may be done at any time.
Relax, and allow this awareness  to be with you. I and my brothers will help you. We are here for 
that purpose.4°


The  human mind is like a sponge that can  be saturated with every impression  that comes along. 
When it is habitually concerned with its own personal interests,  it is impossible for it to 
receive a message

II1

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


accurately,  regardless  of its source.  To  do so requires  total elimination of all personal  
interests.  In other words,  the line must  be clear.41
In order  to get our minds clear, we need to slow down our intellectual  mind until it allows  us 
to listen,  really listen in silence not just of the outer world, but of the inner mental world.  
The mental wheels need to stop for a while. Hatonn  takes another  look at why this is so:
My   friends,  your minds are stayed far, far too strongly  upon those illusory goals of the 
intellect  which your conscious  awareness  makes such advanced company of. These intellectual  
pretensions,  my friends, are no kind of advanced company  to be in. Their group  name is 
complexity,  and,  my friends,  understanding  is simple.
Let us examine  this concept.  Understanding, my friends,  is simple.  It is unitary.  It is not 
logical.  It is not intellectual.  It is not necessary  that you understand  understanding. It is 
not necessary  that anyone around you understand what you are understanding.
It is necessary only for you to seek the understanding  of the true creation within,  and this we 
will attempt  to give you in a simple way. With the intellect  and with words,  my friends, we can 
only approximate understanding  to you. And your attempts  to examine it on an intellectual  level 
can only be a type of subterfuge,  camouflage,  and misdirection.  You must  not depend  upon the 
tools of the physical illusion,  in order  to build for yourself your  bridge  to eternity,  for 
that which is of the illusion will vanish and be no more before you are able to cross  that  
bridge.
Let go of the preconceptions which are imbedded  deep in your intellectual  mind.  Allow yourself 
simply to seek,  and then to have faith in the seeking.  What you seek is simple.  The creation  is 
simple.  There is only one understanding  which we can offer you,  my friends,  and that is that  
the creation is one great  being. The creation  is you; the creation  is me; the creation is all 
that ever was and ever will be. The creation,  my friends,  is the Creator. As you look into the 
eyes of another  upon your planet,  you are looking at the Creator. As he looks at you,  my 
friends,  he also is looking at the Creator.
If  you may achieve  this simple  understanding, then and only then you may live in harmony  with 
the understanding  of the Creator, who created each portion of his creation  in order  that it may 
be of service to every other portion  of the creation.

Hj

CHAPTER  SIX: THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF  MAN


This is our understanding; this is our simple understanding: all is one. We cannot  speak  to you 
in any complex manner,  for we do not have a complex statement.  We sincerely hope that you may 
heed our caution, and allow  that portion of yourself which is stored with the knowledge of all of 
the creation  to come into life within you. Allow it to do so by exposing  it to the love and the 
light of the Creator  through meditation.
Seek, my friends.  Seek understanding, and through meditation, understanding  will be given.44


You are the manifestation  of the Father's creative force. You are surrounded  and engulfed  by the 
light of the Father.  Your thoughts  are the thoughts of all. All thoughts  are one. We are all 
one. We are all perfect  manifestations of the Father. We are at one with everything  in the 
Creation.  When you can realize  these things and know these things, then you will be expressing  
the true you,  the Creator.4i


The Chinese philosopher  Wang Yang-ming said,  “My   nature is in itself sufficient.  To  search  
for principles  (li) in affairs and things was an error.”4
This sort of sublime self-confidence is echoed very much,  and in the same spirit,  by the entities 
making  the UFO    contacts:
Those of the people of your planet who do not desire  the thoughts  of those of us who now surround 
 your planet  are not obliged to receive them. This would be a great  effort  on our part. Those of 
the people of your planet  who desire our thoughts  receive  them.  Whether  they may
be translated into a verbal form or not is of no particular consequence.‹z
Which brings us back to the basic concept of the primary validity of free will. OAHSPE puts it this 
way:
.  the highest  wisdom is to suffer  all men to have full liberty to think on all subjects  in 
their own way.4
This point, of total free will's sovereignty,  is one of  the mainstays  of  the Confederation  
message:
.  thou art thine own master, even as all men are self-masters.4n


114

CHAPTER  SIX:  THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF   MAN



I judge not,  neither  do I  hold regrets,  for all are given right  to choose.i°


. we dare not interfere in the form of force or control in any way. This would not conform  to the 
Father's laws to which we adhere.i*
And so, in the end, we get a picture,  not of “Gods” coming  to help a planet of benighted  
heathen,  but of brothers who have heard our call for help,  and have come to give us what  aid we 
can receive in free will.  But no matter  how much help we receive in the form of this information, 
 it is our own will,
and ours alone, which must  turn  to the path of seeking,  before we can begin to gain an 
understanding  of truth.  The nature of this search  for understanding  is so well expressed  by 
the poet T.  S.  Eliot,  that I  close the chapter with it:
We shall not cease from exploration And the end of all our exploring Will be to arrive where we 
started
And know the place for the first time.






















H}



CHAPTER  SEVEN

A  SoLUTION  To   THE MYSTERY  Or   SRI   GELLER
One   of the most controversial  books currently  in print is URI: A JOURNAL OF THE MYSTERY OF  URI 
 GELLER,  by Andrija Puharich. Puharich's  background  is impressive.  After graduating  from 
Northwestern
University Medical  School in Ip47. Puharich completed  his residency  in internal medicine at 
Permanente  Hospital in California.  In Ipq8, he established  the Round Table Foundation  in Maine. 
There he conceived  and
developed  a series of experiments  to enhance ESP in sensitives  by means of electronic systems.  
His subjects  included Eileen Garrett,  Dr.  D.  G.  Vinod, Peter Hurkos,  and Harry Stone.  In ip  
8, he moved his laboratory  to  Carmel,  California,  where he continued  his research  and served 
as  consultant  to industrial corporations,  foundations,  and universities.  In  ip6o, he moved to 
New York and founded Intelectron  Corporation,  with J.  L. Lawrence,  to develop electronic 
systems for aiding hearing in nerve deafness. After Io  years of  research  in this area,  he held 
y6 patents  for his inventions.
During this period, Puharich led several medical research expeditions  to Brazil to study the 
healer Arigo. It was while he was in Brazil that he first became aware of UFOs, for he saw and 
photographed  a number of them there. In Ip7I, he went to Israel to investigate seriously the 
phenomena  of Uri Geller. He was able to confirm claims that these phenomena were caused  by 
Geller's psychic abilities,  and reported that Geller could actually break metal by mind alone, 
communicate  telepathically, and perform  many other seemingly impossible feats.
Shortly after confirming Geller's abilities,  Puharich subjected Geller to age- regression 
hypnosis, and touched off a long series of incredible events. These events make up the body of the 
narrative of the book, URI. Puharich  reports that he and Uri received  dozens of communications 
from UFOs.
The method of reception was quite unbelievable:  Puharich's  tape recorder would run, by its own 
volition. When Puharich would play the tape back, the messages would be on it.
My personal reaction  to the book was immediate acceptance, since so much of the information  in 
Puharich's messages had been independently compiled by my researches and one confirmed  the other. 
I felt certain that Puharich was reporting exactly what had occurred. I can, however,  understand  
the reaction of those who, although experienced  in the methods of science, are novices to ufology.

II

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


It has been my experience  that  many of  today's  scientific community  err on the side of caution 
 to the point of excluding  any new evidence  that doesn't neatly align with some accepted  theory 
or practice.  Even if  this evidence remains  stubbornly  before him,  he keeps killing it off. 
And,  like the   phoenix,  it keeps rising again. A  radical in any field is ill thought  of unless 
history proves him correct.  These correct  radicals  then become known as the true leaders.  Dr.   
Puharich had made solid advancements  both in medical electronics  and parapsychology before 
writing URI. I suggest  that what  he records in that  book did happen,  and that he takes  the 
radical step of
writing a careful report  of it as a service  to us all. I  think the years ahead will
spin out  a story  that  casts Dr.   Puharich as one of  the true leaders.
I will not dwell on the contents of the book, except for certain of the UFO messages which find 
correlation  and clarification  in the material from contactees which I have been collecting.
Here is the account of the beginning of the tale of UFOs and Uri Geller. Puharich is speaking.
When all was quiet, I explained  to Uri that even though  he was going to be hypnotized,  he would 
remember everything that happened in this first session. We would only explore things of interest 
to Uri that had happened in this lifetime.
We started.  I  simply had Uri count  backward from twenty-five.  He said,  “Twenty-five,  
twenty-four,  twenty-three,  twenty-two,  twenty-one, twenty,  nineteen,  eighteen,”  and he was in 
a deep, hypnotic  trance.  I
asked him to look around and tell me where he was. He  said he was in a cave in Cyprus just above 
Nicosia with his dog, Joker.  I asked him what he was doing here.  He  said,  “I  come here for 
learning.  I  just sit here in the dark with Joker.  I learn and learn,  but I don't  know who is 
doing the teaching.”
“What are you learning?”
“It is things like I told you last August when we first met. It is about people who come from 
space. But I am not to talk about these things yet.”*
I recognized  this “sitting in the dark”  technique as the meditation which is recommended  by the 
contacts.  It is their standard technique for learning.
Seek understanding, my friends. Seek through meditation.  Week to know the reason that the master 
teacher known as Jesus retreated from

II7

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


time to time to a place where there was silence. There was something he was seeking. Seek for the 
silence, where there is much understanding awaiting you.°
To  change the subject from  basic philosophy to a particular  item, note the message from 
Puharich's contact, Spectra about a power blackout:
AP: Did you cause the blackout in Israel on January If  Of this year? The  power failure in Israel 
is from us.
There have been other mysterious  blackouts,  notably the New York blackout  of ip6y. UFOs were 
sighted  before and during the blackout  at strategic locations like the Niagara Falls power 
complex. The  events seem to correlate well. This is, of course, completely within the realm of 
speculation. Their motives for doing such a thing are also widely open to speculation.
There is another  motive which should be considered  also, and that is the basic desire of the 
Confederation  of Planets' ships to attract attention,  to suggest to people who are on the verge 
of seeking answers that lie without the physical that there is indeed an extra-physical side to 
reality.
One  of the strangest correlations between the Puharich contacts and my own research  began for me 
in Ip68. My research partner and I received messages which asked us to get into the movie business. 
We responded  to this by writing a story, and turning it into a script, which we hoped to produce 
as a motion  picture. The  story we wrote had as its hero a Dr.
Padeyevsky,  a medical doctor with expertise in telepathy and paranormal research who did a good 
deal of consulting with various agencies in the field of medical electronics.
His co-worker was a real magician.  The plot of our story revolved  around their involvement  with 
a UFO    contact. After Carla and I  had read URI, we were dumbfounded  by the similarities  
between Padeyevsky  and Puharich, and between our magician,  Joshua Starr,  and Uri. We visited 
Puharich  in Ossining, where we were further amazed  to note that  the house we had described  as 
Dr.   Padeyevsky's  in our story was identical  to Dr.  Puharich's real house. The estate seemed  
to match,  tree for tree; the only difference  was that  in the story,  the curve of the drive had 
been graced by a hedge. Carla could not resist  asking what  had happened  to the hedge. It turned 
out  that
there had indeed been a hedge,  which had been cut down in i»7*. The story was written in Ip68  and 
’6p. We did not meet or know of Dr.  Puharich  until his book was published early in Is74-

II

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


To  this pile of coincidences we begin  to add Puharich's own instructions from the UFO contact:
Do a movie on Uri. Melanie is the one to do it. Work at it; it will come out at right time. You are 
not to entrust anyone with the secret of our existence—no  one. Do not interfere with our 
educational  Israel army program. We will contact you once more before you leave Israel. We showed 
ourselves to you in the sea by the hotel on April eleventh.‹
Our  instructions  in Ip68 were not recorded and so cannot be compared word for word. And there are 
various other details, like the “Israel army” reference,  that we have never received.  But the 
instructions  to enter the movie business in order to do a motion picture about UFOs and real magic 
are quite similar.
When Puharich asked Spectra with whom we should work in these contacts, he was told, “Only three. 
Uri, Shimshon,  you. We cannot use your full powers  unless you and Uri and Shimshon are 
together.”i This preference for groups of three or multiples of three is often seen, in UFO 
messages such as this one:
@. How many people are aboard a flying saucer?
A. I have never seen more than six in one craft; however,  they can travel in units of 3-6-p, or 
4-8-Iz, depending on the planet from which they originate, or the polarized  balance of the people 
in connection  with the mechanics of the craft traveling through space.*


YOU must have a group for contact.  Band yourselves  together.7
And of course, the concept  that “when  two or three are gathered together in my name, I will grant 
their requests,”  is as old as the teachings of Jesus.
Puharich's contact  talks now about the coming time when they hope to be able to land on planet 
Earth:
Uri and Andrija, listen carefully! We hope to land on your planet in a few years. We are seen more 
and more by people. We will enter your orbital system  through  (word lost)  transformation and be 
able to enter your environment.
The  expectation  of  a mass landing of extraterrestrials is shared by many contactees.  The  
Hatonn source devotes many messages  to their desires  to

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


land during  the cycle change.  George Hunt Williamson's  contact,  Brother Philip,  says:
Beloved ones, from the hosts of Michael  the Sun,  the golden-helmeted ones sweep  toward the 
Earth—those  of another  dimension and another time. And yet,  they are here to add their light  
and their love in the program  now manifested  upon your earth-world.7
And again:
On  the day of the “Great Telling”  millions of citizens  of the civilized parts of the world will 
know beyond a shadow of a doubt  the fact  that space visitors  are here and they will know why 
they are here.*°
In the same message as the one in which the reference to the mass landing appears, Spectra tells 
Puharich:
One of our failures is that we cannot contact you directly. We can only talk to you through Uri's 
power on the tape recorder. It is a shame that for such a brilliant mind we cannot contact you 
directly. Maybe in time we shall be able to contact you directly.
They are speaking here of direct telepathic contact. They say that any person who sincerely wishes 
to contact them can accomplish  the contact:
All are capable of direct communication. You merely have to ask,  then be receptive.  We do not set 
the time. We work through your teachers. Your own teachers and spiritual aides and guides will let 
us know when we can come through.  Of  course,  remember  too, spiritual guides and teachers are 
your own Christ-aware  Self as well as those who are assigned  to your development.**
It has been my experience that the more used to intellectual  thoughts and cerebrations a mind is, 
the more difficult it is for that mind to display telepathic ability. However,  it has also been my 
experience  that with the proper training, anyone who has the desire to achieve this telepathic 
contact will eventually succeed in doing so. Dr. Puharich's  busy and mentally challenging life has 
so far not left him with time to work at stilling his intellectual mind for this purpose. But if he 
could find the time, I think he or anyone could succeed in getting this type of contact.
As Spectra finishes this message,  it talks more about the proposed  movie which Puharich has been 
working on:



HO

   CHAPTER  SEVEN: A  SoruvION  To  THE MYSTERY  OF   SRI    GELLER    


It is a brilliant movie,  but not the story we want. We want you to prepare the earth for our 
landing, a mass landing on earth. We landed in South America three thousand years ago, and now we 
must land again. We want you to tell our story—what  you call the UFO experience.  Use all the 
collected  data and literature,Ij
Again,  this message  is quite congruent  with our instructions  to make a
movie.
I  am going  to talk next  about  IS,  which is a dubbed name,  standing  for Intelligence  from 
Space, and refers  to the entities  aboard  the ship Spectra. Spectra,  like many UFO-related  
names, sounds  totally fake,  right out of science fiction,  and many readers  of  UFO    
literature  have objected  to this seeming  comic-book  flavor.  Uri asked Puharich,  “Why the 
Hollywood name?”  Williamson's  book, THE   SAUCERS SPEAK,  is especially  full of these strange  
names.  I  realize  these names  are strange,  but on  the other  hand,  I'm quite sure that people 
like Dr.  Puharich and Williamson,  who have extensive educational  and professional  backgrounds,  
could make up far more convincing  sets of  identity  if  they were intentionally  creating 
falsehoods.  I  think the problem here lies in the limited ability of the UFOnauts  to understand 
our language.  If  they have been monitoring  our communications systems,  it might  be quite 
reasonable  for them  to choose
these names as being good for recognition  in our language.  I would not have been surprised  to 
find their ship named  the “Star Ship Enterprise.”
To find my way back from the digression: when Puharich asked IS when this mass landing would take 
place, the reply was, “We will not reveal to you our timetable in landing on earth in your local 
time. It may be some years, or sooner.”*4 This coincides with the Hatonn source, which says that 
the exact time of the cycle change will be dependent  upon the consciousness of all of us, as we 
help or hinder that change, and that the time when landing will be possible is dependent  upon the 
degree of acceptance of them which they find on earth at the time of the cycle change.
I had been given a fairly exact date for the desired  mass landing,  and when I talked with 
Puharich in Ip74, I  asked if he had such a date. It  turned out that we both had the same 
information.  However,  there may be a delay from that desired date,  due to the slow dissemination 
 of information  about the UFOs' purpose and the acceptance  of  that  information  by man on 
Earth.
I8 tackles the question of why the UFOnauts don't contact our government:


III

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


Andrija,  many people in the U.S. Government  and the Russian Government  know about our existence. 
We do not give them any breaks to know us better. They only know that UFOs are real, nothing more.'
Their lack of interest in our politics is due to their own feeling about governments:
But we do not desire your world,  the Earth,  but we desire instead  that you should develop it.'*
The UFOnauts view all of the Earth's peoples  as being  the same.  They are not  interested  in our 
government,  science,  or any facet  of  the normal mechanics of our civilization.  To  them,  all 
of these are of a very primitive nature.  They are interested in the development  of man himself,  
and care far more about  the nature of his manifested  higher  body or aura than his scientific or 
political credentials.  For this reason,  many of  the contactees  are persons of  no great  
importance  to the society,  though  their vibrations  are exemplary.  It  is easier  to see why 
they do not contact  government  or other officials  if you consider  what would happen if  they 
had been in the skies in the time of the Caesars.  Do  you think they would have been keen  to 
contact Rome's  top scientist,  or the politicians  of  the day? No,   their interest  in us, their 
service  to us,  is not societal or indirect,  but personal  and individual.
AP: May I now take Uri to Captain  Mitchell  to start experiments? You were not given permission  
to do this.
AP: Since you indicated two days ago that I may tell everything,  may I reveal your presence to any 
outsider now?
Not yet. You may start a motion  picture and reveal everything. You may go ahead with everything  
but do not reveal to anybody yet that we are truly so near to you,I7
The  UFOnauts desire a dissemination of information about their presence, but they are aiming for a 
method of advertising  that does not bully the customer. They want Earthmen  to be made aware of 
their presence and  their message in a gradual way, and they are in some instances  not quite sure 
just how much can be tolerated  by the public without  producing difficulties from adverse opinions 
and fear.
In URI we see again the UFOnaut's attitude towards contact with us. Even though it seems cumbersome 
 to deal with the seeming hocus-pocus of contactees instead of just landing in plain sight of all 
and dealing directly

122

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


with us, yet still this indirect  way is preferred.  Because  not  all of the population  of our 
planet,  by any means, wants this forced addition  to their sure knowledge.  Not  everyone wants  
their world to expand. As IS  put  it:
We have been checking  out all the human race,  and we came  to the conclusion  that only panic and 
disaster  may appear when we will land on your earth in a few years.  We wanted to give you, and 
test you,  how deep in conscience you can go in telling the human  race that we people exist—we 
creatures,  as you call us in science-fictioned terms—on  earth.

.  the human  race is an anxious and unacceptable  race.  Andrija Puharich,  Uri Geller,  and 
Shimshon  Strang,  we still need your will of mind for our purposes,  and we shall keep on using 
you. From today  ... you will be completely  independent.  You shall decide for yourselves.
You shall go on with work. The way you figure out,  that  is the best. But
you must stay in close contact  with us.
G.   H.   Williamson  also suggests  that,  to the UFOnauts,  we are an “anxious and unacceptable”  
bunch:
Many people  today are asking: “If  spacemen  are here, why don't  they land and contact  our 
leaders?  Why don't  they explain  their mission?” Did   these same individuals  ever stop to think 
that  no sane Earthman would descend into a pit of crawling  rattlesnakesi  With all Earth's 
strife,  with bloody wars  that carry thousands of men, women and
children  to slaughter worse  than any Circus of Nero or Medieval inquisition,  is it any wonder  
that spacemen  have not landed here I9
Although from our own point of view this seems a rather harsh  thing  to say about  man on Earth,  
from the standpoint  of our own ideals of behavior,  our wars and other negative  acts do seem 
indefensible.  So that, from the unflinching  standpoint  of our own ethical standards,  we would 
have to say the same harsh  thing. I personally do not have the answer  to how we can stop wars,  
for each time we see men do things  to people we care about  which are harmful,  they become our 
enemy,  and it seems right  to defend ourselves.  To  get from where we are to the point  where 
there are no wars  will take plenty of meditation!
I  have stated earlier  that  the only real result  of our lives on Earth is the evolution  of our 
essential selves,  call it  the evolution of mind or progression of spirit.  The UFOnauts  want  us 
to arrive at a more evolved state of thinking  by the only process which is effective in causing 
real evolvement:

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


our own independent  seeking of the truth of the meaning of our existence. The  visitors to our 
planet are very willing to help us, but always they back off before a contactee can prove his 
source. Always they let the contactee tell his story at second-hand.  Then the stimulus of other 
life in the universe will occur only to those who are ready to hear it. As the UFO contacts say, 
the knowledge of all truth is within everyone.  Meditation  can stimulate the memory of our true 
nature and relationship  to the creation.
There are strict rules of Confederation  contact with planets such as ours. The  non-interference 
rule which governed the STAR TREK crew covers it very well.
There is another  problem in dealing with this “anxious and unacceptable” people of Earth: many in 
our society do not desire mental evolution  in the direction  of these particular  UFOnauts. The 
Confederation  is a group strongly polarized in philosophical  or spiritual  terms towards  the 
“good,” towards unity of all things, towards  merging in oneness with the Creator. In sharp 
contrast,  many of our people are on a path of separation, of self as set against  the rest of the 
universe.
The Confederation  sees  this line of separation  as an error but respects  the right  of  each man 
 to choose his own direction.  You can see that,  although the message of these Confederation  
brothers is spiritual,  there is nothing of religion proper in their approach:  they do not  
believe in the “hard sell”  type of conversions!  When Puharich  asked IS  whether  the mass 
landing would still take place,  if the Earth's people remained  “unacceptable,” IS  replied, 
“There shall be landings  on Earth. But the landings  might  be invisible,  and only visible  to 
you.”°° Many contactees  comment  on  this ability of  the craft to seemingly  appear  to some and 
not  to others,  and to appear  and disappear from our skies  instantly:
But there is another way too in which we are capable of working. That is in projecting our astral 
bodies into the third dimension. In other words, fourth dimensionally we can project into your 
third dimension. The experience would be extremely real to you, and of course real to us, but it is 
not the physical body that you would see at that time.**


Not all will see the spaceship  because some of them are etheric in nature




I*4

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    



It has not been seen in the physical,  but it shall be seen by those who have eyes to see. And 
then, when it is necessary,  after most of the cleansing  has been completed,  it will  take on 
material  form.  But nothing would be accomplished  by materializing  the ship at this time. Other 
ships have  been seen coming from the etheric into the material and then dematerializing,  and 
little has been accomplished  except  to make a very, very few think and spread the word.°i


That is why some of you see spaceships and others do not. They are actually vibrating at a 
different frequency. Sometimes they can change their frequency to correspond with your visual or 
your physical sightings or senses. Then you or a group can see them. But for the most part they are 
in operation at another frequency and you cannot see them. Those with the higher senses can see 
them, even when they are invisible to others, because their senses are tuned to it. Those people 
are often scoffed at because they say there is something to be seen and others see nothing with the 
physical eye.°4


If we chose to remain  unseen, we could do so easily and, in fact, we have done so almost without 
exception for hundreds of years. No one sees us unless we want to be seen.*i
The Hatonn source gives a slightly different slant to the details of this visible/invisible 
characteristic:
Each person has a vibration from eternity to eternity. At any given moment, each person vibrates in 
an individual manner. Therefore as we vibrate in our individual  manners, from dimension to 
dimension,  there are some who, with their higher vibrations,  may see us. We are able to appear  
to some, or to others, by adjusting our rate of vibration. This is, as we say, usually done for a 
purpose,  that purpose being to alert individuals who are ready to receive this stimulus.**
So, IS advised Puharich  that he should  teach people, but not “people who cannot accept 
happenings.”*7 “Do anything that produces energy, good works.”*  Then, IS bid them adieu: “Although 
we are always with you people, we shall stay away from this human race for a couple of years.”*v 
The one exception was that they would continue to work through Uri: “We

H}

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


are not  interfering  in any way. We  are just  letting  things happen  sometimes
for Uri.”s°
I had an interesting  demonstration  of this last statement  while returning from a UFO    research 
convention  on October If,   IQ7J. I was piloting  a Beechcraft  Baron, which is a light airplane,  
and I  experienced  a total malfunction of the artificial horizon.  This is the primary instrument  
used to maintain  level flight during bad weather,  when there are no visual references that  the 
pilot can see. In cloudy conditions,  the real horizon disappears,  so the artificial horizon is 
all-important.
The artificial horizon is similar in its malfunctioning to a flat  tire,  in that it never fixes 
itself. You either  replace it or repair it. But,  after being inoperative  for over an hour, my 
artificial horizon started working perfectly again just when I  became  in need of it. This was so 
unusual a thing  to happen that I  doubted whether I  could convince  the maintenance  mechanic 
that  it had malfunctioned  at all, and for this reason I  took a witness  to the phenomenon  when 
I  talked to the technician  back at  the hangar.
Five days later, I  was visiting  Uri Geller in the Las Vegas Hilton,  and just happened  to 
mention  the strange occurrence  with the gyro horizon.  He immediately  became very excited and 
started looking for a manila folder. I noticed  the corner of a manila folder sticking out from 
some other papers right  beside me and fished it out.  “Is this it?” I  asked. Note please,  
skeptics, that  the folder was only a few inches from me, so that Geller had no opportunity  to 
write in it. Since I  had not  been in previous  contact  with him or any of his associates  for 
about  a year, it is highly unlikely  that  he would have found out  about  the malfunction.
“Open it, open it up,” he shouted.  I  did, and found the following  notation
scrawled  across  the first page:
Horizon went out!!
Plane?
Comparison  of our activities showed that when I was having my troubles  in the air on the lath,  
near Evansville,  Indiana,  Uri had been listening  to stereo music on his headset  in his New York 
City home.  Over the music,  Uri suddenly heard a voice say,  “Horizon went out.” He  didn't know 
what  the statement  meant,  so he wrote it down on the folder.  Then he felt energy flow through 
him,  like when he fixes something.  But this made no sense  to him, and he forgot  about  it. 
Until he heard my story.

IU

   CHAPTER  SEVEN: A  SoruvION  To  THE MYSTERY  OF   SRI    GELLER    


“I guess I  fixed your horizon,”  he said.  “It sure looks that way,” I replied. We then noticed an 
ashtray in the middle of the floor that had not previously  been there. As I commented on this, a 
small  bottle flew spontaneously  from  the desk across  the room,  sharply striking  a window some 
ten feet distant.  The bottle hit glass with such a resounding  crash  that I was surprised  that  
nothing was broken.  “I  fixed it, I fixed your horizon,” said Uri.  “That's how they tell me.” 
When Puharich reported  his dog vanishing  instantaneously, articles  appearing  and disappearing  
due to Uri's presence,  people found it hard to believe him. I suppose you still find it hard to 
believe  my story.  When it happens  to you personally,  you have no choice but  to witness  to the 
truth.
The  book URI contains a description  of the state of meditation from a more physiological  point 
of view:
Molecules in brain cells are only positively open when excitement  is not strong. Normal excitement 
 overcomes  the vibration  to our powers.
Brain should be in a very relaxed state to receive messages from  us,jI
This is the same state with which I have experimented,  as have many others, in producing  
telepathic contact with UFO sources.
One  last  tie-in from URI   to the body of contactee  data occurs  unexpectedly. Puharich reports  
a string of odd occurrences  having  to do with some pens on his desk which had flipped up out of 
their holder and fallen in a pattern which spelled out the word “WHY”:
At 3:4i P.M. I returned  to my study,  where I  found Uri  doodling at my desk.  I  looked at what  
he had just doodled.  It was a set of very advanced tensor equations  describing  the nature of the 
gravitational  field.  Uri did
not know what he had just doodled,  and he asked me where  this came from.  Since I  recognized  
the equations as being of the form written  by Albert Einstein,  I  replied,  almost  facetiously,  
“Einstein.” As I  said this, there appeared  a piece of paper on the floor some ten feet away from 
me. I walked over to pick it up. It was a newspaper  photo of Albert Einstein!  I  remembered  
seeing such a photo in the NEW   YORK TIMES MAGAZINE some ten years earlier.  I  had clipped it out 
 but had not seen it for several years. At  this vantage  point I  was looking at my bed across  
the hall from where I  was standing.  In front of my eyes there had appeared  a book on the white 
bedspread.  I  walked over  to examine it. It was a book I  had last seen in the basement;  it was 
by Edwin F.  Taylor and John Archibald Wheeler,  entitled SPACETIME PHYSICS, published  by W.  H.   
Freeman  and Company in ip63. I
I*7

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


looked  through it carefully,  but the equations that Uri had doodled were not in this book, 
although  the general subject matter was there.
Throughout  all this activity I had left the nine pens on my blotter pad intact spelling out the 
word “why.”  I returned to my study with Uri— holding the book. As we approached  the desk, right 
in front of our eyes the nine pens flipped simultaneously in the air and settled down into a new 
pattern as follows  (though I did not understand  the symbolism or meaning of the configurations°











After I read URI, I decided  to see if I could get a response from the UFO source on this 
arrangement  of pens. I used two of my best telepathic subjects to try to discover  the possible 
significance of this pattern  to the UFOnauts who had sent it to Puharich. They came up with the 
following answers, quite independently of each other:
I.     The six straight lines are the Creator's house, the triangle represents the Creator.
z.    The six straight lines represent  the three dimensions  of time plus the three dimensions  of 
space; the triangle  represents the Creator.
So, in both cases, the triangle was said to represent  the Creator. The subject who received the 
impression  that the six upright pens symbolized  the Creator's house was not a scientist;  the 
other subject was one.
I immediately referred  back to Dewey B. Larson's analysis of the physical universe as possessing 
three dimensions  of space and three of time. And I have to agree that, translated from the 
mathematical language of dimensionality, three dimensions of time and three of space are the same 
as saying, “the Creator's house”  in Larsonian  physics.
Here is Hoova's statement concerning UFOs:


128

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


Most of these reports  by humans  are due to hallucinations and aberrations.  But some of our units 
have landed.  But most of the reported landings  have been from other visitors  from space—some  of 
whom we do not see,  but which you can see. They are of different vibrations,  different  spaces,  
different  velocities.  We are the only ones who are mostly here. The other visitors come and go. 
We stay.
This is precisely  our understanding  of the situation as communicated through  telepathic 
receivers.
I'd like to look again at  the essence of the anti-dogmatic  yet spiritual  type of message which 
telepathic receivers so often report. Note the characteristics:  a desire  to help people,  a 
fitting in with the religious  belief of the culture  to which the contact  is made,  a desire  to 
help prevent  wars,  and a strong motivation  to open peoples'  awareness:
Ah,   we know  the past  of  the human race.  But  this is one of  the secrets—we  cannot  tell it  
to you. As to the future we are not permitted either.  But remember  all that people need to do—God 
 has written on stone,  the ten commandments.  Thus shall it  be done. Remember you are working for 
us in ways  that  are important  to us, and which we have not yet explained.  Actually,  there is 
no special  message  for you to pass to the human race.  It  is possible  that should there be a 
war impending, as between Russia and China,  there may be a message  to prevent  it. But you may 
try to open their minds with things like telepathy  and psychokinesis—things which we have almost  
forgotten.  Yes,  they are to be helped.i4
There's one more interesting  correlation  between  a statement  by IS  and material in OAHSPE.  
Remember  this passage:
We want you to prepare  this Earth for our mass landing,  a mass landing on Earth.  We landed in 
South America 3ooo years ago,  and now we must land again.ii
With it in mind,  look at  these passages from OAHSPE:
And Jehovih caused the earth,  and the family of the sun to travel in an orbit,  the circuit of 
which requireth of them four million seven hundred thousand  years. And he placed in the line of 
the orbit,  at distances of three thousand years, etherean lights,  the which places,  as the earth 
passeth  through,  angels from the second heaven come into its corporeal presence.  As ambassadors  
they come, in companies  of hundreds  and thousands and tens of thousands,  and these are called 
the etherean  hosts

   CHAPTER  SEVEN:  A  SoruvION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF  SRI   GELLER    


of the Most High. Not as single individuals  come they: not for a single individual  mortal come 
they.


First  the earth plieth in a circuit  around  the sun, which circuit is divided  into four arcs 
called spring,  summer,  autumn,  and winter.
Second,  the sun, with his family, plieth in a large circuit,  which is divided into one thousand 
five hundred arcs,  the distance of which for each arc is about  three thousand years, or one 
cycle.iz
Here is the idea of the cycles, with a more specific discussion  of how long they are. Just what  
are these cycles? How   do they affect  us? And   why must the UFOs appear during  the 
cycle-change?  One   general  reason  for the UFOs' appearing  is quoted  by researcher  Brad 
Steiger in his book, REVELATION:  THE  DIVINE FIRE:
The craft  that contains  the instrument  in which I am recorded is four and three-tenths  miles in 
length—by your method of measurement— and two and one-tenth miles in circumference. This craft  
also contains others of us who are in human form. I have passed the phase of human form. My  
knowledge  and mind processes were long ago recorded into an instrument  you would liken to a 
computer.
I  was  brought  to the vicinity of this planet  approximately  thirty thousand  years ago, by your 
method of time measurement.  Your planet and the living forms upon it have a specific value to us. 
Your form of life has a particular  value to us.
For this reason,  at about  the time I was brought  to the vicinity of your world, we interfered 
with the natural development  of the species of man that inhabited this planet.  Our  purpose was 
to shorten  the cycle of development  necessary  for the human inhabitants  of this planet  to be 
of use to us.i*
Interestingly  enough,  in URI  we read that IS  also reports  a computer or computer-like  state:
Andrija Puharich,  you must understand,  in this state we are computers.iv
But,  be they computers  or humans,  or entities of an unknown  and novel kind entirely,  the 
question  remains: why do they appear  at the cycle's


ISO

   CHAPTER  SEVEN: A  SoruvION  To  THE MYSTERY  OF   SRI    GELLER    


change? And what is a cycle? These are questions important enough in the space contactee message to 
deserve a chapter to themselves.









































III



CHAPTER  EIGHT

THE  WANDERERS
George Hunt Williamson,  an anthropologist of considerable  reputation, began  reporting UFO 
contact in the early ’Nos. He published several  books about his contactee experiences,  none of 
which were seriously given credence or consideration  by his peers. The  books contain much that we 
still consider  untrue: the UFOnauts  had told Williamson  that the Sun was
not a “hot, flaming body”  but a cool body, and that we had two moons, one a “dark”  moon which was 
unseen.  He was told, moreover,  that the moon we already know about had an atmosphere and water. 
Obviously,  none of these statements  make sense.
But let us back up a bit and look at these statements again considering  not our third density 
alone but also those densities which interpenetrate ours. Since most of the UFOnauts are in a 
reality displaced from ours, it is quite possible that they are experiencing  these described 
conditions. In fact, if the Williamson  book, THE  SAUCERS SPEAK!,  is read keeping the physical 
and mental variants of these displaced  realities in mind,  the material  makes quite a bit of 
sense.
In the SAUCERS  SPEAK, Williamson  quotes  the UFO    source as saying, “To  apples we salt, we 
return.” No  explanation  is given of it here,  but in a later work, OTHER TONGUES, OTHER FLESH, he 
interprets  the statement  as a promise made to a certain  type of  individual  on Earth.  It seems 
 that  throughout  the history of Earth, people have been born into our planetary vibration who are 
not Earth natives;  that  is,  they have not incarnated  into the physical from Earth's spiritual 
densities,  but from elsewhere.  They are true extraterrestrials in that  their previous experience 
 is of  places elsewhere  in the universe;  they are true Earth natives  in that  they have gone 
through  the process of birth, entering first  the spiritual realms of Earth and from  there 
incarnating  into our physical plane just as any Earth entity would do. During  the birth process,  
the “apple”  usually loses  the memory of  his extraterrestrial past.  He  is truly of  this planet 
 as he enters  its physical plane.
His purpose  in coming to Earth is twofold.  First, he hopes  to advance his own vibration  or 
thinking  by experiencing  the strong catalyst  of our physical world.  It is a sort of 
trial-by-fire  approach,  the chance  to advance more rapidly  than is possible  in less dense 
vibrations.  Secondly,  he hopes that  he will be able to reawaken  the dormant  memory of why he 
came  to

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Earth, and so be able to carry out his mission of service  to Earthmen  by helping to increase 
their awareness of universal reality.
It is not a foregone conclusion  that the “apple” will remember who he is and what his mission is, 
but most “apples”  have at least a strongly developed tendency towards  meditation and 
contemplation, so that gradually many are indeed able to recapture at least a portion of that 
memory.  Here is the portion of OTHER TONGUES which deals with this:
There were several statements  made in THE   SAUCERS SPEAK  that  are significant  in connection  
with these “Wanderers”  or “Apples.” “Seeds may  be planted  but  they can rot and never reach 
maturity.”  This means  that  the people of  outer space knew what was going  to develop on Earth.  
They “planted”  some of their own people here; “salted”  them away like “apples.”  But every seed  
that  is planted or “salted away” does not grow and reach maturity;  it may rot  in the ground  
because of  many conditions.  Therefore some of the “Wanderers”  now on Earth do not know who they 
are—they  are lost  in the ways of  the Earth,  and on physical death will return to their own 
worlds. They will be none the worse for their experience,  except  that  their mission will not  be 
accomplished.
Space intelligences knew that a certain  percentage of the “apples” would fall by the way, 
therefore enough of them incarnated into Earth bodies to make up for this inevitable deficiency,I

The
source who channels through Nada-Yolanda  says much the same thing:
You have people who have come from other planets who know no such thing as life on other planets, 
who even may not believe in life on other planets. Yet, they are in your Earth's atmosphere 
waiting, living the life—normal,  so-called average, everyday,  prosaic lives, according to you who 
are studying—and  they still are receiving.
Their teachers are around them. Their high Selves know who they are and what their destiny is. Not 
everyone will succeed. Many will go through the life experience and never be aware, and waste or 
not make gain. But they are neither to be judged nor condemned.*
The  concept of there being entities from other worlds is an intriguing one to many people who 
indeed have never felt at home on this planet, living the Earth life. In general, “apples”  are 
said to be poorly suited to the third density vibration, and have problems adjusting to the 
socio-economic web


IJ5

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

of our culture; indeed, often they also have persistent  health problems.  But they do not appear 
alien or extraordinary: they are just people:
.  there are many people on Earth that don't really belong here! This doesn't  mean  that  they 
came here aboard a Flying Saucer,  disembarked, put on a tweed suit, polished up their English 
language  and moved into the house next door. It does mean,  however,  that  there is a special 
class or order of beings in the Universe  that  are different  from the rest because of the fact  
that  they wander from one world to another,  and from one system  to another.i
These people, however,  tend to be set apart  by their inherent  bias towards the kind of love and 
brotherhood-oriented message  that  the Confederation is bringing.  That is what  it is hoped will 
happen to the “apples”:  that  they will awaken and remember  that  they are here to give light  to 
Planet Earth.
From the early Williamson  book, THE  SAUCERS  SPEAK:
Ponnar speaking. There are now many young people in your world who understand our message. They 
will accept it quickly for they are of the New Age. The  Great Awakening is here. Many of our 
people are in  your world now.     4
And, from Nada-Yolanda:
We have contacted  key units because  they are teaching  this new understanding  or Aquarian 
development  now. That is why we come through in this way. Why do we not come through  to your 
government heads or your very educated scientists; education,  to your way of thinking,  of course? 
 Because  they could not change  the temperature  of the mass consciousness, for they do not  
believe in thought  transference or thought  control or thought  power.
But your key units do, and that  is why we contact  them primarily; secondarily,  because  they are 
us. Many of them have incarnated purposely from our realms,  dimensions,  and other planets  to do 
this work,  knowing  how to do it.
We ask you to remember  it. We ask you,  and stimulate you through our control and through our 
interest  in you and through our mental communication  and spiritual education  with you,  to do 
this. That is why we have concentrated  for so many years—twenty-five years,  to use a loose 
segment  of time—in  teaching  these New Age thoughts  to those already planted, so they could 
begin to regulate  the thought

I34

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

temperature  of mass-consciousness. It  takes time. Now is the time for us to show ourselves and to 
make  the project  a physical manifestation.
The extraterrestrial source known as Ishkomar  adds its footnote on “apples”:
By mutual agreement  between  a planetary  dweller  and an inhabitant  of our craft,  the knowledge 
 and the memory of one of us may be blended with the planetary without  the loss of the receiver's  
identity.  The one from our group adds only his knowledge  to the planetary  dweller,  and the 
abandoned  body is disseminated.  This blending  may not  take place without  mutual agreement  
between  the beings involved,  and the planetary dweller must fully agree and desire  this  
blending.  We seek, therefore,  not to take,  but  to give.
We, however,  are not alone in our interests  in your world.  There is in existence with us another 
 group. Their interests  are not necessarily harmful  toward you,  yet  their methods  are in 
direct  opposition  to ours. They also have interfered  with the development  of your planet. They 
wish to reach  their ends, not by cooperation,  but  by control and domination  ...
You must  reach a high level of mental development  and knowledge  to be able to understand our 
purposes.  We have attempted  to gain your cooperation  for thousands of years. We have been 
vigorously  opposed by the other group.  We must  achieve our goal by guidance of your kind,  but 
we must desire  guidance for us to be of assistance  to you.*
This source describes  a type of “apple” which is no doubt very heavily in the minority;  there 
must  be very few of these around. But I do think they exist.
However,  our main interest  in this chapter is to explore  the concept  of the “apple” developed  
by Williamson  and others,  for I  do think that  there are very many of these “apples”  among us 
today. As I said, few if  any serious researchers  paid any real attention  to Williamson's  and 
others' contactee information,  since it seemed  to be unsupported  in any way and quite 
unverifiable.  It may be that  this situation  has changed now,  to some extent, for I  have found 
interesting  evidence which supports  this contactee information  about  “apples.”
I started doing age regression  hypnosis  in If}}. The general  technique  is to produce  the 
deepest  state of hypnosis possible  in a particular  subject,  and then suggest  a retrograding  
of memory,  back through childhood,  and then to birth. Most people are able under hypnosis  to 
remember  and describe in exhaustive  detail not only the exact environment  into which they were 
born

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

but  the details of the delivery,  sensation  by sensation.  The subconscious mind seems  to store 
memory independently  of the normal functioning  of conscious perceptions.
The subject  is now at  the point of birth into this world, and the suggestion  is made  that he go 
further  back in time, and remember what  has occurred previous  to this birth. Most subjects  
relate several Earth lives as the guide patiently listens and asks questions of the subject.  Many, 
many people are true Earth children in the spiritual sense,  and in age regression  you find  their 
trail as it leads through  tinker,  tailor, merchant,  thief,  etc. However, every once in a while 
I  have come across subjects who, when regressed beyond birth,  leave our Earth planes entirely.  
These seeming  “apples”  that I have uncovered  give information  that correlates  substantially  
with Williamson's  “apple”  data. I  have selected material  from my files on three of these 
“apples”  because  they independently  claimed  to have known each  other as extraterrestrials, and 
thus their  testimony  forms a fuller picture,  one story fitting into the next.  I  have edited 
out  the parts of  the regressions having  to do with this life.
I  have deleted the names of the three subjects  and substituted  the initials “A,” “B,” and “C”   
to indicate  the identity of the speaker.  As you follow  this story  through,  please  remember  
that I  am not suggesting  that all the “apples”  come from this one place described  by these 
three subjects. “Apples”  come from many places. Their cultures  and personal  details vary widely. 
 What  they have in common  is their motive and mission here on Earth.  I  am including  the 
personal  details concerning  this one small group's life in another world,  however,  because it 
adds a depth to their fascinating story.
We start with the physical appearance  of these people.  They look quite human  and rather Nordic:


OK,  YOUR OWN SKIN, YOUR OWN COLOR WOULD BE DESCRIBED MOST CLEARLY AS WHATi
Very light. Blonde.
WHITISH?
No. Yellow.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

A
They are ...  I keep seeing just one man there.
PICK THAT MAN OUT AND JUST CONCENTRATE  ON HIM.
He is tall. There is much bright vibration coming from him. It's very hard to explain appearances.  
He has long hair.
IS HIS HEAD COVERED AT ALU
Just by vibration,  by white ...  we see each other and he smiles.
HOW   DO   YOU   FEEL ABOUT THE EXCHANGE OF GLANCES AND THAT SMILE?
I feel that he is somehow important  to me, but right now, he's ...  he's just a good man. We are 
wearing robes. That is my impression, white robes. Appearances  don't mean anything,  but there's 
vibration. But he has such a kind face, all full of light.
IS HIS FACE BEARDED, SHAVEN?
No, it's ...  he has no hair on his face.
AND THE COLOR?
It is a golden color.
HIS  HEIGHT WOULD BE ABOUT WHAT, IN TERMS OF  FEET AND  INCHES?
About seven feet.
IN TERMS OF POUNDS,  HIS WEIGHT WOULD BE ABOUT WHATi
He is so slender  ...  very light.
YOU JUST PASS HIM, AND CONTINUE  ON YOUR WAY.
Yes.
One great difference between our Earth race and theirs seems to be the aging factor: they count 
“time” in quite a different way.
A
YOU ARE ABOUT HOW OLD?
(Pause)  It  doesn't  mean anything.

I37

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

HOWLONG HAVE YOU BEEN THERE?
My body's size is not as tall as this one. But mine has been there for a long time. Age is a hard 
thing ...  I cannot see age. I feel old. I feel young. I feel wonderment  at what I've seen.
VERY WELL. ARE THE OTHER PEOPLE OLDER OR YOUNGER THAN YOU AREA
They seem to be perhaps a little older. Once again, age here doesn't show. Well, it shows,  but 
it's not connected with numbers. It is simply physical appearance.
I feel very old and yet when I saw myself I was not old. Today we simply have a different physical 
appearance.
c
LET'S GO BACK TO  AGE z6 THEN. ONE, TWO, THRFE, (snap).
All right. I seem to be rather old.
THEN YOUR YEAR IS DIFFERENT FROM AN EARTH YEAR, THEN, ISN'T IT?
Yeah, must be.
AND   YOUR APPEARANCES  AND  YOUR MATE'S APPEARANCES  HOW   WOULD YOU APPEAR TO  BES
Just the same. But old.
YOUR APPEARANCE  DOES NOT  CHANGE, BUT YOU JUST PHYSICALLY DETERIORATE,  THEN?
It's a slowing down of energy, as much as anything.
The normal mode of person-to-person communication  seems to be telepathy:
A
DO YOU COMMUNICATE VERBALLY,  BY SOUND?
Not very much. No, most of it is mind-reading. Telepathy. There is not much use for words with the 
teachers.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS


B
YES. WHAT ABOUT COMMUNICATING  WITH ANOTHER INDIVIDUAL. IS IT BY VERBAL COMMUNICATION, BY VOICE 
FORM. DID YOU TALK OR LISTEN?
There was some of  that,  but mostly minds.
YOU  HAD  MOUTH AND VOICES AND EARSi SO  YOU COULD COMMUNICATE IF YOU  WANTED TOP
Yes,  but much was done with mind.  The  ...   the importance  was done with mind.
These otherworlders  seem  to enjoy considerably  more freedom  than we as regards  the boundaries  
of consciousness. They have the ability  to move out of the physical  body in consciousness, very 
much at will. There are many on Earth who have had such experiences,  but  it is not common here; 
it seems  to be common  there.  One   “apple”  mentioned  by George Hunt Williamson, Nikola Tesla,  
certainly used the other dimensions  while he was here. He  is reported  to have been able to 
visualize his inventions  in precise detail.  He would say to someone,  “Here is my experiment.  
Can't you see it? I've been running it for three days.  Tomorrow  I'll disassemble  it and inspect  
it for wear.” The observer could see nothing.  Yet with these invisible  experiments, Tesla made 
significant  advances  in science,  and is the father of alternating current  theory and 
application.  Tesla was using the power of his mind to create devices on the finer planes of 
existence.  “C”   talks about  these planes:
Well, in the body,  there is a great  difference  in the potential  there. It is known to be 
greater,  so that  there are many more different  kinds of people there than here.
AM I TO  TAKE IT THAT YOU ARE TALKING ABOUT LEAVING YOUR BODYS
Not  exactly.  It is an extension with oneness with the body yet  the dimension  extra other than 
you can work in and affect  you here, and it is real, and it is a lot of fun. It is not  a leaving 
of the body,  it is not a dissociation  from the body; it is an extension of intelligence,  not 
through  the body but the other way around. First  the dimension which means you can move in and 
out of the body into the extensions  of the body into different  dimensions,  then by these it is 
much more easy to be helpful.  It is difficult  to be of use when kept within  the body,

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

without  the other dimensions.  Yet  there were dimensions  there that we could not enter although 
we knew of them.
To  these “apples”  on their home planet, death does not seem to pose the threat it tends to on 
Earth. Life and death seem to be perceived with some clarity as one flowing substance.


ALL RIGHT. I BELIEVE YOU ARE GOING TO  LEAVE THE LIFE HERE SOON?
Yes.
YOU WILL NOT APPROACH THE AGE OF THIRTYi
No.
IS IT A TRAUMATIC EXPERIENCE?
Not at all.
ALL RIGHT. WILL YOU GO TO THAT POINTS
My heart stopped. That's all.
IS YOUR MATE WITH YOU?
He was, yes.
HE WASH AND WFIAT HAPPENED TO  HIM?
I don't know.
HE’D STILL ALIVE?
He stayed  by where I was for a while.
AFTER LIFE HAD LEFT THE BODY, IS THERE A SOUL AS WE KNOW A SOUL AND WHAT HAPPENS TO IT›
Yes. I stayed there for quite some time.
WFIICH WOULD MEAN FORA FEW DAYS, ORA FEW WEEKS, OR ...  ?
I waited for my mate. He taught for some months.
YES. IS HE AWARE OF YOUR PRESENCE?
Oh,  yes.


14

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS


B
YOU LEAVE THAT PLANET? WHEN YOU LEAVE WILL YOU DIE A DEATH, OR WILL YOU JUST TRANSFER OR MOVE ON? 
HOW WILL IT WORK OUT›
It has to do with the ship,  but  ...   I  will have to leave here,  but I  don't understand  about 
 the death. When it  ...   I  just know  ...   I  believe  the leaving  takes place without  the 
body,  but it has to do with a ship.  But there will  ...   there is a body,  but it is not  the 
same as a tangible one. That  one is  ...   I  believe  ...   it is unnecessary  for the journey.
THEN HOW DOES THE SEPARATION TAKE PLACE? WILL YOU  GO  UP TO  THAT POINT, AND TELL ME STEP BY STEP? 
HOW   DOES THE SOUL GET INTO THE SHIP AND  LEAVE THE  BODY? IF THAT'S WHAT HAPPENS.
I'm ...  ss ...   I'm on a ...  I look ...  looking, over the temple can see it
. The time ...  somehow the leaving is connected with that. With the ship ...  I see them ...
HEROTA, WILL YOU  GO  ON  UP TO  THE DEPARTURE,  AND DESCRIBE IT VERY CAREFULLY FOR ME.
I am old. Old ...
HOW   DOES IT TAKE PLACE? HOW   DO  YOU  GET  THERE, HOW  DO  YOU  GET  INTO THE SHIP, DOES THIS 
TAKE PLACE—
It seems  ...   it seems  that  the old beloved shell is no longer needed and, as we go in the 
ship, we become new. We become new and young,  but not with physical  bodies at this time,  but new 
and young.  (sigh) Spirit bodies like—bodies,  but not the same. But the sadness of leaving 
disappears  with the old shell that was much loved. And we're new and ready.  (sigh).
So we begin to get a picture of the tall, fair race of people that live a many- dimensioned  life, 
whose basic consciousnesses dwell less on the things of the body and more on the things of the 
finer planes than perhaps do ours on Earth.  What sort of environment  do these “apples”  enjoy? 
First, it is definitely stated that  the planet is not Earth:



I4I

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS



DO YOU KNOW WHERE YOU  ARE? ARE YOU  ON  MOTHER EARTH?
No.
DO  YOU  HAVE ANY IDEA WHERE YOU  ARE? No ...
B
UNITED STATES, OR  EUROPE?
No,  no, it's no place that I've seen on Earth.  I don't  think it's part of Earth. It's no place 
that I've seen here.  But I don't  know.
Though the planet is not Earth, it seems to be quite Earthlike:
A
OK. IS THERE AN ATMOSPHERE?
Yes. c
DOES THE PLANET HAVE AN ATMOSPHERES IS IT  SOLID,
LIKE THIS ONE?
The Planet's a lot like this one.
SAME GRAVITYi
No, not quite. Slightly easier to get around.  But very similar. Very similar.
WHAT IS IT LIKE?
Nice. Much water, little land, great riches in the ocean, great minerals. Ah, that's it. That's why 
they're all metal.
“They”  refers to the buildings the subject had just talked about.
B
DO YOU HAVE LAKES,  RIVERS, STREAMS, OCEANSi
There is water.
OK. DO YOU HAVE FISH?

14*

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

I don't know. There is much water.
Their planet, call it Otherworld,  has the same day-night  that we do, suggesting  that  they also 
revolve.
A
DO YOU GET TIRED, AND REST AND SLEEP?
Yes.
IS THERE ALWAYS DARKNESS, OR IS THERE LIGHT AND THEN DARK?
Light and then dark.
THERF IS DAY AND THEN NIGHT.
Yes.
B
NOW, YOU MENTIONED,  HEROT, THAT IT WAS DAYLIGHT, AND THE SUN WAS SHINING. IS IT ALSO NIGHT TIMES
There is. I don't see that there is night now but I know that there is. There seem to be cities and 
country, though apparently not like our rural
areas:
B
ALL RIGHT. NOW, WHERE DO YOU LIVE? WHERE IS ALL THIS TAKING  PLACE?
This place is removed from a city, but it's perfect. It's not like wild country, it's perfect. It's 
harmonious.
Not in the city. Like the country,  but ...  there's a sidewalk that goes from down the hill up the 
hill. I'm up the hill. There's ...  almost a circle where I am. And then down the hill again.
HOW   MANY ENTITIES WERE ON  THAT PLANET›
I don't  know.
THOUSANDS?
I don't know. I have impressions  that there were cities. This was not part of it, exactly.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

MILLIONSi
Many,  but I  ...   I  don't  really see the rest.  I  see our part,  here.
Here is some description of the cities on Otherworld: streets, people, metal buildings.
A
DO YOU HAVE A HOMES
It seems like I am just walking down the street, down this long ...
OK,  TELL ME ABOUT THE STREETS. AND  ABOUT THE PEOPLE, AND  THE  TRANSPORTATION.
I don't see any transportation. People are out on the streets.  I  am just walking,  and there are 
children.  I  play. They all wave. A  very happy time.


It seems like what I saw was a lot of metal, like metal buildings, something like that.
GO  AHEAD WITH IT.
OK.   It seems  that I  am a young  boy or girl of  apparently  another world.
GO  AHEAD WITH IT.
And the world has metal buildings. A
NOWAS BEST YOU  CAN, TELL ME ABOUT THESE
BUILDINGS  ...  WINDOWS,  ROOFS, WALLS, LIGHTS—
They've got glass tops—domes—just smooth.  I  can't  see them here, windows or anything like that. 
There seem  to be roads—wide  roads  that wind around through  the domes.  On   the right  there's 
some tall structure,  I  can't  ...   I  don't  understand—at  least  that's where  the things that 
are going up in the air are coming from.
AS WELL AS YOU CAN, DESCRIBE THE TALLER STRUCTURE.
Well, it seems circular on the very top, but it's much taller than the rest of the city. It's like 
a long diamond shape except that it goes in in the middle instead of out. It's circular at the 
bottom and at the top.

144

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

IN OTHER WORDS, IT'S LIKE A BIG HOUR GLASS i
Right.
OK.  NOW   THE   FORMS GOING UP IN THE AIR. ARE THEY COMING FROM THE TOP OF THIS STRUCTURE›
I don't know. At first I saw something go up, maybe two things go up; now I don't see them.
THINGS? LIKE WHAT›
Objects.
SOLID OBJECTSi  BALLOONSi
No, solid objects, round  ...
A CRAFTY
Most probably. It's too hard to say.
WAS THERE ANY SOUND INVOLVED?
No.
OK. BUT THERE WAS A LIGHT THAT WAS IN THIS?
Yes.
Here is further information on the craft which seemed to be coming out of the tall structure:
B
WHAT ABOUT TRAVEL? DO YOU HAVE VEHICLESi
Hm  ...  somehow  ...  from the ...
HOW  DO  YOU  TRAVEL FROM ONE CITY TO ANOTHER?  ON THE  GROUND, OR UP OFF THE  GROUND?
I saw, from the top of this, I can't tell if it's the temple, I think ...  I, no, I can't tell if 
it's the temple, but its a rounded  building from the top of which metallic,  round vehicles come 
and go. I just see the glimmer in the night.
OK, DESCRIBE THOSE VEHICLES.  DO THEY HAVE WINGS, LIKE AIRPLANESi
No, no, no. They ...  (pause).

I4i

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

HOW DO THEY LIFT UP AND  SUPPORT THEMSELVES i AND
HOW  DO  THEY GO?
It has to do again with these things.  ...invisible conce ... THE  ELECTROMAGNETIC WIRES.
It's invisible,  but it has to do with that. YES.
Um, but it's ...  they're metallic. I can only see them from a distance.
HAVE YOU BEEN IN THEM?
At this moment I am looking from a distance. As ...  There seems to be

THERE SEEMS TO  BE WHATi
The way of seeing out comes from the side. There is a ...  a ...  as in a brim of a hat, all 
around, sloping slightly upward to the windows around, and then a slightly sloped top, but mostly 
these that I see are, not flat but more round, more flat than elevated. They're round, with the lip 
of the hat going slightly upward, and windows around at that point where it meets. The  top with 
nothing on, the top is smooth, and silver,  blank. It has almost a white light in the starlight. 
There are more than one, they, they are to be used.
The craft sound suspiciously like what we would call flying saucers—a very painstaking description 
from a subject who had not previously pored over pictures of such vehicles.
“B” also tells us about what communications are like on Otherworld:
WHAT ABOUT COMMUNICATIONS FROM ONE  CITY TO ANOTHER?  DID  YOU  COMMUNICATED
Invisible wires. Wires—that comes to mind. They were wires but they were not visible.
DID YOU COMMUNICATE  WITH  ...
Mag ...
YES, GO AHEAD.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Ah ...  not ...  magnetic ...  I don't know the concept, I know, I can't— it was through hidden 
wires, wires hidden, they were not visible. Um, but they had to do with ...  something 
magnetic—Electromagne ...  ?
ELECTROMAGNETICi
I don't  know what,  but they were ours,  the communication  of the power from the temple,  and any 
communication  needed came from those.  Came from this.  But it was like invisible  lines going out 
 that had, that had power.
Although each subject  was questioned  to some extent  about  the political  and governmental  
setup of  their country  or planet,  no information  was forthcoming  from these people, who in 
their Otherworld  life must have been quite uninvolved  in politics,  either  because  of their 
place within  their society allowing  them freedom from the day-to-day  politics of the culture, or 
because  their culture was not  a politically structured  one. It  seems possible  that people who 
have mastered  the extraphysical  dimensions described  earlier,  and who are telepathic,  might 
well be able to function  as a society without  the ponderous  bureaucracy  and decision-making 
machinery of our political systems.
The Otherworlders  had a good deal of trouble trying  to express  where  their planet was in 
relation  to Earth:


CAN  YOU  GIVE ME ANY IDEA OF WHICH PLANET WE ARE TALKING ABOUT›
No.
ALL RIGHT. NOW, IN TERMS OF EARTH TIME, ARE YOU AWARE OF OTHER PLANETS IN THE SOLAR SYSTEM OTHER 
THAN YOUR OWN?
Yes.
ALL RIGHT. ARE YOU AWARE OF PLANET EARTHS
No.
ALL RIGHT. WHICH  PLANETS ARE YOU FAMILIAR WITHi DO YOU KNOW ANY OF THEM BY NAME, OR DO YOU CALL 
THEM NAMES?
I  don't  know.

147

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

ARE YOU OF THE SAME SOLAR SYSTEM AS THE EARTH?  DO YOU HAVE THE SAME SUN?
No.
A DIFFERENT SUN?
Yes.
A DIFFERENT  UNIVERSE, THEN?
Same universe, different time. Different dimension.
ALL RIGHT. SAME UNIVERSE,  BUT IN A DIFFERENT DIMENSION  OF THAT SAME UNIVERSE?
Yes, that's right.
ALL RIGHT, I UNDERSTAND.  IN TERMS OF TIME, HOW WOULD YOU DESCRIBE THAT AS RELATED TO  EARTH TIME 
OR UNIVERSAL TIME.
Time. I see more ...  I see time easily. I am not as able to move about, yet I can ...  time is 
more like water. It is more easily penetrated.
SO YOU DO HAVE AN UNDERSTANDING  OF TIME, AND A WAY TO  DEAL WITH IT, THENi
Yes.
NOW, THE FACT THAT YOU ARE TEN YEARS OF AGE. WOULD THOSE TEN YEARS RELATE TO  TEN YEARS OF EARTH 
TIME?
It is of the body.
There is more room in time. We can move about  and live and be in more depth.


HOW FAR IS EARTH FROM WHERE YOU ARE, IN ANY TERMS OF MEASUREMENT THAT YOU USE?
There is no measurement.  It is just there.
IT'S A DIFFERENT  DIMENSIONS  CAN  YOU  SEE THE  EARTH FROM THAT PLACE?
No.

148

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

One last note about the Otherworld environment:  their relationship with the animals:
FISH? BIRDS? ANIMALS?
They are there, but they ...  They are there, but they are there as a guest when they are there. 
They are not always there but they will come and Visit.
B
BUT  YOU  HAVE AN ANIMAL KINGDOM THEREi
They are there,  but I  don't  see them now.  But  they are there and they are our friends.
FROM YOUR MEMORY ARE THEY SIMILAR TO  EARTH ANIMALSi
I ...  I don't see them. But there are animals there, that are ...
CAN YOU COMMUNICATE WITH THEM?
Without words.
On  this slightly whimsical  note we turn to the question of what  the family life is like on 
Otherworld.  The three subjects report  a kind of extended family setting which is often attempted  
these days by communal  groups.


NOW YOUR STRUCTURE,  FAMILY. DO YOU HAVE BROTHERS, SISTERSi
It's not like we understand  here.
OK.  AS BEST YOU  CAN, TELL ME THE  STRUCTURE.
We're born like here.  We're all of the same kind,  but our people form attachments  to those of 
natures which are harmonious  not  in a single but more in a community  ...   very close,  like a 
clan.  We make no difference.  I  have many,  say, seven or eight parents.
YOU   DON'T KNOW WHICH ARE YOUR REAL PARENTS?
Yes.
YOUDOKNOW.
Yes.

149

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

BUTYOU HAVE SEVEN OR  EIGHT PARENTS?
Yes.
NOW, DO  YOU ACCEPT THESE A8 BEING REAL PARENTS OR  ADOPTED PARENTS›
They are parents.
NOW YOU WERE BORN TO  ALL OF THEME
We know who planted  the seed,  but  the bonds between  the community are completely  more real 
than the body. Each of my parents would do anything  for me. Each of my brothers  and sisters  make 
no difference about  the body.  We are all of a home.
NOW, YOU WERE BORN FROM ONE MOTHER.
Yes.
BUT MANY FATHERS?
No. Mated. There are mated relationships in privacy. And also each has privacy.
ARE YOU  IN  RELATION TO  EACH OF THOSEi
What  you say, “blood”—with  only my Father and my Mother of the body. But I am of a family  bond 
within  the clan.
B
ALL RIGHT. HEROT, LET'S GO ON, NOW. LET'S MOVE UP LATER THAT DAY, OR ANY DAY, TO  THE EVENING.  
ONE, TWO, THREE,  (snap).
I see a smaller dwelling that's round, of the same material,  that is somewhere  near the temple. I 
think there are other of these houses also. We gather  ...  I believe this is where we eat. There 
are shining floors there.
WEA YOUR FAMILY?
Not in a tight sense. It's ...  a purpose. Family of purpose.  But I believe actual parents are 
there.
go on now to take a look at “B”s evening meal:



ISO

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

B
YOUR MEALS WOULD CONSIST OF WHAT›
No animals, no animals we're eating. It's like a broth, but it's not of animals. It's a gold ...  
white dishes. Dishes not like dishes. Warm  ... anyway, there are no animals in it. It's not 
harming anything. And the things we eat out of, they're  ...  these bowls. It's almost like a 
marble, they're like with ornate things around them, I mean, ornate, the same material, they're not 
like bowls, here.
COULD YOU DRAW A PICTURE OF ONE  IF I GAVE YOU A PIECE OF PAPER?
They're like on a stand, with things coming down and holding  them onto the table, and they're 
white,  almost  like marble,  but not as heavy. It's like a ceremonial  bowl. And all of us,  
there's a large one in the center from which we all eat. Someone  serves  us.
THE  BROTH  IS MADE OF GRAIN AND VEGETABLESi
I don't know. It's thick almost like ... PORRIDGE?
But it has nothing granular in it, you can see it's smooth and fairly thick and golden.
UM  HUM. SOMETHING LIKE CREAMED POTATOES  OR PUMPKINS THAT TEXTURE, THAT DENSITYi
Yeah.
BUT YOU DON'T EAT FISH.
No.
ccA»  and “C” also talk about food:
c
THE  CROPS OF YOUR PEOPLE ARE?
In the body, the crops are grain, and a type of root, like the potato, and other—many other—things 
familiar  to those who are like us everywhere.
A
TELL ME ABOUT THE FOOD. WHAT FOOD DO YOU EAT›

III

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

It seems that ...  that you can think it, (Words inaudible)  ...  teachers ... Everything seems to 
be a lot by thought. I can't see people growing food, or making clothes—
Everything is just there, if you want it there.
DO  YOU WORK, EAT, AND SLEEP LIKE HUMAN  PEOPLE DO?
I am being trained not to do so much of that. Other people do more.
The clothing which these three wear is very simple and monklike: B
I'm just waiting by the temple for something.
VERY GOOD. LET'S JUST WAIT THERE. WHAT ARE YOU WEARINGS
White robe.  White,  loose garment.


ALL RIGHT. WILL YOU  TELL ME ABOUT YOUR MANNER OF DRESS AND CLOTHINGS
It is like ...  with robes.
OK, THOSE ROBES ARE MADE OF WHATi
(Pause)  Cloth.
DOES THE  MATERIAL  COME FROM THAT PLANET›
Yes.
Presumably  the Otherworlders  have other garments which  they can use when they need to be more 
active  than  they are in this temple life. One  of the subjects has mentioned  to me, not while in 
hypnosis  but  afterwards,  that she had seen herself in a sort of jump-suit  or ski-suit,  
comfortable  and form- fitting, while she was on duty working off the planet.
Earlier I mentioned  that I could not find a political consciousness  within these three people. 
However,  they do seem to have a government,  but one which is dedicated totally to service,  
rather than to the running of a governmental self-perpetuation machine:




IU

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS



I am of a certain clan of persons that takes a special training to serve in government. We are like 
monks, and give all our energies to helping society. We start very young. I'm ten.
In this particular case,  “C”   had been born into the government-service clan. But she was not  
required  to remain within  that “caste.”
c
I  am studying  to be helpful.
VERY WELL. IS IT FORMAL STUDY, ORGANIZED  STUDYi
Yes.
My  clan asks each  to decide. Each of us who do not desire  this life may join another clan. This 
is done at the age of 8.
YOU HAVE ELECTED TO  STAY WITH THIS CLAN, THEN?
I am very happy with this clan.
The clan trains its youngsters  in a place which these subjects describe as a temple. “B,” who 
seems to have spent more of her life within the temple atmosphere  than the other two, has a great 
deal to say about it:
B
It's like a ...   a white building  there,  big building.  I'm outside.  It's very beautiful  
outside.  There are steps going into the building.  It's different looking,  and  ...   it's not  a 
square  building,  it's more rounded.
THE  MATERIAL  IS WHATi
On this building it seems like a kind of stone, but not stone. It all is one piece. It's not 
pieces, it's all one piece.
ARE YOU  SAYING THAT THE ENTIRE BUILDING IS JUST ONE PIECE, OR  IS IT LIKE WINGS STACKED ONE  ON  
TOP OF THE  OTHERSi
It's a rounded building,  but there is a ...   some kind of design  ...   a glyph or something  on 
the front,  the same materials  that  this is made of,  but it stands out. It's  ...   like a 
temple.  I  don't see any  ...
(Turning  tape over,  loses continuity.  Pick up on side two of three  total sides.)

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

. a leaf on the outside of the door  ...  that uses flowing things and it's in relief above the 
door,  but it's not words.
OK. IS THIS A SYMBOL OF SOME KIND?
Yes.
WHAT ARE YOU  DOING NOW? LOOK BACK OVER THE PART YEAR, AND  SEE WHAT HAS BEEN GOING ON.
I can't see. Initiate comes to mind. Initiate. I have been one. Am one. km  one.
CAN  YOU  GO   BACK TO  IT? LET'S GO  BACK TO  YOUR INITIATION, THEN, ALL RIGHTS ONE, TWO, THREE, 
(snap.)
Inside,  inside. Candles round inside. Beautiful dark,  candlelight,  light, and golden light  at  
the top. Altar,  there's an altar,  and a ...
Robes. There are other people besides me ...  in the same robes, and there are at the altar 
teachers, teachers, priests, teachers. And there is music as though from voices, but it's not ...  
there are no people making it. The music is there but I don't see what causes it. That is all I 
see.
DOING FINE. TELL ME ABOUT YOUR INITIATION. WHAT WAS IT›  YOU  BECAME A WHAT AFTER YOUR INITIATIONS
A servant.
YOU BECAME A SERVANTS TO  WHOM OR TO WHAT›
A servant of God, I don't know how, what to ...
ARE YOU ON THE ORDER OF A PRIESTESS i
No,   not  yet.
OK,  HEROT, LET'S MOVE ON. LET'S MOVE UP ONE  TENTH
OF YOUR LIFE TIME. ONE, TWO, THREE,  (snap).
I just saw that I was older and carrying a cup at this point.
THE SAME CUP?
A cup. A different one.
NOW, ARE YOU  STILL IN THE  TEMPLE?  ARE YOU  STILL A STUDENTS
I help with it now.

Ii4

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

OK, YOU'VE MOVED UP SOME, THEN.
There's so much still to learn. I know very little. But I'm helping with
1t.
GooD.
That's what  the challenge  has to do with.
AS A GENERAL THING, WHAT DO YOU TEACH? RELIGIOUS THINGS PERTAINING  TO  SPIRITUAL DEVELOPMENT,  OR 
DO YOU TEACH OTHER THINGS ALONG WITH IT›
Of the spirit.
LET'S MOVE UP TO  HALFWAY, THROUGH THAT LIFE. ONE, TWO, THREE,  (snap). NOW LOOK BACK WHERE WF'VE 
PASSED. WHAT ARE YOU DOING NOW.
Earlier,  it had to do with the temple, sending  out love and energy.  We didn't  actually depart  
physically,  I  don't, I can't see, later yet,  but earlier,  I  do see that earlier  the temple 
was used for service but it had to do a lot with things  that weren't  accomplished  physically.  
It sent out help through  thought  and ceremony and  ...   I  think ritual,  but it was very,  it 
was all with love,  it was as a center.
DID THESE THOUGHTS  ORIGINATE FROM THE TEMPLE ITSELF OR FROM THE PEOPLE WFIO WERE IN IT›
All  together.  Left all together.
DID   THE  TEMPLE SERVE SOMEWHAT  AS A PYRAMID?
It  was not  a pyramid.
YES, BUT  ON  THE  SAME ORDER?
It was a holy,  holy place,  and it sent  ...    it was a center for sending— strength,  love,  for 
 ...   energy,  energy sending,  energy.
WHERE DID THEY SEND ALL THIS ENERGY TO› THROUGH THE ENTIRE UNIVERSE?  OR JUST TO THAT PLANET›
It was not limited to that planet,  but it encompassed  that planet.  It  ... it was a protection  
...   and more  ...   more.  It protected,  and it healed, and sent out also where needed,  but it 
was  ...
Here is the temple  through  the eyes of “A”  and “C”:

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

c
WHERE DO YOU GO, AFTER THAT POINT›
I went to a place. I don't know where it was,  but it was very beautiful.
TELL ME EVERY IMPRESSION  OF IT.
I wrote about  it once.  It is a temple.  We walked across  the most beautiful  grass. Beautiful  
trees.  Beautiful place.  We went  into the temple,  a great  big white marble  ...   and no one 
was there,  but we could hear very clearly,  and we rested  there until we were ready to find out 
what we were to do next. And we went  to a temple.

WILL YOU  MOVE ON NOW TO YOUR TEACHER, YOUR
DESTINATION.
I seem to enter a beautiful house, a temple, like, with columns.
AS YOU  APPROACH THE TEMPLE,  WILL YOU  GIVE AN OVER-ALL VIEW OF  IT, AND  THEN MOVE ON UP, AND 
DESCRIBE THE ENTIRE ENTRANCE THAT YOU ARE GOING INTOi
There are two columns, one on each side. Three or four steps. It glitters smooth. It is round, with 
a dome-like top. There is ...  it is hard to explain  ...  there is, it is like music but it is not 
note-music, it is like air- music, dancing in sparkles. Everything is transformed  to glitter.
TELL ME ABOUT THE CONSTRUCTION  OF THE BUILDING. DO  THE SIDE WALLS HAVE JOINTS IN THEM, OR DO  
THEY ALL HAVE ONE  PIECE, OR  ...
The walls are all one piece. They are about  ten feet high and then the dome starts. The walls are 
smooth  ...   a dull, goldish color.
GIVE ME SOME ESTIMATE OF THE DIAMETER OF IT. HOW FAR IS IT ACROSS? IS IT A LARGE BUILDINGS
On   the outside it is not large,  but on the inside it is. I  am trying to remember  why it is 
large on the inside  but  not on the outside  ...
ON   THE   OUTSIDE YOU HAVE THE IMPRESSION OF PERHAPS A HUNDRED FEET IN DIAMETER?


I*

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Less. Well, that is about right. I am entering through the door. There is a cushion in the middle 
of the floor. It is dark outside. But not real dark,  just shadowy dark.
A  theme  that  is often sounded  in these regressions  is that of a certain  and unique light 
which is encountered  in the temple and about  its teachers:


WAS THERE SOMEONE THERE TO  ASSIST YOU, TO BE A GUIDE FOR YOUR
It was there, but not in the body. It was ...  in the wind, sort of. VISIBLE TO  YOUR
No. Just light. Beautiful. It is really beautiful. You can see little wind that was speaking and it 
was with little flecks like ...  little beams of light.


I kneel on the cushion. There is nothing else there but the air making music and I pray. And a 
light comes down.
It is at first very heavy gold bright light, a waterfall of light. It falls on top of me and is 
running like a river down on the floor, and it glows the whole room. I come here before I go see 
the teachers.
DO   YOU   HAVE A PHYSICAL SENSATION OF TOUCH OR FEEL?
Total warmth.  Total oneness with the light. It is a dissolving  of my whole body.  I  am washed 
out in the ocean.  It is  ...   it is union.
The teachers  who are spoken of by these Otherworlders  seem  to be a beautiful lot, much 
appreciated  by their students.  The job is filled by the members of the clan who have reached  the 
age of what would presumably be retirement  here on Earth. But on Otherworld,  they begin a new 
career, passing on what  they have learned  to the younger clan members:
B
There is a teacher  that is wonderful.
GO   AHEAD WITH YOUR DAILY WORK WITH HIM. HOW DOES HE INSTRUCT YOUR


Ii7

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

He's just blessing us all. He has much love, much love. It all ...  there's
. oh, golden, golden, golden light, there. (Sighs). BEAUTIFUL,  ISN'T ITS IS IT WARM, COLD›
There is no cold or warm there. It is blessed. A
THEN YOU MOVE ON TO YOUR TEACHERSi OR  TO  YOUR TEACHER, I SHOULD SAY. WILL YOU DESCRIBE AS YOU 
APPROACH YOUR TEACHER?
I am walking back out of the temple. The man is waiting for me. THE  SAME MAN YOU PASSED EARLIER!
Yes.
IS HE YOUR TEACHERS
He is not my old teachers. But we are both going there, to my teachers. He is ...  he has been 
waiting for me for the light to have come unto me.
THE   TWO   OF  YOU   ARE GOING ON, NOW, TO YOUR
TEACHER.
Yes. We seem  to  ...   there is grass. We seem  to go up to a cave,  like the cave before.  It 
overlooks  the city.
YOUR TEACHER IS IN THE  CAVES
No. The back wall seems to open and we go through it, and there are the three teachers sitting in a 
semicircle, waiting for us.
CAN   YOU   DESCRIBE THEM? THEIR POSITION?
They are sitting down,  cross-legged.  They have white robes on, and their light illuminates  the 
whole cave. They have long, white hair,  and their eyes  ...    their eyes just  ...   twinkle. 
They have such power in those eyes. Such power and light  in those eyes.  We sit down facing  them 
and we meditate. They are  ...   something  is coming from their heads  to mine.  It is  ...   it 
is knowledge.  I  am  ...   I  know all of this,  and yet I  will never  ...   I  won't remember  
it for a long time. They have explained  this to me, and we agreed.  I  am  ...   I  am like a 
seed. I  have been  ...   The word is being confused.  I  have been nurtured  by them.  I  have  
...   been chosen  to carry their information.  We will be used,  they say, in time.
On  the outside I  am like a child. On  the inside I  am old and wise,  and I
Is

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

see and understand everything  that  they see and understand  ...   I  will not  be able to speak 
for some time through  this child. It is a strange combination.  For now,  all the teachers are 
feeding  me. The child knows what's going on, but she will forget.  But the old person inside will  
... will be there always,  with the information  and the knowledge.  I  feel  ... they do this all 
in love,  love that is total understanding, total understanding  of all that  there is, and yet, I  
feel here a confusion  because I  am their seed.  I  am theirs.
ALL RIGHT. YOU ARE OBTAINING THE INFORMATION.
Yes.
HOW WILL THE INFORMATION  THEN BE RELEASED? AND WHEN WILL IT BE RELEASED?
Very little at a time at first. Just enough to keep  the child when she goes away secure and 
shielded from harmful environment.  She will be sent away with other peoples  to Earth. But that is 
some time from now. The child must go through a great deal of training  first. When she is on Earth 
 bit by bit will come  ...   but she will hide it from others. I  do not see right now where,  or 
even if  all the knowledge will come out. She is most careful.

OK.   CAN   YOU   MOVE ON FORWARD,  NOW, MONTH BY MONTH. YEAR BY YEAR, HOWEVER YOU  WANT TO  MOVE. 
TELL ME WHAT'S GOING ON IN THE LATTER PART.
I'm teaching.  I'm working with the younger clan. My  mate goes out one more time than I  do.
HE  IS STRONGER?
Yes,  and somewhat  younger.
SO  HE  MAKES ONE  MORE OFF THE  PLANET JOB, THEN?
Uh huh.
HOW   LONG IS HE  GONE?
A year.
IS EVERYTHING  ALL RIGHT WHEN HE COMES BACK?
He  is beginning  to be tired then, and joins the younger ones to teach.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

YES. HE AND YOU TEACH THEM, IN GENERAL, WHAT›
Many things.  I  personally work with the younger  members  to try to help them with their personal 
 understanding  of themselves.  That  is my most primary  interest.  Others would be teaching other 
techniques  and disciplines  of the personality.  This is the way of harnessing  the dimensions.
That last statement strikes me as being quite central: “... disciplines of the personality (are)  
the way of harnessing the dimensions.” This point is emphasized  by the UFO contacts again and 
again.
After the Otherworld children finish their “schoolwork”  with their teachers in the temple, they 
are eligible to enter the active service.
“A”  spends nearly all of her time under hypnosis concentrating  on the period when she, as an 
older person, was at  the temple and then preparing to voyage forth to Earth after her “death”  on 
that planet. So we can get no information  about  the service from her.  “B”  spends much of her 
time speaking of her work within  the temple itself,  and indeed she seems  to have been more 
closely aligned with its functioning  throughout  her life than the other two subjects,  remaining  
more cloistered.  She does give a hint of her involvement  with off-the-planet service:
I BELIEVE YOU  ARE VERY HAPPY.  YOU  ARE A VERY HAPPY ENTITY. YOU  ENJOY THAT LIFE, DON'T YOU? HAVE 
YOU TRAVELED WITH THOSE SHIPS, EVER?
I feel at one with them. I don't know if ...  There is something ...  It's part of our purpose 
there ...  to use ...  to do this ...
The subject known as “C” is the richest source of information  about off- the-planet service by the 
clan. Their basic function  is described well by Yolanda:
. not only did many incarnate on Earth so as to be part of the people and to lead them back 
gradually  but also there were continual visits by those who came in their spacecraft, and 
otherwise.?
“C” tells of taking missions first on her own planet, and after passing this test, on other 
planets:


LET'S MOVE UP TO AGE FIFTEEN, THEN. ONE, TWO,
THREE, (snap).  NOW YOU'RE FIFTEEN. OLDER, WISER.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

LOOKING  BACK OVER THE LAST FIVE YEARS, WHAT'S HAPPENED?
I  had a darn good time.
A GOOD TIME WOULD MEAN WFIAT›
Learned a whole lot. Started working with small amounts of responsibility, helping.  First we have 
dealings with those of our own planet who are not  as fortunate  and do not have the ability to 
penetrate time and must dwell in the body. And we help them  to find their way, without  disturbing 
 them.  And that  is very satisfying  to see an actual success.
My first case was a tribe. The tribe was having a difficulty with a kind of predator which was 
eating their crops. And myself and two others found a way to enable the tribesmen  to protect their 
crops. We fixed a more attractive prey by planting in wild land a crop which was more desirable to 
the catlike creatures. Therefore, the tribesmen  had pride and protected  their land, and we did 
not interfere. We found this a lot of fun, too.
THIS IS ON  YOUR PLANET.
This is on my planet.
c
NOW, YOU'RE WORKING ON  A DIFFERENT PLANET, AND THEY HAVE BEEN ALL BUT  ANNIHILATED,  I BELIEVE,  
BY SOME NATURAL CATASTROPHE.
Yes.
NOW     HOW     ARE YOU  COMING ALONG WITH THAT›
OK. It'll improve in time. See, if you want to just come along and help them, that's fine, but then 
they'll never think it out for themselves.  It takes time.
SO  YOU  HAVE TO  DO  GUIDE WORK FOR THEM?
That's right. Just put it where  they can find it and—in  the body, all of us have—so  it will 
happen.  It just  takes time.
HAVE YOU DETERMINED THE CAUSE OF THE DISASTERS


III

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Yes. That was easy.  There was a  ...   the plates of the planet went together abruptly and there 
was fire and then flood. Most of the people on the planet  were living in the place where  this 
whole area was inundated,  and that's what  put out  the fire. Very few survived.  And those that 
did survive were in isolated areas. It seemed  that almost  the whole civilization was  ...
THE   PLATES WERE WHAT›
The  planet,  the surface, the earth, the rock ...
AND THEY WENT TOGETHER?
They were together, and they crushed each other. They were side by side and there was heat within 
and it came out, and there was a shift, and one plate lapped over the other, a great—really two 
continents, you see, totally jammed up into each other. And it was like an eruption, and it was 
terrible. There was a great deal of destruction.
WHAT WAS THE  REAL CAUSE OF THIS CATASTROPHES
Oh. Well, I don't know.
WAS IT  TOTALLY AN ACT OF NATURE›
The plates had always been unstable here. I do not know of the philosophy, why it happened; that it 
happened in such a way was because they were unstable in just that way.
THE   PLATES DID PROVIDE STABILITY?  DID THEY PROVIDE ANY FORM OF ENERGYi
This was the earth upon which the continents were ...  they were part of that planet's surface.
OK, VERY WELL. YOU'RE WELL ON  YOUR WAY WITH RECONSTRUCTION NOW. YOU'VE GOT  THEM READY TO HELP 
THEMSELVES?
Not  yet.
YOU'RE STILL WORKING  WITH THEME
What we're doing mostly for them is just sending  them comfort. They—we  are still searching  for 
records.  Trying  to find the records.  We are going  to have to bring  them up from somewhere.  We 
do not want  to substitute  records.  There are surely some records left that were not either 
burned completely or destroyed  by water.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

WFIAT TYPE OF  RECORDS, AND FOR WFIAT PURPOSE?
Any type of records that will give them back their language,  their history, their culture.
OK.  HOW   DO  THESE PEOPLE COMPARE TO  YOUR OWN DESCRIPTION?
They are short, dark, very squat. They look like, well, they look like the cave people that they 
are, really,  they're pretty messy right now.
HOW   ABOUT YOUR RELATIONSHIP  AND  DEALING WITH
THEM?
They do not know we are here. They suspect  that  there is something odd happening,  but  they do 
not know  that we are here.
OK. HOW LONG  DO YOU STAY THERE, IN TERMS OF MONTHS OR YEARS OF YOUR LIFE?
In the body, we stay a year.  In the dimensions,  we stay much longer. But we stay only a year, in 
the body.
OK.  WHEN YOU FINISH THIS JOB, YOU ARE GOING BACK TO  YOUR HOME PLANET,  RIGHT›
Yes. To  rest.
OK, LET'S GO BACK. YOU'RE FINISHED. ANYTHING YOU WANT TO  TELL ME ABOUT FINISHING  UP, OR THE TRIP 
BACK, OR THE RETURN›
Well,  of course,  when I  finished,  they weren't  finished.
“C”   goes on in her narrative  to tell of her teaching  the younger clan in her old age, and then 
of her death.  We've read both of these portions earlier  in the chapter.  After “death”  in the 
physical sense,  “C”   says she waits in  another  dimension for over a year,  until her mate joins 
her.  Why does she wait? All three Otherworlders  begin a new part of the narrative  at  this 
point: they tell of their preparation  for service on Earth as “apples.”  OAHSPE talks about  these 
apples  a lot, and even mentions  the arrival  of some from Hautuon,  a planet whose name is 
remarkably  like the chief contact  of  several contactees,  Hatonn:
Presently could be seen guardian ships, thousands and thousands, traveling beside the laboring sun, 
the hosts of Hautuon.


H3

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

And the guardian ships were themselves like stars, and carried millions of etherean souls who had 
been Gods and Goddesses on many worlds; and they formed wings for the Hautuon avalanche, to hold 
steady the course to the red star, the earth of mortals.
Note that within the ships are “etherean  beings.”
Our   people report  that  as they enter  the ship that  brings  them here,  they leave their 
physical  body behind and have instead a new,  lighter-density body.  What  is the ship like,  and 
why do they need it?


OK.   WILL YOU  DESCRIBE THE  CRAFT ON  THE  OUTSIDE, AND THEN DESCRIBE IT AS YOU  ARE GETTING 
INSIDE OF IT.
It is sitting on its bottom. There are no legs. There's a door, that acts as a ramp. It has an edge 
around the middle.
IS IT  ROUND?
Yes.
OK. IS IT THICKER IN THE MIDDLE THAN IT IS AROUND THE EDGESi
It is thick in the middle.
THE  CRAFT APPEARS TO  BE MADE OF WHAT, NOWT
METALLICi CERAMICS?
I feel as if it's a kind of metal.
SHINY, LIKE STAINLESS STEEL, OR ALUMINUM, OR COPPER, OR ZINC, OR WFIAT›
Mmmrnh  ...  flat. Not shiny.
ALL RIGHT. IS THERE AN ANTENNA UP THE SIDE OF ITS CHECK FOR ANYTHING  UNUSUAL ABOUT THE EXTERIOR?
No.
ALL RIGHT. WILL YOU  GO  ON  UP THE  RAMP. AS YOU  GO INSIDE, BEGIN DESCRIBING  THE INTERIOR FOR 
ME.
It is round inside. I sit—there are seats around the windows. There are lights but I do not ...  I 
am getting confused.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

BEFORE YOU  CAME INSIDE, WERE THERE ANY OTHER PEOPLE AROUND, GROUND CREW OR SERVICE PERSONNEL?
No.
FEEL ANY PEOPLE, OR ANYBODY ELSE.
No.
ALL RIGHT. YOU'RE INSIDE. THERE ARE SEATS INSIDE OF IT, AND LIGHTS. BUT IS THERE A CONTROL PANEL IN 
IT,  A COCKPIT. HOW DO  YOU CONTROL THE SHIPS
My impression is that there is no power—it is the minds that—I don't know if it's like just all our 
joint minds, or the teacher's  joint minds, but just minds.
OK, THE SHIP'S CONTROLLED  BY THOUGHT FORMS, THEN; THOUGHT ENERGY?
Yes.
BUT, NOW DO YOU CLOSE THE DOORS
It  is time to go. It closes.
ALL RIGHT. WHEN IT IS TIME TO  GO,  HOW  DO  YOU DEPART? NOW  DO  YOU  START MOVINGi JUST THINK?
Yes  ...
B
HOW  DO  YOU  LEAYE? WHO  TAKES CONTROL OF THE
SHIPS WHO FLIES IT? IS THERE A PILOTS
No, no.
A DOOR FRAME? COCKPIT›
There are lights within,  but  ...   the control is  ...   we who are inside are as one, and that  
thought  is at one with the thought  within  the temple. And that is how we leave.


LET'S MOVE FORWARD, NOW, ANOTHER TENTH OF YOUR EXPERIENCE.  ONE, TWO, THREE,  (snap). YOU   ARE 
THERE. WHAT'S HAPPENINGS
*\

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

I am coming out of my cave, and going down  the rocky cliff. I am  going to go towards  the city 
because  they are starting  to send off those who have  been prepared,  to help the Earth.  I am 
very excited. There is a tall structure on the right, shaped like an hour-glass,  very slender.  
And on top of this tall structure  is a platform  from where  the crafts are leaving. There is a 
large one. It will hold many, many peoples from many places.  They will unite here,  in this craft.
WHAT'S IT SHAPED  LIKED
It  is long shape,  round.
LIKE A BIG CIGAR?
Yes.  If  it is like a  ...   we have trees here.  It  is like a very large tree, with a
flat middle.
YOU  MEAN THE TRUNKS LIKE A TREE TRUNKS
Yes.
NOT THE BRANCHES?
No. There are smaller crafts.
WHAT DO THEY LOOK LIKE?
They are light  and silvery and they are circular,  with a flat bottom  and a flat  top; wide 
around  the middle. Like cupping your hands.
IS THERE ANY DOME ON ITS
I  am getting  the impression  that  if you want a dome,  you can have a dome. I  am trying  to 
reach in for the knowledge of all of this. It seems that our powers of mind create the illusion of 
structures,  just like all peoples  on all planets.  For some reason,  those who were in control of 
creating  the illusion  of crafts chose these shapes.  Perhaps  they will have significance  in 
another  time.  But all of it is not that important.
WHAT MAKES THEM TRAVELS
Let me dissolve.  (pause)  It is power of mind,  again,  but it is not an activity of all our 
minds,  but  it is. All of this activity is put  to work by a few,  and yet because of our oneness, 
 we are all doing it, but I  am not thinking  about  the crafts or about  ...   thinking  about  
the plans of travel. But  there are others  that do, and I  am in full oneness with whatever  they 
bring  to us.

«

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

WHAT ARE YOU  THINKINGS
I am trying  to find out how the crafts move through what  is known as space.  It  ...   there is 
very little reference  I  can make. It is a space and time that will finally be glimpsed at one 
Earth at a much later date.
People  ...   one person,  scientist,  will say, will finally see that space and time are not 
rigidly held together.  People will praise him,  but  they will not see it, and he will go  ...   
There will be a few more who finally see that space and time are not held to a fixed line and that 
what  they see in their space is only one space  and one time,  but it is not all space and all 
time. Therefore,  what  they call all space and their  time, when  they look into  the sky, is an 
illusion.  But  they do not see but one kind of tiny space, as if  looking into a room,  and they 
just call that  the Earth.  Space and time will be difficult  to explain in words to the humans,  
because they lack imagination.  They lack the powers of mind. They do not have the training  to see 
the reality,  to know what space and time really is.
Until they do, then their space  travel will be a space  travel of illusions. We travel by mind, 
and because we understand space and time,  they mean absolutely nothing.  They are not coated (?) 
with stars.  There is no meaningful  conception,  no necessary  conception,  of time,  through 
travel.  Because  that  is pinpointing  the infinite into two words.  What we do is so far beyond  
the realm of ordinary  thought  that we would not be able to use words  to convey  any possibility  
of  our progress.  But someday,  the children will understand imagination,  and when they see the 
stars,  they will see all that  there is,  because  they will see the space.
The   concept  of space and time separates  us from  those that  we try to help,  and it takes a 
long time  to teach other peoples. And  yet  there is no time,  but all of it.
“A” focuses on this point in her experience,  getting on the ship to come to Earth. She repeatedly 
tells us that she feels sadness, for she will have to forget the truth of light and unity in order 
to come into the Earth through birth.


ALL RIGHT. WILL YOU  GO  INTO THE STRUCTURE NOW. FIND YOURSELF THERE. NOW, AS YOU  GET  TO  THE 
STRUCTURE, TELL ME ABOUT IT.
Well, I don't  go to the structure yet. I  go back to the teachers' room for a while.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

DO THEY KNOW THAT YOU'RE LEAVING?
Yes. They're standing,  singing,  when I  come in.
ARE YOU  SINGING TO THEM? WHY WOULD THEY BE STANDING  WHEN YOU  COME IN?
Because we will be separated.
ALL RIGHT. OUT OF RESPECT.  NOW WHAT GOES ON NOW, BETWEEN YOU AND THE TEACHERS?
I  turn to one,  and he places his hands on my shoulder,  and looks very deeply into my eyes. I  
turn to another one and he does the same.  I  am getting a great deal of strength and knowledge,  
but I  don't  know yet that  it is knowledge.  And when I  turn to the third,  he stares.
THE SAME WAY, INTO YOUR EYES.
Yes.
GO AHEAD.
It is very hard for me not to feel sad, but then all at once I sense it is all right, and I cry a 
tear and he cries one. I turn to leave.  (quiet crying)
DO  YOU  KNOW WHY YOU  HAVE TO  LEAVED
Yes.
OK.  VERY WELL. GO  AHEAD. ARE YOU  GOING TO THE DIAMOND—SHAPED BUILDING› TO THE HOUR—GLASS 
BUILDING?
Yes.
WHAT ABOUT THE OTHER FOUR? ARE THEY COMING WITH YOUR WITH DIFFERENT TEACHERS? OR  HOW  DO THEY 
WORKS
I do not know about them.
OK.
I go the long way around. WHY?
To  meditate again on the way. I do know that  this is a good thing. I am ready. I am going down 
the hill towards the hour-glass-shape. I am

68

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

standing  at  the very bottom,  looking up. I do not have the robes on now, I  have something  else 
on.
ARE THE OTHERS THERE YETi
They are coming within  my view.
OK.
They are here now.
GOOD. THEY ARE READY TO  GO TOO.
Yes.
ARE THEY DRESSED THE SAME WAY YOU ARE?
Yes.
ALL RIGHT. WHAT HAPPENS NEXTi
I do as the teachers did with me. I  turn to each one, put my hands on their shoulders  and look at 
them. And we exchange comfort  and we exchange sadness  and exchange love and knowledge  and 
understanding. It is a time  to feel our oneness.  (Pause) Now, we are walking  towards the 
structure.  We are going  up it like—I can't     it is called perhaps an elevator,  it is going 
straight  up.
GO  AHEAD. YOU  GET  TO  THE TOP. NOW, WFIAT HAPPENS.
There is a craft,  that  is  ...    it is round.
DO  YOU  GET  INTO THE CRAFT?
Yes. We all get in. For some reason I am thinking that this is a small craft, smaller than others 
that have left.
BUT  IT  IS BIG  ENOUGH FOR FIVE?
Yes.
“B” describes  this same scene:
B
ONCE YOU'RE INSIDE THE SHIP IN SPIRITUAL FORM, SPIRITUAL BODY—
Shiny.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

DESCRIBE THE INTERIOR FOR ME. FIRST OF ALL THE SHIP UP CLOSER. DID YOU TELL ME IT WAS ROUND?
There are places  to sit.
OK,  BUT ON  THE OUTSIDE, THE OUTSIDE APPEARANCE,  IS IT ROUND LIKE A BALLS
No. I—I—I don't see this one close. When we go in it is as though  ... it is as though  there is a 
place to walk, from the temple right inside so you don't have an overview of this one at this time. 
The  overview was before, from without. We walk within, from the temple directly into this.
YES.
There is a place to go in, not  a door that opens,  as ours do, but  ...   we walk up the door  ... 
  and our  ...   we're  ...   the sadness has been shed.
HOW   MANY PEOPLE IN THE  SHIP WITH YOU?
I  don't  know.  There're  ...
TEN?
No  ...   but—
A DOZEN OR—
No,  no. I  ...   Under  a dozen. I  don't  know how many.  Wait  a minute. There is one.
ARE YOU  READY TO  LEAVE.
Yes.
And so the little band leaves, and as OAHSPE  puts it:
Onward sped the ship of God, by the force of wills matured; and from its hallowed light displaying 
its purpose  before other Gods and men, in other ships cruising, on adventurous  paths in Jehovih's 
wide oceans of splendor.n
This sadness  at the prospect  of doing duty on Earth as “apples”  has been reported  by other 
investigators  I've talked with, and seems quite common among  those who under hypnosis  report  
lives on other planets.  It is certainly understandable. Volunteering  for service on Earth is a 
bit like volunteering  for service in the Marine Corps. The recruit  knows the experience  will be 
a rough one,  but he believes  that in the course of
17

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

performing his duties he will become a more mature person. The Marines build men: an Earth 
incarnation  builds Masters. As a space contact says through Yolanda:
I  see a very sad,  but joyous,  one.  She is homesick,  for she is far from her place. I  
understand  this.  I  am also far from my home,  in this ship. We do have deep understanding  for 
such longings.  Many of us volunteer  a whole time of life to these missions.  But you on Earth are 
so unfortunate,  because when you volunteer  you lose your memory of where you came from, for the 
most part.*°
“B” and “C” talk about the sadness in their own way:

The child here will feel sorrow, for she will glimpse this and then lose it, and she will be pushed 
to an environment  that will confuse her, and yet if she still wills, if she can still but 
remember, even her dreams, even the things she saw, that she will see, in the shadows of night, 
then in time she will remember.
NOW, TELL ME EVERYTHING  THAT YOU CAN ABOUT THIS PARTICULAR EVENT. VERY QUICKLY,  NOW, VERY 
CRISPLY. DON'T ANALYZE  IT.
There are people there, but I cannot differentiate  them. We are meditating,  no words are spoken. 
We are just there, seems like. I am sad.
ALL RIGHT. THE MEDITATION IS IN  ANTICIPATION OF WFIAT EVENT› WHAT MAY HAPPENS
Us leaving the planet.
AND YOU ARE SAD AT THIS PROSPECT ALSO.
In  a way, yes.
ALL RIGHT, YOU ARE ANTICIPATING  LEAVING THE PLANET, AND THE OTHER PEOPLE ARE TOO.
Yes.
ALL RIGHT. CAN YOU DESCRIBE THE  OTHER PEOPLE?
No physical features. All I know is that they understand a little bit more than I and that I am 
more sad. I am sad because it is such a struggle. A

I7I

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

long, long struggle. How sad that it has to be that way. The others know that they must leave. And 
they take some comfort  ...  I can't  ...
ALL RIGHT. TELL ME SOME MORE ABOUT THE STRUGGLE. WFIAT TYPE STRUGGLE?
The struggle of the mind,  knowing  all that we know.  But we lose that, when we leave.  We leave 
and we go back through  ...   back through  the darkness  again,  and struggle  ...   struggle  to 
the peace. I  feel very light, right now.  I am thinking,  of all of this  ...
B
VERY WELL. I'D LIKE YOU TO  TURN BACK TO  THE PRESENT NOW, ALTOGETHER,  IN ALL DIMENSIONS. IS THERE 
A SPECIFIC REASON FOR YOU TO COME BACK AS NOWT WHAT'S GOING TO BE YOUR MAIN PURPOSE? WHAT IS YOUR 
ASSIGNMENTS
The blind closes.
WHAT DO YOU MEAN BY THATi
When I come back here, the slate is wiped clean. It's hard to see. (Pause) There is much sadness 
here.

This planet ...
YES, BUT  NOT   ON  THE  SPIRITUAL DIMENSION?  YOU  JUST MEAN ON  THE PLANET ITSELF?
I just see it.
YES. AND THAT'S WHY YOU'RE HERE? WHY YOU WERE SENT HERE?
It will be forgotten. We will forget.
WHYi WHY IS IT NECESSARY TO  FORGET›
It's gone. (whispering)  It's gone.
THE MEMORY OF THE PAST ON THAT PLANET IS GONE?
Off, off—it's gone. There is white slate. It's new—forgotten.


I7*

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

When the Otherworlder's spaceship arrives here with our group, it does not drop them onto the 
Earth's surface,  but instead enters the finer or spiritual planes of our Earth and allows its 
passengers  to enter the cycle of reincarnation  on our planet. George Hunt Williamson says:
If  these Wanderers  didn't  arrive here by spaceship,  how did they get here? They volunteered  to 
come to Earth and go through  the reincarnational cycle here. In other words,  they were  born 
here! They have birth certificates,  they went  to school,  had the childhood diseases, drank soda 
pop at the corner drug store and made eyes at each other in school,  or threw “spit balls” at  the 
teacher.  In brief,  they were exactly the same as all the other people on Earth,  except  for one 
thing:  they didn't  belong here! They occupy physical vehicles and are born to
parents of their own choice who they feel will best give them the advantages and training  they 
need to fulfill their missions on Earth,Il
And an entity known as Sut-ko gives this information:
From time immemorial,  teachers of Light came  to planet Earth, incarnating  from other planets,  
from other systems,  even from other galaxies,  and from  the realms known  to you as the 
nonphysical  or supernal realms of existence;  and great companies  of Light  came into 
incarnation,  carrying with them  the banner of Truth and Love and Light. In all the simplicity of 
these teachings,  and in all dedication  to  the One  Creator and His Laws,  these bands of Lighted 
Ones came  down into incarnation  and to the darkness  and the degradation  which they ofttimes 
found,  and incarcerated  themselves  in flesh,  not for their own experiencing—though much they 
did experience—but with a basic motive of service to the One  Creator and His Creations,  a motive 
of Love and Compassion.
At each time when the Great Ones, whom you speak of as Avatars, came,  (there also) came many 
lesser teachers,  many lighted souls,  great in compassion  and service.  Often their tasks seemed 
small, yet they formed a chain,  a pattern of strength,  and each upheld the others; and as each 
company whom we have termed “the goodly companies”  went forth,  they went  in groups of souls who 
had worked and known each other from lifetime  to lifetime.  These souls are incarnate once more 
upon planet Earth in many areas. These souls work for the upliftment of the planet and for the 
dawning  of the Age of Reason at  the end of this cycle upon the planet.  These souls, who have 
come into incarnation,  have formed what  is known  as the Lightlines  and the Light

I73

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Centers  throughout  the planet.  Some there are who have gone forth on lonely ways, and have  been 
cut off from their fellows and have worked alone in the materialistic  world. They have sought  to 
bring that understanding  which is theirs,  a glimmer of truth which they have remembered,  
wherever  they have found themselves,  and in whatever capacity  they have labored. Now, many of 
these who have worked alone join with the others in order  that strength  may be given  to all,  
that  the pattern or web of Light, which is now woven around the planet may be

vitalized  to its highest  cap, acity
, ,12
Here are “A,” “B,” and “C”   describing  their entry into the spiritual  plane:
A
VERY WELL. ARE YOU  READY TO  DEPARTS
Yes.
WILL YOU DEPART, AND FIND YOURSELF IN THE NEXT PLANE OR DIMENSIONS  ARE YOU NOW IN THE SPIRITUAL 
DIMENSION  OF EARTH?
I am not sure yet where I am.  I am not on Earth.
ARE YOU STILL IN THE SHIP?
No.
HOW DO YOU GET OUT OF ITS
Well, mind. It was time.
WAS THE SHIP ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY FOR YOU TO MAKE THE TRIP FROM YOUR PLANET TO THE EARTH'S 
SPIRITUAL DIMENSION?
In one way yes,  and in many other ways,  no. I cannot  explain now,  but that it is necessary  to 
come in something  like a craft  to make  that transition.  Even though everything  is one, and 
that  the vibrations  are infinite,  and that we knew of all things  that were going on on Earth, 
we could not do our task while still on our planet.  That would  be a confusion of our own 
development  and Earth's development  and our task. It was necessary  for us to leave our 
vibrational  level and that plane entirely,  and to go through what  is called reincarnation. We 
needed to learn as a soul the planes of the spirit,  and all that Earthlings go through,  for we do 
not go through  these things any more.

174

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

VERY WELL. IS THERE ANYTHING  MORE NOW?
No.
NOW, HOW DO  YOU APPROACH EARTH? DO  YOU  JUST COME DOWN AND DO YOU LAND OR, WHAT HAPPENS WHEN YOU  
GET HEREi
No. We don't land. You can't do that.
WILL YOU  DESCRIBE YOUR APPROACH, AND  WHAT YOU DO  THEREAFTER?
You simply leave the  space ship.
DO YOU LEAVE THE SPACE SHIP UP IN THE AIR?
There is no longer any function. The ...  were turn to ...  we drop that body, we drop ...  we 
simply leave. We ...  are ...
YOU SAID YOU LEAVE THE SHIPS
Yes.
AND YOU ARE ON EARTH, THEN?
Mnn  ...  not on Earth. We are near, we are around, we are ...
ARE YOU IN A SPIRITUAL REALM, SPIRITUAL  LEYELi
Yes ...
NOT ON EARTH AT THIS TIME?
No.
OK.  NOW   WHAT IS GOING TO TAKE PLACE AT THIS
LEVEL?
I know I must go through a thing called birth, but I don't know how.
IS THERE ANY INSTRUCTION  FOR YOU? ARE THERE NEW TEACHERS THERE FOR YOUR
I find helpers.
B
YOU    CAME TO  OUR  PLANET. NOW, WILL YOU  TELL ME ABOUT THE APPROACH TO  OUR  PLANET. HOW  YOU


I7i

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

CAME TO  BE HERE. DOES THE SHIP COME DOWN AND LAND RIGHT ON THE PLANETS
Mmnn, no. We're in the spirit.
YES. TELL ME WHAT HAPPENED. HOW  DID  YOU  GET  OUT OF THE SHIP?
We're just not  needed  in the ship any more.
AND WHAT HAPPENS TO  THE  SHIP?
I  don't  know.
DO  YOU, DOES THE DOOR, DOES IT STOP AND—
We are,  there is no need for doors at  this stage.
SO  YOU  JUST DEMATERIALIZE FROM THE SHIP. DO  YOU COME DIRECTLY TO  EARTH THEN?
No.
WHAT HAPPENS? DO  YOU  STOP IN THE HIGHER, SPIRITUAL DIMENSION  FORA WHILE?
There is waiting.  Watching.
CAN YOU MAKE ANY CONNECTION WITH ANYONE THAT YOU KNEW THEN AND ANYONE YOU KNOW NOWT
(Pause)  I  can only tell by  ...   I  don't  see people  ...   feel presences—
YOU  FOUND SOMEBODY, DIDN'T YOU›
On  the spirit  plane.


Mother and father.  Mother.
BEAUTIFUL.
Spirit—dear  soul. Dear soul.
SHE CAME TO EARTH BEFORE YOU  DID. YOU WAITED FOR HER DIDN'T YOU? AND YOUR FATHER. THEREFORE, THEY 
KNEW EACH OTHER TOO, DIDN'T THEY?
It  was planned.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

IT WAS PLANNED THAT THEY WOULD COME TO BE YOUR PARENTS, IS THIS CORRECTS
I chose them.
OK.
They chose me too.
c
VERY WELL. I WANT YOU TO  GO BACK TO  THE SPIRITUAL PLANE, FROM THE OTHER PLANET, THERE BY ITSELF 
IN ITS ENTIRETY. WHO LEAVES FIRST, YOU OR YOUR MATES
My mate.
AND YOU WAIT A WHILE?
I'm looking for the right people.
I was waiting for the correct challenge.
DID YOU MAKE THE DECISION  ON YOUR OWN?
Completely.
A
I WANT YOU  TO  FIND WHO SELECTED YOUR MOTHER AND FATHER, AND WHY. WHY THIS PARTICULAR TIME, WHY 
THIS PARTICULAR LOCATION.  FIRST OF ALL, THE PARENTS. DID YOU SELECT THOSE TWO PEOPLE BY YOURSELF, 
OR DID YOU HAVE HELP FROM YOUR HELPER?
It seems to have been my choice.
So our three Otherworlders  come to Earth, having chosen  their parents and gone through birth. It 
is apparently  the plan  that  “apples”  come to Earth in groups who,  if they can recognize each 
other and remember  their mission, will then be able to help each other and work together in 
harmony.  It was quite amazing  to me as I  gathered  the second and third of these regressions to 
find the same report  of mutual acquaintance  in the previous  life. It is a story of at least five 
people, so I  must fill you in on the other two. In addition  to the three subjects,  there is a 
man,  named here “D,” and a man named here “E.” Perhaps  the most  amazing detail of these mutually 
agreeing reports was the fact  that  “A,” who had never known  “E,” named him as an acquaintance,  
a member of her family on Otherworld.  “E”  is now dead,  and

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

there is no possible way she could ever have known him. She had, however, heard his name mentioned  
by “C.” And from this slight knowledge she tentatively identified  him in her regression.
A
LET'S LOOK AT THIS PLACE THAT YOU ARE LEAVING.
Let me come back down to the child. (Pause)
CAN  YOU  SEE THE  ONES WHO  WILL BE GOINGS CAN YOU TELL ME NOW  IF THERE ARE ANY MORE THAT YOU 
WILL KNOW UPON EARTH?
There is a male type standing beside me. He is happy with me. We are watching ...  we are looking 
at the ships. They have not started to load the people, our brothers and sisters, inside yet. We 
...  I know him, he is my mate for a short time. I do not know him. I do not get to see him on 
Earth. And yet he will ...  his presence will be everywhere  ...  he will be next to me when I have 
a new mate. He is working  ...  he will be working on a different level. Therefore I do not get to 
see him. And yet he will direct  ...  help watch over me and my mate.
IS THERE ANYONE ELSE THERE THAT YOU MEET ON EARTH?
I am trying to place the names ...  the Earth names of “D” and “E.” I am trying to see where they 
come from, if they are from my planet or from someplace else. (Pause)  “D” is from my planet,  
though I do not know him. (Pause)
No.   “D’   is not from my planet.  He  will be a communicator  between his peoples  and all the 
peoples who are joining in this endeavor.  He  will be most necessary,  most comforting  to me on 
Earth. We will all be there.
He  is from someplace else.  I  do not know. And yet he will know about me. He  will know about all 
of those who show him  ...   who look into his eyes  ...   he will be able to recognize  ...   he 
will be like the watershed, that many of us will pass over,  and go on to where we will be of most 
use. I  see “C.” She is grown now.  She is very close to me. I  ...   for some reason I  feel that 
I  should be much older  ...   and yet age has been suspended.
DO YOU SEE ANYONE ELSEi
Not here on the platform.

178

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

DO ANY OTHERS TRAIN WITH YOU  FOR THE SAME PURPOSES
I do not see others doing what the teachers and I are doing. But there are others. There are others 
that will help me. We will help each other in bringing this knowledge out.
DESCRIBE THE OTHERS.
(long pause)  ... I am sorry for the delay. I was dissolved.  I am trying to see the others. The 
only way to do it while I am still in the cave is to dissolve.  (long pause)  ...  I do not see 
them yet.
IT IS VERY EASY FOR YOU TO  SEE ONE OF THEM.
(Pause)  ...  The man beside me, who came in with me, I am not sure whether  he is going to be 
there, on Earth with me, for, as I am told, people cannot see invisible things, or they only see 
things that they want to see. I am trying to ...  but it's hard. I think ...  to go back and forth
. he will be with me, and because I am still here on this planet and not on Earth, I cannot  talk 
as if I'm  on Earth. I know general things about Earth, for Earth is just one stage, and all 
peoples go through that stage, and it is an understanding. So therefore I know because of 
meditations I may or I may not see this person,  but he is in reality always with me. I am not sure 
now of other peoples  ...  I know I will have ...  I know we will have a group on this planet,  but 
that will come later, much later. I am, as far as age go on this planet, which is simply an 
appearance,  I am a child. These friends, I have the impression, will come later. Perhaps they are 
being trained like I. They do not know, either. But I am very split because I have the 
understanding of the universe,  and yet I am dumb and unable to speak. I ...  speaking is not 
necessary here. But I accept all that the teachers give me here, because they are the reality and I 
am theirs.
LET'S MOVE FROM THE TIME YOU ARE IN NOW, FORWARD APPROXIMATELY ONE—TENTH  OF YOUR EXPERIENCE  ON 
THAT PLANET. YOU WILL MOYE FORWARD AT THE COUNT OF THREE, I WILL SNAP MY FINGERS, AND YOU WILL BE 
ABLE TO SEE. ONE, TWO, THREE, (snap). DESCRIBE YOUR EXPERIENCE.
I am with other people now. We are all sitting down. We are laughing. There seem to be five of us 
plus two teachers.


179

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

DO YOU RECOGNIZE ANY OF THEM?
I recognize vibrations.
DO  YOU  KNOW ANY OF THEM THAT ARE HERE ON  THE EARTH-LIFE WITH YOUR
Yes.
WHO ARE THEY?
“B”  and “C.” They are on each side of me. We seem  to have finished eating.
IS THERE ANYONE ELSE THAT YOU RECOGNIZE?
There's  two male types,  but I  don't make out  their impressions  or vibrations yet.
IS THIS GROUP SIMILAR TO  THE  GROUP THAT COMES TO
YOUR PLACE, TO  THE CAVE, TO  MEDITATE?
It  doesn't  seem  to be  ...   It  is hard for me to say.  There are other  groups
.  Seems there are five of  us. But it's hard for me to say if  there are not other  groups on our 
planet  like us.  It  is hard to think of others  than  us.
THERE IS NO STRUGGLE ON YOUR PLANET›
No. It is a struggle within yourself, of your own knowledge  of the task that is before us.
WELL, GO  AHEAD AND  TELL ME MORE ABOUT THE STRUGGLE,  ABOUT THE TASK, HOW  YOU  LEAVE, AND WHERE 
YOU  PLAN TO  GO?
be   must go there without our memories—people who have forgotten everything and will have to grow 
again. But these five people will go together and will know of each other.
B
WHERE ARE YOU  GOING? DO  YOU GO  TO A DIFFERENT PLANET›
Uh hum.
WHICH PLANET.
We come to Earth.

I8o

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

WHICH OTHER PLANETS WOULD YOU HAVE HAD THE OPTION OF GOING TOP WERE THERE MANY OTHER PLANETS YOU  
COULD HAVE GONE TO› OR OTHER ENTITIES  COME FROMi HOW MANY PLANETS ARE INVOLVED IN THIS SYSTEM?
Sand. Sand. As many. We ...  (pause)  ...  we are needed here.
NOW, BY SAYING SAND, ARF YOU SAYING LIKE GRAINS OF LAND?
As many  as sand.
AS MANY PLANETS AS THERE ARE GRAINS OF LAND. SO IT'S JUST INFINITE THEN.
YOU WERE ALL TOGETHER. ALL RIGHT. THE PERSON YOU KNOWAS  “D.” IS HE  IN  YOUR PAST›
He was one with us.
WAS HE ON THE SHIP?
N ...  I don't know. He was one with  us in the temple.
HE WAS IN THE TEMPLE?
In ...  that—family. And I, I believe in the temple.
WAS HE  THE  INSTRUCTOR YOU WERE TALKING ABOUTi
THE OLDER TEACHER? I   ..
NOW DON'T LET ME LEAD YOU. YOU BE SURE. DON'T SAY SO BECAUSE I SUGGEST IT. YOU CAN EASILY SAY HE'S 
NOT.
I  know it.  ...   I  think so. I  think the love was the same.
WHO  WAS ONE  OF HIS ASSISTANTS,  THAT YOU MAY KNOWN
I  believe  “C”   ...   was a handmaiden.  I  believe  behind the altar the day that we all were 
there.
THE   PERSON WE KNOW AS “A”?
I think “A”  ...   had to do with the place that we ate. The place that we gathered. I believe ...  
that she served us.

z8I

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS



WAS YOUR NEXT SHALL WE SAY REINCARNATION  ON EARTH?
Yes.
As “c”?
Yes.
WHO WAS YOUR MATE? “D.”
I WOULD LIKE FOR YOU  TO  REMAIN ON  THAT PLANE FOR A MOMENT. DIVIDE PART OF  YOUR ATTENTION BACK 
ON THE PLANET THAT YOU WERE ON  BEFORE YOU  CAME HERE, PART OF  YOUR ATTENTION TO  WHERE YOU  ARE 
RIGHT NOW, PART TO  THE  PLANE TO  WHICH YOU WILL GO.  “D”  HAS BEEN WITH YOU  ON  THE SPIRITUAL 
PLANE AND  ON  THE  OTHER PLANET.  HE  WAS YOUR MATE. IS THAT CORRECTS
Yes.
OK.   LOOK AT OTHER ENTITIES, NOW. RELATE PEOPLE YOU  KNOW NOW BACK ON  THE  SPIRITUAL PLANE OR  
ANY OTHER PLACE YOU  HAVE EVER BEEN. DO  YOU  FIND OTHERSi
A whole lot of them, it seems like. An awful lot of people I know. “E”—he’s dead. He was a brother. 
“B”  ...   “A”—”A,”  wait. “A” was my mother in the body.
“J” was a brother  ...
“B”?
“B” I know. She was my sister.
WFIERE?
In the clan.
A  sixth person,  “J,” was mentioned  by two,  but  not  by the third, as being part of the clan 
and of this mission.  It is possible  that he was sent  to take the place of “E,” after his death,  
though  this is never said by any of the subjects.

IU

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Now, this “mission”  which has been talked about: what  is it? Williamson describes  it thusly:
So there are several million people in the world that have nothing  to do with this world as far as 
learning  anything  from it  that  they haven't already acquired.  They either passed through many 
lives on the Earth planet  itself,  or they learned the same lesson on another world similar to our 
Earth. At  any rate,  they are far ahead of  the average Earth man or woman.  Why  do they come 
back?  The answer  is, because  they want  to help; they feel that  there is something  far more 
beautiful  for man on Earth to attain.*i
And OAHSPE echoes this:
To  serve others,  is to do good unto others;  to help them; to teach them; to give them joy and 
comfort.  This is the service of Jehovih.        But
good works alone are not sufficient  to attain the highest  grades,  for they require knowledge  
and the capacity  to unfold others.  To  accomplish which,  those of the higher grades shall oft 
return to the lower and learn to lift them  up. For this is that which calleth the ethereans  in 
the times of resurrections. Wherein  the righteous,  who are yet mortal,  begin at once lifting up 
their fellows.  Which labor is to the spirit  as exercise is to the mortal  body,  that which 
giveth strength.  Judge then thyself,  O  man
of the earth, as to the place thy spirit will rise in the time of thy death,Id
And here are “C”   and “B”  talking about  the mission:


YOU  DECIDED TO COME BACK TO  THE EARTH, THEN. FOR WHAT REASON?
Two reasons.  I  knew that I  wanted to help this planet.  It is in a bad way. And a lot of people 
that are here are calling out,  they want help very badly,  and you can't help unless you are in 
the body here. It's very intense here. There's no way to get into the  ...   enough  to help, 
without infringing  on free will,  unless you're in the body.  There are no easy solutions here.
AND   THE   OTHER RFASON FOR COMING BACK?
It was my own criticism  of myself that I  did not know how to give without  receiving.  I  felt  
that I  needed an experience  that would express what I  knew without  expecting  a return.

183

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS


B
DO YOUHAVE SOMETHING ELSE TO  LEARN, OR SOMETHING  TO TEACHi SOMETHING TO BRING FORTH IN YOUR LIFE?
Teaching is learning. That is one. They're  both one.
NOW  ARE YOU  FULFILLING YOUR ASSIGNMENT IN SOME WAY NOW?
About to. All the pieces are ready. Not quite ready. Gathering together. They are gathering. This 
is a gathering time. The  things that I must work with are not all gathered yet but are coming.
NOW, WHAT IS THE  NEXT DEVELOPMENT,  WHEN WILL THIS PLAN BE PUT INTO EFFECTS
A meeting. One  piece, one piece—is a meeting, soon. Ah ...  only one piece. Other pieces, 
gradually, will come. Four years to do it.
WHERE WILL THE  MEETING TAKE PLACE?
I don't know. That's only one piece of it ...  but that will bring ... threads together, some of 
them.
WHAT WILL BE THE RESULT OF THE MEETING, THE FINAL OUTCOME?
More—more  threads  joining. To  complete the     to complete  ...  um, again,  magnetism,  
electric, it has to do with the same threads,  those threads,  joining.
And so now is the time when the threads are beginning to come together, not only for this little 
band of “apples”  but for so many others:
. we have sought slowly to bring to you information  relevant  to the times in which you now find 
yourselves. We have sought through many of our channels,  our peoples walking the surface of your 
planet, to present through all avenues open to us, whether  these be that which you term fiction or 
fact, data or imagination, something of the change  which is about to take place.
It is indeed a strange story. Yet it will ring true to the many who read this who themselves  have 
a feeling that they were put here on Earth to help . . somehow, some way, some day. The  
Confederation  would say: meditate, and your purpose will unfold, from within.

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Oursubject,  “A,” far more than the other  two,  was focused during her regression  sessions  on 
the purpose of her coming here,  and the precise reasons for which she had chosen  this time in 
which to journey here. To close this chapter, I  let a meditative Wanderer  speak about  her 
mission on Earth:


CAN  YOU  TELL ME ANYTHING MORE ABOUT “D,” WHY HE CAME, OR  ...
Yes, he comes before I do.
WHY? DO YOU KNOW WHY HE DOES THISi
He  will  ...   it will be necessary  for him to be there at  the so-called dawning  of our 
appearance.  This  ...   He  will need the time also  before any of us arrive  to make his own 
advancements  and to be ready for us. He  will also know and convey information  about  the peoples 
 on Earth. He  will understand  once again,  as we all will, of the delicateness  of free will,  
and the ways to help the people  rather in a sneaky way.
It is a beautiful  thing,  if I may relate what I  am thinking about  here on the platform,  it is 
a beautiful  thing that  all these peoples  are coming to this one planet.  And I sincerely pray, 
as I  do each day,  that  the people will realize  the fantastic  thing  that  the infinite Creator 
is allowing.  We feel very blessed in our hearts.
DO YOU KNOW WHY YOU GO TO EARTH AT THIS TIME? IS THIS A SPECIFIC TIME FOR EARTH?
All I can say  ...   it is a feeling that we all have. Feelings  and vibrations from everything  
and everywhere.  We receive also. It is a feeling like giving birth. It is time for Earth  to be 
born.  She has gone through many times of labor,  many hard stages of development,  but giving 
birth  ... hopefully,  the planet will live. But if it is the will of the infinite Creator, the 
Earth may not. We do because it is. No   one guesses at the infinite Creator.  But we develop; we 
have our task, and we do this because  it is our task. We need to pass  tests. We need to achieve 
oneness,  dissolution in the infinite Creator, just  as all peoples.  We come to help give birth to 
the Earth.  But we cannot  give it life. That is the free will that is the communication  between  
the Creator and all of the Earth. Not  just  in the voices of the people,  it is in invisible  and 
the unheard of,  the tiny, tiny places inside of each person and each thing  that communicates  to

s\

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

the infinite Creator its will. And we can only help each of those tiny places realize its kingdom  
and its glory. And, if it hears,  then so be it. It is a hard thing.  It is a painful  thing,  for 
I  feel its birth.  I  feel  that  the Earth is inside of me. And I worry because I  have no real 
control over the life and death of this child. This is why I'm sad.  I'm sad because we are all 
one,  and it is hard to stand back and not know whether your child is going  to live or die. And 
although  its death will be its birth,  I know what  that  illusion,  death,  can do when  the mind 
is weak.  I  pray, as we all do, for the peoples  on Earth to hear, even if it's with their inner 
ear,  we pray for each soul to awaken,  and we stand ready for that split second when someone might 
 turn around and see. That  is why we are here, nothing more and nothing less.  We are here as 
Gods.  But we are Gods that grovel,  and know  the blessing  and the love that we give and receive  
from  those who step on us. Because we were them also.  It only takes time,  that  illusion,  time, 
 to stand up and be gods to someone else.
We pray for the Earth, that she will be born. Soon, there will be many things: confusion. At the 
time, there will be much busy-ness, as it is called. At that time there will be false witness and 
false rumors, and those who want to play mischief with this most important time. I see all of this 
standing on the platform. I see this with my mate. It is pouring through me, which is why I am able 
to talk of it. For soon this knowledge will be closed. For those of us who still know the reality 
there will be no miracles. Miracles are for the unfaithful.  Miracles are tricks.
.  tape ends, some material lost while another  tape loaded in the recorder.
.  and the ship just leaves.
AS IT  LEAVES, I WISH YOU  WOULD TAKE A LOOK BACK NOW AT THE  PLANE THAT YOU HAVE JUST LEFT. CAN 
YOU LOOK AT THIS FOR ME IN THE SPIRITUAL OR IN THE PHYSICAL REALM AND GIVE ME ANY KIND OF 
DESCRIPTION?  IS IT IN THE SAME DIMENSION AS EARTH?
It is ...   (pause) It is hard. It is at least one vibrational level above Earth. Earth will, if it 
survives, it will go through a great change and will live through another  birth. But that is where 
we are, because we are able to have such powers of mind that we can do these things with other 
planets in total harmony. This is something Earth will have to learn in its next phase.

z86

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

It will be, as I  remember  from my past knowledge  ...   a beautiful  time. But it is still one 
level behind my level, for soon we will go through a birth also. But it is not such a hard one.
THEN IN CHANGING FROM ONE VIBRATIONAL DIMENSION TO  ANOTHER,  IT IS SIMPLY A MATTER OF ATTUNEMENT,  
THEN?
Yes. The one that I kept looking back to from that? He is on a different vibrational level.
EVEN THOUGH YOU ARE IN THE SAME DIMENSION?
Yes. My teachers are at a higher vibrational level.
AND THIS IS WHY THEY HAVE A DIFFERENT GLOW ABOUT
THEM?
Yes.
NOW, CAN YOU REACH THAT LEVELS
Nowt
EVER.
Yes.
DO YOU EXPECT TO  ATTAIN THAT LEVEL AT SOME TIME ON THE EARTH PLANE?
I can obtain it if I stay on the Earth  plane, according to my own development and on my awareness 
of who I am. If this is what is asked of me, then I will do this. But I may not stay here on the 
Earth. It is up to the infinite Creator. To  my innermost soul. If my infinite Creator  ... these 
things are not set, and no one knows the infinite Creator.
ON THE EARTH PLANE, THERE WILL BE AN ENTITY KNOWN AS JESUS CHRIST.
Yes.
IS HE FROM A SIMILAR VIBRATIONAL LEVEL AS THE PEOPLE YOU HAVE BEEN TALKING ABOUT?
Yes.
THEN EARTH BEINGS, WHEN THEY REACH THAT LEVEL, CAN ALSO ATTAIN THIS LEVEL OF VIBRATION?

CHAPTER  EIGHT:  THE  WANDERERS

Oh, yes. Oh, yes.
NOW, CAN THEY DO  IT DIRECTLY FROM THE PHYSICAL PLANE,  OR  WOULD THEY HAVE TO  LEAVE THE  PHYSICAL 
PLANE AND  THEN COME BACK?
It is most possible to do it while on this plane. But it takes what I have been talking about—the 
dissolution of time and space. It is a mental process that is beyond everything  that is known 
here. If he can achieve that, if he can achieve  being able to dissolve completely,  he will be of 
much higher vibrational level, and whether his task is to stay here and be an illumined one or to 
go on any other of the infinite levels where people exist, that is up to the infinite Creator.
OK.   DO   YOU   WANT TO  POINT OUT  ANYTHING  ELSE, NOW, FROM THIS PARTICULAR  POINT›
It is  ...   it is hard to explain,  except  that at  this level,  many planets  ...   it is like 
the make or break level.  It is a most  unstable situation  because there is the equality  and the 
battle  between  the illusion of bad and good. It is not  ...   it is erroneous  to call it evil,  
that is why I say illusion. It is simply the remembrance  in people of their earlier life, earlier 
vibrational plane,  that is carried over, inherited,  in the Earth itself.
Which comes  up on the other side of the higher vibrational  that  is most evident  there also. It 
is a ...   two,  like magnets,  in each particle,  in each person,  in each molecule,  that keeps  
them from  becoming steadied  and ready and quiet for birth. There are old  ...   if I  may call 
them  that, old souls  that only remember  their more base vibrational  level,  and they add to the 
struggle.  It is only after this level that  things will be much easier.
Two postscripts  to this chapter: first, it may have occurred  to you to wonder why we didn't have 
all five of the subjects' regressions in this discussion.
Unfortunately, neither “D” nor “J” have,  up until this time, been hypnotizable.
Secondly, I would like to give credit to Mr. Lawrence Allison, an excellent hypnotist who has spent 
many patient hours with me working on these cases.



CHAPTER  NINE

DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,  AND  OTHER  BAD S   UFF
A  comprehensive  study of far-out  ufology would not  be complete without the inclusion  of the 
doomsday  prophecies.  A  substantial  portion of alleged UFO    messages deal with coming drastic 
Earth changes,  along  the lines of the Edgar Cayce predictions.  Included in the list of disasters 
 are polar shifts, earthquakes,  instantaneous  and mass kundalini experiences,  divine revelation, 
 total planetary  transformation, and other items which should rival Saturday  afternoon  football 
for generating  general  interest.
What condenses  out of all this prophesied mayhem is a story of cycles.  A good man to start  
telling this story is one of the contactees  of the fifties, George Van Tassel.  He  reported 
numerous  contacts with extraterrestrials including  a guided tour of a saucer of the type 
photographed  by another early contactee,  George Adamski.
Van  Tassel claimed  telepathic  contact  with the UFOnauts both at a distance and in person.  By 
the latter I  mean  that he claimed  that  the very “normal” looking space man who accompanied  him 
on the space ship would answer his questions  before he could verbalize  them.  George published 
information he had received from the Great Pyramid  at Giza to a time machine he was building  as a 
result  of instructions  from the space people.  This time machine,  which he called  an 
integratron,  still sits in the Mojave Desert  near Van Tassel's small airport  at Giant Rock, 
California.  He  claims that  the reason it won't work is that  the space people have never come 
back and calibrated it for him.
Needless  to say, Van Tassel was never  taken seriously  by the bulk of the scientific community.  
I  spent  a week at Giant Rock 1n ip6q getting  to know George and doing a little more detective 
work. Although  I have no way of vouching  for the validity of his claims,  I can say that he 
displayed the characteristics of the people who were involved  in my telepathic experiments,  and 
was able to display the same type of seemingly  telepathic response with which I  had become quite 
familiar in that connection.
At any rate he is one of the classic contactees and some of his material fits nicely into my theory 
of ufology.
O  mortals cast in density of form, I center the Light to guide your way. My Light is not seen  by 
those who observe only the density of figure.

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


Neither can I  violate the Laws I  have made in the Wisdom of My eternal ways. I  cannot  but stay 
at rest with you,  hoping  that  the best will reach for Me,   that I  may bring your perception  
into the Light.
Man closes doors,  man hides himself.  He  binds himself to possessions of dust,  not realizing  
all is lost  to him and lost  to Me.  For only by the progression  of thee do I progress. My   
parts are scattered  throughout  My boundless  Being.  I move in many ways to fashion My  
completeness.
Each part  shall find the resurrection  in Me,  though  the time is recorded in the records lost in 
space. My  eternity  is only complete in the patience of Myself in thee.
And so I  wait within,  with the knowing  that My   beginnings  never end.
O  man,  in the everchanging  pattern of My  thoughts  I  bring My creatures  into being. In seeing 
 motion all about,  never doubt  that I  am there.  For I  am motion,  change,  and time, so that 
My  rhyme of repetition  may cycle all My  parts.
Your eyes reach out to see the stars,  not realizing each has stars within. Though sin may 
barricade your way to Me,  change will be your sword to rend the veil and I shall hail you in your 
victory over self.
Though My  time is naught  to Me,   time to you is meant  to be a gauge to register progression  in 
My  ways.
Motion is the Me in thee, O  man, to manifest a change, so that in time you may escape the rhyme of 
rebirth repetitions and be timelessly the peaceful thought of Me—eterna11y,I


There are twelve densities  in the system we occupy. Each of these is divided into twelve major 
cycles.  Each major cycle is divided into  twelve minor cycles.  When  a solar system  moves out of 
one density into another,  it is called a master cycle. The solar system  that we are in is  now in 
the arc between  the Third and Fourth densities.  For the planet Earth and this solar system,  this 
is the time of times. The Earth is culminating  a minor cycle,  a major cycle,  and a master cycle 
all at the same  time. This will bring about  a rebalancing  of the planet  on new poles.  When  
this occurs,  the great earthquake  written of in Revelations will take place.°


ISO

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


George is saying that due to the rotation of our galaxy, or some more complex relative motion  
through space, our planetary system is making a cyclical transition which will result in changes in 
the basic atomic structure of our physical environment,  including our physical  bodies.
Another source says:
. our understanding of time relates to magnetic cycles. Perhaps we have imperfectly expressed 
ourselves on this score in that we cannot seem to convey to you the relationship  between cyclic 
time—magnetic cycles and your understanding of time.i
OAHSPE speaks of the termination  of the previous cycle:
So Jehovih said: Now will I prune the earth and her heaven. Behold  the division of Wagga shall be 
hewn off and cast beneath  the waters of the ocean. Her heaven shall be no longer tenable by the 
spirits of destruction,  for I will rend the foundation  thereof and scatter them in the winds of 
heaven.
Go ye, therefore, down to the earth and provide nets and vanchas for receiving the spirits of 
darkness, and for receiving the spirits of mortals who shall perish in the waters. And provide ye a 
place in my exalted heavens suitable for them; and ye shall wall them about in heaven  that they 
cannot escape,  but that they may be weaned from evil.4
My etherean ships of fire shall surround Wagga on every side. And I will cut loose the foundations 
of the earth, at the borders of the ocean and the mountains of Gan, nor shall any prop or 
corner-stone stay My hand. And I will send rains and winds and thundering;  and the waters of the 
great deep shall come upon the lands, and the great cities shall go down and be swallowed in the 
sea.i
Here is the Hatonn source on the same subject; except that he is speaking of the end of the prcicnr 
cycle.
There are many vibrations within  this creation. It has been written  in your Holy works that “in 
my Father's  house, there are many mansions.” This was a statement of these conditions. The  
mansion,  or vibration, in which an entity finds himself is a result of his desire. If there is a 
separation, or choice, to be made,  then it is up to each entity to select, according to his 
desire.


III

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


For that reason, we visit your planet at this time, to attempt to help those who could wish to make 
their choice. There are many who have chosen already, even  though  they are not aware of it.
There will be an experience in this illusion, in the not-too-distant future, which will be alarming 
to some of the people of this planet. We are attempting  to provide an understanding of the truth 
of this experience prior to its occurrence.  Our  service is to aid those who wish to choose a 
different mansion.
If an entity has chosen  a particular  mansion,  then he will receive it. It is not a good or a bad 
place. It is simply a different place.*
There are several events that will occur. There will be events of a physical nature. These events 
will be, from the point of view of those who are living with the illusion, of a very destructive  
nature. However, there is no such thing as destruction. There is only change. This you must 
understand.  If you understand  this, then you will understand  the truth of what is to occur.
There will be change,  a physical change.  This change will be very beneficial.  However,  the 
people of this planet who view these changes from  their present  state of  ignorance  will 
consider  them to be quite destructive.
This is unfortunate.  However,  the people of this planet have had a sufficient length of time to 
become educated. They have, however, sought  to educate themselves  in the ways of their illusion,  
rather than the ways of the Creator. This illusion is so strong in their understanding that most of 
them have no awareness  in a waking sense of reality. These people will be very difficult to 
communicate  with. They will view the changes in their immediate creation as destructive and 
irreversible.
. Well, is it going to be an earthquake,  or a depression,  or what?
The  changes will be of a physical nature. The depression  of which you speak is of no consequence. 
 It would  be viewed as nothing compared  to the physical changes that will occur. It will be 
necessary for members of groups such as this one who wish to serve to understand  fully the reality 
of these changes, and to understand fully the accuracy of the statement made in your holy book 
which states that “Although you walk through the valley of the shadow of death, you will fear no 
evil.” This must be kept uppermost in your consciousness. For you will walk through this

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


valley.  And you will demonstrate  to those who seek your knowledge of truth and only your ability  
to demonstrate  this knowledge will alert those who seek the knowledge  that  you are a true and 
knowing channel. For many false channels  will at  this time be lost. For they will not  be able to 
demonstrate  their knowledge of truth. For they will cling to the illusion  that  has surrounded  
them,  and will display  the fear that  this illusion  brings  upon them.
This change is looked upon by those of us who understand  it as an extremely  beneficial change.  
It is also looked upon,  by those members of groups such as this one who have realized  the truth 
of this information,  as extremely  beneficial  to all the peoples of this planet.  It will be 
difficult  for some of the members  of groups such as this one to demonstrate  an understanding  of 
these truths, since  they have been strongly affected  by the illusion  that has been created  by 
the people of this planet.
However, this understanding is a necessity to be demonstrated.
. What's going to be happening, exactly?
Physical change, of all types.
There will be massive destruction wrought  upon your surface. It will be of such a nature as to 
totally change the surface of your planet. This destruction  is within your planet at this time. It 
has been put there by thought. It has been put there by the thought of the population of this 
planet through thousands of years of thinking this thought. This thought is of a vibratory nature. 
You are at this time passing through the last portion of what you know as the third density 
vibration.
Shortly, your planet will be sufficiently within what you know as the fourth density vibration. At 
this time there will be a disharmony between  the thought that creates the vibration  that is your 
planet, and the thought that dwells within the density that is the fourth.
Much energy will be released of a physical nature. This energy will create physical changes within 
your planet. There will be changes within your land masses. Changes in your atmosphere.
Changes in all of the physical manifestations of your planet. This will be of a nature that will be 
considered to be cataclysmic. This is a very good thing. However, it will not be considered good by 
those that are within the illusion.

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


Labeling this change good or bad is something that is dependent  upon the individual observing the 
change and his orientation. My friends,  the reason for this change being of a cataclysmic  nature 
is that the thought that has been generated  upon and in your planet for the past several thousands 
 of years is a thought that is out of harmony with the new vibration  that your planet now goes 
into. The Creator never conceived of the condition  that is shortly to manifest  upon your planet. 
This condition is manifested  as a result of the desire of all the individuals  that dwell on this 
planet. They are not aware of this desire, but their desire has created this.
They have created a condition  by their desire that is shortly to be severely out of harmony with 
where they will physically be. Due to this, there will be a large energy release, which will 
manifest itself upon your planet in the form of earthquakes,  storms, volcanic eruptions,  and in 
fact a shift of the poles of your planet with respect to their orientation in space.
This change that will shortly manifest itself upon your planet is, as I have said, a result of the 
mismatching  of vibrations  of your planet and its new position in space. This change will alert 
many of the people of your planet who are very lightly slumbering, and many of the ones who are 
slumbering  relatively deep. Many of these people will at this time be what is known  in many of 
your religions as “saved.”  It will save them, because they will get the violent awakening  that is 
necessary to cause them to raise their vibrations  that last amount  that is necessary to get them 
off the fence, so to speak.
There will be those who are more deeply slumbering,  so to speak, who will not  make  the 
transition.  It is up to you to provide  those who will be awakened  with the information  that  
they desire.  We  have stated  that this  transition  is both good and bad.  Ultimately,  in its 
most  broad sense,  it is a good  transition;  however,  it is an unnecessary  transition.  In a 
normal  transition  there would be no energy release,  since in a normal transition,  the vibration 
 of the planet  would match closely enough  and be in harmony  with the new and higher vibration.  
This would result  in no energy release,  and the planet would continue in a relatively  normal 
sense from a lower vibration  to the higher. Your planet  is an aberration in the evolution  of the 
spirit of the people of the planet and the planet. The change  that will take place will be a 
beneficial  change.  However, the mechanics  of the change will seem anything  but  beneficial.
194

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


Those of the people who dwell upon this surface at  this time who are totally aware of the results 
of this change,  and the reason  for it, will not in any way be affected by this change.  Those who 
are not aware of this, but who are aware of this in a spiritual sense, will be affected only 
emotionally,  because they will not  understand.  There are the people we wish to communicate  
with.?
The  UFOnauts emphatically feel that this catastrophic time is not absolutely necessary. We could 
avert it if we came into harmony with the new vibration. In fact, the precise timing of the Earth 
changes depends entirely upon  us:
We of course cannot  interfere,  but do ask that you who are on the Earth planet work 
metaphysically, mentally with love in your hearts  to eliminate,  as much as Spirit  will allow to 
be eliminated,  danger,  fear, panic,  and loss.  Thank you. We are on the alert.  We do not know 
when and how some of these will strike.  But  they are scheduled,  from what
we can gather of auric conditions  and mass thinking  in this section of the world,  which is very 
serious at  this time.*


But let me say to you this,  that prophecies  were given so that Man would have the opportunity  to 
avoid these  things.  Prophecies  do not necessarily  need to be fulfilled,  for Man's destiny lies 
entirely within his own hands.  You see, prophecies  are made by the realization  of a pattern, but 
patterns  can be changed,  and you, my friends,  the People of Earth, have it within our power  to 
change and avoid these things.v
And from Case No.   , Chapter  I:
Then he gave us to understand  that  the little men might  represent  a threat  for all of  us in 
the future.  But, as he was not sure whether  the danger came from the particular  type of 
individual who had abducted him or from other  unknown  types,  he was at present  prepared  to 
have a further  meeting with them in order  to clarify  the matter.  In  any case,  he said,  he 
was certain  that  the world was in great danger,  without  however knowing  from where  this 
danger would come.  The danger had been revealed  to him by the fair-skinned  individual of 
friendly  mien who had appeared mysteriously  before him in the chamber,  unperceived  by the 
little men. The danger would involve  the whole of mankind,  and would possibly  include 
intervention  by unknown  beings,  in addition  to other

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


calamities. This danger might however  be avoided if mankind  changed their present  behavior.*°
The  Confederation  is hoping that we on Earth will become aware of what power our thoughts 
actually have, and its members are here to keep the message of love flowing to those on Earth who 
desire to hear it and learn from it.
Your planet, along with its neighbors,  is moving as your galaxy is, into a new area of space, a 
new vibration.  In this creation, there is nothing but order. It is only necessary to look about 
you to see the order and perfection  of this universe.
You are about to experience a gift. This gift will be a new understanding of love. Some of you have 
already begun to experience this, and as the progression  takes place, it will become more and more 
apparent  to many of those of Earth.
We are here to help with this experience.  This is the reason that so many of your brothers from 
space, as you call it, are now here with planet Earth. We are here to serve and to help the 
Creator's  plan  bring
to you the love that you desire,II
And from OAHSPE:
So great was the wisdom of these Gods and Goddesses  that to come within the earth's atmosphere was 
sufficient  to enable them to read all the souls and prayers of mortals, and all the thoughts and 
desires of the spirits of the lower heaven  belonging  to the earth. To each and all of them the 
voice of Jehovih was ever present, and their power was like unto their wisdom.
Jehovih hath said: To  the corporean  I have given power to hear one or two things as the same 
moment of time; but My Gods can hear intelligently tens of thousands  of men speaking at the same 
time. Yea, they can find a way to answer them also,I2


Fragapatti said: Autevat, my son, the All Light fell  upon me, saying: My Son, go to the red star, 
the earth; her coat is red with mortal blood!
Now, by her time she standeth more than two hundred years beyond the boundaries of Horub. For this, 
I called thee and thy attendants.

y6

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND  OTHER  BAD  STUFF                               
                   


How  long will it take thee to go thither  and survey  the earth and her heavens,  and return  
hither?
Autevat, well trained in such matters, said: Of the earth's time, forty days. Fragapatti said: What 
number of attendants wilt thou require for so great a distance? And Autevat said: Twenty thousand.
Fragapatti said: Provide thee, then, all thou requirest, and go at once. And if thou shalt find the 
inhabitants of the earth suitable for sacred records,  commission  thou the God or Lords to send 
second loo'is to raise up an heir for Jehovih's  kingdom.
Autevat said: Thy  will and Jehovih's be done. And, duly saluting, he and his attendants withdrew,  
and, coming to Gatwawa, ordered an arrow-ship of twenty thousand gauge. In two days it was 
completed; and, during the time, Autevat had chosen his attendants. And so he departed, swiftly, 
like a ray of light, Autevat and his attendants, for the red star, the earth. To see what was the 
matter, that a God so far away as Fragapatti was, could feel and know the flow of human  blood!
For such is the all perfection  of Jehovih's Sons and Daughters. Even mortals can sense things a 
little way off; but Jehovih's  upraised Gods feel the breath of the stars, and know when they are 
disordered.'i


The  planet Earth is now in a state of transition  toward a greater unfoldment  of man's 
progression;  the world is not going to end!I4


. we are now diligently preparing the way for His footsteps to be heard throughout  the world. The  
Kingdom  is no longer at hand, the Kingdom  is frrc, and He is shortly to manifest to all men. We 
have awaited  this time with eagerness  through the long centuries.  Is it not then a time for 
great rejoicing even  though some catastrophe shall come to the world?  But through this 
catastrophic  purification  man shall
inherit his godhood,I}


Full knowledge of our presence will soon  be known to your people. There will be, at that time, 
great upheavals on your planet. We regret

197

CrtAPTER  NINE:  DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CHAOS,
                                               AND OTHER  BAD  STUFF                                
                    


this cannot in any way be avoided. We knew this from the beginning. We, therefore, have warned man 
repeatedly to prepare for these events, both mentally and physically.
And one last and extremely sensible insight into the contactee predictions of catastrophe,  which 
we would do well to note as an accurate perception:
“Orthon,”  a cosmic  being,  told a group of Danish contactees  that  a
great cataclysm would occur on December  z4, '9*7-  The press freely translated  this as “the end 
of the world.”  Borge Jensen, spokesman  for
the contactees,  told newsmen  that  Orthon and the Space Brothers had released the warning out of 
love for mankind.  The world did not end, and one would have to debate  the limits of  “cataclysm,” 
 but on the date named by the space  being, earthquakes  rattled various parts of the globe
(some registering  as high as 7.•     on a Richter scale of Io), an inactive volcano  in Samoa 
began vomiting  new fire,  and nearly the whole of Europe was paralyzed  by severe winter storms.  
Could it be that our
Space Brothers  merely exaggerate  the scope of  coming  disasters  in an attempt  to get apathetic 
 and skeptical Earthmen  to acti'7






















I$8



CHAPTER  TEN

CONCLUSION
In the previous chapters we've become familiar with the general foundations of the basic 
communication  which I have extracted from the contactee and other UFO phenomena. The  material we 
have examined is only a tiny percentage of the total contactee data available to the energetic 
researcher, but it does represent  the general gist of most contactee data. I will not say that 
there are not some totally anomalistic contactee cases, but these seem to be in the minority.  One  
of these cases is the strange and lengthy contact of the people from the planet UMMO,  the original 
contactee reports coming from Spain. As a researcher said:
Invited to address the gathering at the close of the Symposium, Secretary-General Fouere dwelt upon 
the unique nature of the UMMO reports. He said: “I have received dozens of messages from supposed 
extraterrestrials, transmitted  by all types of contactees. They are always messages of a 
missionary or evangelical  type, in which terrestrials are warned of the tremendous  dangers 
resulting from their imprudent manipulation  of atomic energy; or the others try to save us and 
redeem us. The  UMMO messages, on the other hand, without attempting  to convert  us to any sort of 
cosmic religion.*
It is to be noted that although  the UMMO material is not high-key  in its zeal to save earth,  the 
philosophical  content  of  the messages  are congruent with the basic Confederation  philosophy.  
Noted researcher  Brad Steiger,  a man with quite a bit of experience  in dealing with the 
contactee phenomena,  gave this evaluation  of the contacted message content  in his excellent  and 
perceptive book, THE   A@UARIAN REVELATIONS:
The philosophical  and metaphysical  content of the essential message allegedly entrusted  to the 
contactee is nearly always the same. A distillation of the Outer Space Apocrypha would reveal such 
concepts as the following:
•      Man is not alone in the solar system. He has “space brothers”  and they have come to earth 
to reach him and to teach him.
•      The Space Brothers have advanced information which they wish to impart  to their weaker  
brethren. The Space Brothers want man to join an intergalactic spiritual federation.

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


•      The Space Brothers  are here to teach,  to help man rise to higher levels of vibration  so 
that  he may be ready to enter new dimensions. According  to the Outer Space Apocrypha,  such a 
goal was precisely what Jesus,  the prophets,  Confucius  and the leaders  of the great religions  
have tried to teach man.
•      Man stands now in the transitional  period  before the dawn of a New Age. With peace,  love, 
 brotherhood  and understanding  on man's part, he will see a great  new era begin  to dawn.”
•      If  man should not raise his vibratory  rate within  a set period of time, severe earth 
changes and cataclysms  will take place. Such disasters  will not end the world,  but shall serve 
as cataclysmic crucibles  to burn off the dross of unreceptive  humanity.”°
You can see that I  am not  the only ufologist  who has been putting  the puzzle pieces patiently  
together over the years.  These conclusions  as to the content  of the UFO    message seem 
inescapable  to the serious investigator.  In fact,  the missionary  aspect  of the UFO's contact  
is assumed  to be present  to the point where,  in a recent case,  the investigator  was puzzled  
as to why the contactee  hadn't  responded properly  to it:
If Mrs. M's  UFO   experience  was “designed”  to inspire her with a missionary  zeal,  as has 
happened  to other contactees,  why has it not “worked”  for her in this way,  and for what  deeper 
reasons other than to avoid notoriety has she avoided  telling many people about her experience.i
To  conclude  this exploration,  I will make a statement  of the total UFO story as I  have come to 
understand  it, on the basic philosophical  level. The UFO   sources  have a view of the universe  
and man within it upon which they build all their actions  toward us. This is what we are getting 
from  the bulk of these UFO    contacts:
The stuff of which  the universe  is made is consciousness, a single,  infinite consciousness. This 
by definition  is the Creator.  This consciousness  created vibrations  through infinite space.  
This basic vibration  is identified in our physical science  as the photon,  the basic 
particle-wave  called light. This light vibration  is the raw material  used to make everything  
that  there is within  the creation.
The vibrations which were fashioned from light exist over a large range of frequencies,  only a 
small portion  of which is apparent  within our present

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


physical reality.  All atoms,  whether within or outside  of our physical reality are simply more 
complex rotations and vibrations of the basic photon.
We are then,  a highly complex,  vibrational,  single,  infinite,  entity.  Presently we are 
experiencing  the illusion of individualization as separate  entities,  but still we have been 
created  by the one consciousness, and our basic essence resides within  the Creator's one 
consciousness. This original state has  been allegorized  by the Holy Bible's story of Adam and 
Eve. In that  tale,  the serpent coaxes  the couple into eating the fruit of knowledge of duality 
(good and evil),  and so they get ousted from the Garden. The UFOnauts say that the Creator created 
 us with knowledge of our unity with all things,  but also with free will and the ability  to 
create as His sons and daughters.  Through our free will,  they say, man long ago decided  to 
become individualized to  the extent  that we could no longer find our unity with one another.  We 
were no longer one, we had entered into a man-made  universe of duality,  of separation  from the 
original  thought,  which then resulted in the
polarization of consciousness  (good and evil). From this duality  all of our present  problems  
have been generated.
The original creative  thought  was a thought  of the creation in which each part would act in 
service to the other parts, just  as the parts of the body act as a unit,  in mutual service to 
itself as a whole.  However,  in the man-created world the various parts have ceased  being  
totally and mutually supported, and a far more complex  world-reality  has emerged.  The question  
of why the world doesn't  seem  to work very well can be put in focus by imagining what would 
happen to the natural creation  if  trees  got  tired of turning Co,   into oxygen and clouds 
decided not  to rain any more.  In some cases we humans are still capable of being biased  towards  
service: we are shocked if  a mother refuses  to feed her new-born  child. But we have strayed far 
enough  into isolation  to be unable to perceive the unity between  us all, so that we tend  to 
believe  that  there are some whom we should not serve,  but oppose.
This Adam and Eve adventure  of ours away from  the original  thought resulted in succeeding  
changes of vibration,  as the structure of the individualizing consciousness  proceeded  to take 
form.  Back when the individualized man was young he had the full Creator's  ability to instantly 
create  that which was imagined.  Thus the Creation grew and grew. But as the consciousness  of 
unity was lost,  the Creation  became progressively stratified so that  it came  to exist  not  as 
one vibration  of love but as many vibrations,  each a little less rapid than its predecessor.  And 
so evolved the numerous  densities  of experience,  all condensed from the same original vibration, 
 each spanning part of the range from total unity to total
IOI

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


separation.  This makes  for a vast  creation of experience,  considering  that  the original 
consciousness  was infinite  to begin with.
We are,  today, encased  in a consciousness  many eons away from the condition of total unity. Most 
of us don't  totally like where we've landed in the continuum of experience:  worse,  most of us 
don't  even remember  the journey we took to get here. According  to the UFO    contacts,  we are 
at a point in the journey back toward  the original  thought where it is possible for at least some 
of us to realize our position and make a conscious  choice about our own progress.  We have been 
preparing  to make  this choice for almost  a full cycle of experience  at this level or density. 
The time to make the choice is now,  for the cycle is ending.
As fast  as the ship passed the lights,  the etherean musicians  came aboard,  being anxious  to 
meet Hipacha and his hosts, especially  the I'hins,  and to congratulate  them on being  the first 
harvest  from the lowest  heaven at the end of a cycle. And strange  to say there were just twice 
as many as Sethantes  had prepared in the first dawn on earth.
Fragapatti called  the swift messengers  belonging  to the roads of Gon, in etherea,  and he said 
unto them: Go  ye to Sethantes,  whose fields lie in the Roads of Gon, and say unto him: Greeting,  
in the name of Jehovah! The earth hath reached Obsod and Goomatchala,  home of Fragapatti, who 
sendeth love and joy on behalf of sixty millions,  first harvest  of h'ak,  grade sixty-five.‹
Grade fifty is the minimum harvestable  grade,  according  to OAHSPE,  the grade  indicating  that  
the person is fifty percent  for himself and fifty percent for service to others.
Now we are living within  the third density of vibration,  trying in our rather vague way to learn 
how  to think, not in a complex and intellectual  way but in the sense of coming into tune with the 
original vibration  of unity.
I  realize  that some people are perfectly satisfied  with life as it is. I  am reminded  of the 
circus janitor who cleans up after the elephants.  Upon  being interrupted  at his malodorous  
work, shovel in hand, he looks up and smiles.  “Say,” we quip,  “how come you keep on working here. 
 What a job! Don't you want  to leave and get a better job?” The janitor laughs in amazement,  and 
replies: “What? And quit show business?”  So, some people like this density,  and,  indeed,  there 
are those who seek a level of experience even farther from unity than ours.  If  all upon our 
planet were striving  for unity,  then the UFOnauts wouldn't  be nearly so elusive.  But there are 
many

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


who prefer  their universe  as it now is, and do not wish to be bothered with such nonsense.
In OAHSPE, we find Jehovih speaking  “out of the light  inherent”  in the etherean  gardens,  
stating  the situation  like this:
Sixteen  times have my etherean hosts redeemed  the earth and her heavens  from darkness  into 
light, and yet ere the end of a cycle she falleth again,  and her atmospheres  with her. And now it 
hath come to pass  that her heavens  are filled with thousands  of millions of spirits  that know 
not Me  and My  emancipated  worlds.i
Here is the “fallen mankind”  described in another way:
.  man so loved the earth and whatsoever  ministered  unto his ease and to his flesh desires,  that 
 he fell from his high estate.  And great darkness came upon the earth. And man cast  aside his 
clothes,  and went naked, and became carnal in his desires.  The Lord went abroad over  the earth 
calling: Come to me, O  man! Behold,  thy Lord is returned! But man heard not the voice of the 
lord; for,  by man's indulgence,  the spirit of man was covered  up in his own flesh.*
So, mankind,  and all entities in the creation,  dwell within various densities, in some degree 
sensitive or insensitive  to the original vibration of unity or love which created  the universe.
After all of these densities were formed in the Creation,  the desire  began to be generated  to do 
the inevitable:  make a full circle back to the original unity. Jacob's ladder,  with every rung 
going higher,  is a good analogy  to  this: man has inborn the inevitable desire  to seek for the 
top of his ladder of experience.  All over our infinite Creation,  entities have progressed,  at  
various  rates, on this climb back to the original condition.  As entities  reach  a certain point  
in their development,  they begin to again grasp  the nature of the Creator as service to all. At  
this point  these entities  reach their hands down the ladder,  to help their brothers who are 
climbing  below.  But the law ofprogreS5ion  is 5HStained in perfect free will,  so that only those 
who are reaching up for that help will receive it. Men have an inalienable  right  to progress,  or 
even regress,  at  their individual  speeds;  there is an infinite amount  of time available.
The UFO   source states  that  in the third density of vibration we have tools with which to make 
our experiences  work for our progress:  our physical or third-density  body,  and our higher self, 
which can detach itself from the physical and experience  the finer vibrations of existence which

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


interpenetrate our physical world. Most of the total humanity which has ever been in the physical 
is at present  to be found in the finer planes of existence.  The inhabitants  of these astral and 
devachanic  regions  incarnate into a physical  body primarily for the experiences  which the 
physical world can offer.  Some within  the astral realms incarnate  chiefly to experience  the 
pleasures  of the flesh. The more spiritually evolved souls of the devachanic regions often desire 
incarnation  into the physical  to mature  themselves through  the catalyst  of physical 
experience,  which is much more immediate and keenly felt  than experience  on higher planes. The 
astral's objective is easy  to understand:  he just wants  to get  back in the game and live it  
up. To get  at  the reason  that  the devachanic entity wants to incarnate,  let me just give an 
example  in story form. Mr.  Good has,  in his previous  life on Earth, done a great  many nice 
things,  but like all of us, he was in some ways still selfish.  After his death,  back on the 
higher planes,  he was able to view his  life just passed as a whole,  and in this perspective  his 
mistakes were  apparent.  In the higher vibration  to which he has come because his vibrations  
basically  are a match with it,  all of  his companions  have his desire for advancement,  and thus 
it is possible  to “see” with more discerning  eyes what  has occurred on the denser planes.  The 
errors  become obvious.
Now Mr. Good has an ambition: he wants to correct his mistakes in order to advance his level of 
consciousness. But this is not easy to do by pure force of will. It  must be done in the dense 
level at which one acts and then seems to receive reactions from the outside. On  the devachanic 
level it is obvious that all effects are the result of one's own actions.
Even as to the square of  the distance  away from  the earth,  so are the grades of  my 
resurrections.
According to the exaltation  of man's soul, so shall he inhabit the places I have made.
According to his own soul's growth and development, so shall he ascend in my kingdoms, outward away 
from the earth, grade unto grade adapted I them.7
The  great virtue of the physical world is the amount of pain which it can generate in 
consciousness. It is due to the stimulus of this catalyst,  pain, that we gradually learn how to 
avoid pain, in an ever-ascending sense. Primitive man learns not to put his hand in the fire: 
spiritually-seeking man learns to combat his own pain by seeking to be of service to his fellow 
man. The pain of existence can be felt at the level of the physical  body, within  the mental  or 
the emotional  body, or solely within the spiritual  body. Yet while we are

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


within the physical this pain will have a far more urgent and pressing nature, and the decision  to 
seek for its rightful surcease will have a far more pronounced  effect  upon our essential  being.
So Mr. Good chooses another Earth life. Maybe this time he does a little better. He evaluates 
again. There is no limit to the number of tries a person can have. If necessary an entity could go 
through our earthbound experiences  through eternity.
The  analogy may be made to the apparatus for distillation  of pure water. The  denser vibrations 
are closer to the earth's surface, actually penetrating  it, while the faster ones move at higher 
altitude. Entities continually make a circuit from a higher level back to the surface, then back 
again,  upward, but hopefully to a higher vibration  than before. This is a sort of percolating 
process producing finally a distillate of souls that are ready for a more  refined distillery. This 
we have seen called the fourth density by UFO sources. OAHSPE describes  the type of distillation 
desired  upon this density of existence as follows:
Jehovih had so made man and angels that, whosoever  had learned to abnegate self and to labor for 
the good of others, was already above grade fifty, and his ascension should be perpetual 
thereafter; whilst they that were below grade fifty, who had not put away self, should gravitate 
downward,  toward  the earth.*
In our previous harvests, says OAHSPE,  only a small percentage “made the grade”:
Loo'wan said: Great Spirit, I have heard, I have seen. We gather the earth's harvest for Thee, O 
Jehovih,  but they are small. We gather the earth's harvests of dark spirits, O Jehovih, and they 
are ten times larger. Behold,  there is no balance between  them.v


And  as oft  as they are raised  up in light,  so are they again cast down  in darkness,  because 
of  the great  desire of  the spirits of  the dead to return back to the earth.  These druj return 
to mortals and fasten  upon them as fetals or as familiars,  and inspire them  to evil.  Go  now to 
the earth,  O my beloved,  and find the division  of the earth where most  these druj congregate,  
for I will uproot  their stronghold;  I will break them from their haunts  and they shall no longer 
carry My   people down to destruction,IO

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


In past harvest-times, it has happened  that entire isolated populations  of our world would reach 
a satisfactory  vibration,  with souls choosing  to incarnate here to be with like-minded  people,  
these populations  being isolated from the rest of the world.  In these circumstances, the UFOnauts 
 have been able to make actual physical contact  from the next vibration.  The UFO   sources feel 
that  this open contact  is highly detrimental  to any culture not spiritually ready for it, for 
several reasons.  First,  it is demoralizing  to realize  that  there are places one can't go. More 
importantly,  the physical illusion is most effective when it appears  totally real and of 
unquestioned  importance.
People who are more or less ready to graduate from this classroom  of Earth do not  need to have 
the illusion sustained for them; they are ready for a broader perspective.  For those who are still 
learning,  this perspective would be detrimental.  It would instill,  to some degree, doubt  in the 
importance  of the “training  aids”  of our daily experience.  IS told Puharich  and Geller  that 
they had landed   ooo years ago. They apparently  had found a culture sufficiently  advanced  in 
vibration  to meet.
Right  now,  there doesn't  seem  to be a culture or nation sufficiently  advanced as a whole to 
make possible  a general  or mass landing of fourth density entities.  It may  be possible  that a 
very small,  isolated group  might  be able to accept such a direct  contact. But IS says,  “And 
now we must land again.” They are anxious to aid us, now,  and to land,  because of where we are in 
our system of cycles. We are at  the end of a harvesting period,  so that the Earth itself is 
making her transition  to the fourth density.  This
transition  is inexorable  and involves not just our planet  but  the solar system as a whole.
I  realize  this is one of the harder parts of the UFO    story  to swallow.  It is not easy to 
picture not just people,  but every atom, molecule,  particle and part of the solar system,  in 
transition,  so that  the vibratory  rate of all particles  will increase  one density level in 
vibrational  rate. But the explanation  of the cause of the natural catastrophes  which a very 
large percentage  of UFO contactees  forecast  rests on this basic premise of cyclical transition.  
For the planetary mayhem is said to be brought  about due to the disharmony between  the vibrations 
 of our planet  and the density into which it is transiting.
The planetary vibration  is said to be the result  of the total sum of man's individual  vibrations 
 through history.  When  the majority of the people advance in vibratory  rate at  the “normal”  
rate,  the transition  to the higher vibration,  when time comes for it  to be made,  is smooth and 
without incident.  But in our case,  the majority of our people have not made  the

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                     


appropriate advances,  and so there is conflict  between our vibration as a planet and the 
vibration of the new volume of space into which we are passing. As the vibrations increase at the 
nuclear level and changes begin to occur, the resultant energy releases will result in thermal 
gradients sufficient to create great stresses in the Earth and therefore massive Earth changes.
Through George Hunt Williamson,  the source known as Brother Philip
says,
Concern yourselves with the sheep of the flock,  those that  have strayed or wandered away, for 
they must have the message of hope and faith in order  to endure  those tragic days ahead,II
Philip pictures  the “sheep”  to be those who have a sufficiently  high vibration  to make  the 
transition  into the next density,  but have no intellectual  knowledge of what  is occurring.  
They see many “sheep”  as sitting on the fence, poised between  striving consciously  to advance 
spiritually  and striving  instead for more physically-oriented goals  to the exclusion of 
spiritual ones.  It is their hope that  the sheep may  be alerted as these Earth changes  begin,  
so that  they may get off  the fence,  on the spiritual side. The disasters will frighten  many,  
and the Confederation  of Planets wishes  to alleviate  this fear,  by putting  the events into 
perspective with their spiritual  significance.
Certainly,  when we do experience  a disaster such as a tornado,  hurricane,  or flood, we see much 
pride and glory washed or blown away.  Physical structures  are torn to shreds,  people's  
belongings  and treasures  lost.  Yet   from these experiences  people overwhelmingly report  their 
renewed thankfulness  to the Creator for sparing  them what  they see,  now to be far more 
important:  their loved ones.  The experience  seems  to focus in people a feeling of being 
newborn,  thankful  for real blessings,  and humble in the face of the omnipotence  of the Creator.
The positively oriented group of UFOnauts  are working  to make available to people in just  this 
frame of mind the information  which gives the spiritual reason for the Earth changes.  The Bible 
gives us, “Blessed are the meek, for they shall inherit  the Earth.” Taken in reference  to the 
coming transition,  the statement  describes  those of a sufficiently  service-oriented attitude  
to be in harmony with Earth's new rate of vibration.
In the same message,  Brother Philip says,
.  the spirit  of Anti-Christ  is ever more powerful,  and it is drawn  closer and closer  towards  
the Earth, where it shall have its final death  throes.

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


But in those death  throes it will take many down with it, and they will not find the Kingdom  to 
be inherited,  but must  repeat  again that  great cycle of  time  that  is now culminating  in the 
scene upon your Earth wor1d,I2
This is spoken of in the Bible as the battle of Armageddon.  The UFO  sources  see it as a battle 
of mind involving  billions of entities  both in the physical  and in the finer densities of  
Earth's vibrations,  with those  billions knowing  little or nothing of their part in the battle,  
or even that  the battle is raging.  Like most  battles, only the “generals”  know the overall 
objectives  of the fight, and so in this battle the Masters on both sides—the sides  being good and 
evil, or unity and separation—are doing  their  best  to harvest  the greatest  crop of  
consciousness. Their objectives  are completely  within what we call the mental planes,  but 
objectives won within  these planes are inevitably  manifested  into the physical.
The increasing  polarization of the good and evil forces within our planet's people is showing up 
now in, on the one hand,  the great  increase  in people's desire  to seek spiritually;  on the 
other hand,  the great  increase  in crime, war- mindedness,  desire for individual power,  
corporate  and personal  greed and corruption,  and the many other negative  aspects of thought  
which are easily picked out of today's news. The significant  fact of course is not that  these 
things occur,  but that  they are increasing.
From Revelation:  “And there shall be wars and rumors of wars and nation shall rise against  
nation.” What kind of thinking causes this situation,  which most  assuredly  now is occurring?  
The contactees  say, very simply,  thought  of self rather  than service.  The problems of Earth, 
from small to vast, can be traced back to this one choice.  The result  of individuals  choosing  
to serve self is, ultimately,  hatred,  war,  and crime.
As we enter the cusp of this transition period,  with the potential  difference between  the coming 
vibration  of higher unity and the existing vibration  of self-service or separation  becoming  
greater and greater,  the positive UFOnauts  feel that  the “sheep”  have the greatest chance 
possible  to use this Earth classroom  effectively.  People can make great  progress  in these 
“last days.”
In addition  to the positive UFOnauts  in their craft who are here to aid us, there are many 
“apples”  who are striving  to aid Earth's vibration.  They have to some degree remembered  who 
they are and what  their purpose here is, and they have entered  many fields of endeavor  to get  
the message of spiritual seeking spread.  home are in the various fields of communications

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


through  media, TV  and motion picture production. Some are popular musicians, writing songs about 
things of the spirit that are on everyone's  lips. Some write in modern parable of the eternal 
truths. Some find expression in their careers of all kinds, touching people through their very 
personalities and points of view, their simple examples of how to live in harmony. Quite often, the 
apples are not fully aware of why they have written  these songs or words, lived this life, or done 
these deeds; he or she is simply following an inner direction which is trusted intuitively.  I 
don't  mean that one must  be an apple to live or act in the described  manner,  but a great many 
who so live and act are apples. And all who are led to positive acts are benefiting not only 
themselves  but the Earth vibration as a whole.
A  footnote  to the discussion  about  apples  is the fascinating  fact  that  the Beatle's  
recording  company was called Apple Records.  I  have often wondered whether  the Beatles were 
aware of George Hunt Williamson's book.
It is an unshakable  tenet  of the UFO    sources  that  though  they can aid their brothers  of  
Earth in spiritual seeking,  the first step, of  choosing  to seek, must be made under conditions  
of complete free will by the individual.
Hence is formed the concept  of providing an example of higher  truth, which alerts  the seeking 
consciousness  without  giving him any proof as such.  To  prove the “miracle”  or “higher  being”  
to be real is to force the choice of seeking on people.  But this choice must remain  to be 
accepted or rejected without  prejudice:  this is the mechanical  structure  of  spiritual 
evolution.  In  Ip63 a contactee  in Warren,  Pennsylvania,  received:
. there was a great  being who descended into the Earth and parted  the sea in testimony for the 
Israelites,  but they did not understand. These miracles were not understood,  and this shall not 
happen again.
The  miracles we get now will continue to be of a controversial  nature so that people who wish to 
refute them may do so. “Those who have the eyes to see, let them see.”
IS was at first very hesitant about giving Puharich  permission  to have Geller's abilities 
scientifically tested:
After you insisted that Uri be validated, counsel was taken higher and higher, and it was decided  
that Uri could be validated  just this once. And he may never be allowed to do such work again 
under laboratory control. i

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


It would be in keeping with the contactee  theory that they might feel that something on the order 
of scientific proof might  be too strong a catalyst for us, so that they would  be infringing on 
our free will. They were correct  to allow Geller to be tested, for as they must have finally 
surmised,  people who do not want to trust this proof, simply state that they don't believe that 
anything has been proven. The desired controversy over Geller has only been enhanced  by these 
scientific tests!
I do not foresee a parting of the sea occurring in the near future; but I do predict that our 
UFOnaut visitors will continue to feed man on Earth tantalising bits of evidence of the illusory 
nature of his world picture. Each of us will find the truth—in  our own way.
“The Amazing” James Randi, a professional  magician, is quite convinced that Uri Geller is no more 
than a conjurer, and that his supposed feats of psychic ability are actually well-done illusions.  
Randi's complaints about Geller include the point of Geller's inability or unwillingness  to work 
when there are professional  magicians  around.  Randi states that if he were trying to do 
illusions,  he also would wish for no colleagues  to be around, that is, if he wanted to 
fraudulently indicate to the public that his effects were not “tricks”  but a demonstration  of 
psychic ability.
He makes a good case on his own terms. The  game has been rather expanded out from under him, of 
course,  by the arrival on the scene, and the testing, of many children throughout  the world who 
have the Geller- type abilities.  But the book by Randi brings out one of the main strands of 
thought  that weave into my theory. For this controversy  between  Geller and his many detractors 
points up one thing above all: this physical world is very real to us.
And it is for a purpose that this world is so real, so solid-appearing to us. All of us have 
incarnated  into the physical to experience its catalytic effect  upon our higher self. It  is 
necessary for this illusion  to be real, if we are to benefit from its manifestations. Our  
ultimate objective while we are in this physical illusion is to work our way out of it, mentally 
and emotionally. The  clues which show the direction  this effort should take are subtle, but 
numerous.  It is necessary to set out to discover the true reality by an act of will: it is 
necessary to decide to seek the truth. The Biblical injunction,  “Seek and ye shall find,” is the 
heart of this concept. The  truth is all about us, yet we are not forced to behold it. Only when we 
freely will to seek the truth, shall we find it.


2.IO

                                            CHAPTER  TEN:  CONCLUSION                               
                  


So, the clues which help to start  us seeking  the truth can never be provable, blatant,  and 
leaving  no room for doubt. All the clues are open questions.
The UFO   phenomena as well as the Geller abilities will retain that quality of elusiveness,  of 
unprovability, until such time as all of us already have begun seeking.  When Randi said,  “I  
cannot choose to believe something because I  want  to,” he had an important  truth by the tail,  
though I  think he was holding it  the wrong way. It is when we want  to know the truth that  the 
truth begins  to come  to us.
Some people see UFOs, and some don't.  There is a reason  for this discrimination. A  person who is 
at the proper stage of mental evolution can tolerate the stimulus  to seeking which is effected by 
the sighting.  Likewise  in other paranormal events,  whether  the event  happens or not is highly 
dependent  on the state of mind of the observers.  When an attitude of seeking along the so-called 
spiritual path is manifested,  the event  is also manifested.  One  real skeptic in the group can 
nullify results.  Randi says he  is good at exposing  Geller because he is a magician.
I say that I  am good at verifying  Geller's  abilities  because I  understand  the limitations  of 
the phenomena.  For the first  time in recent history, we have increasing  numbers of people 
performing what seem  to be small miracles. This is happening  now as a way of gradually  breaking  
the illusion for those of Earth's people who are ready for a new understanding. People who are 
unwilling  to take these clues,  like Randi, will be perfectly able to ignore them. Total free will 
is part of the plan.
One  more observation  about  “miracles.”  The bent metal and the UFO sighting seem like miracles  
to us. We are so jaded! A  flower  blooms,  a baby is born, and we think that's no miracle! If  we 
are going  to understand  the true nature  of our environment,  it will be necessary  to turn off 
the intellect and become,  as a little child,  aware of the creation.  It makes no difference 
whether  Geller is really performing  miracles.  His function  is to stimulate thinking,  not  to 
prove anything.  There is no way of proving miracles,  for the plan itself provides for rejection  
of any concept,  and therefor for lack of provability.  We are surrounded  by not just  a few 
miracles done by Geller and others,  not just a history of miracles  done by Masters such as Jesus, 
 but by the infinite panoply of the “natural”  magic of our world.  How did this world of beauty 
and marvelous efficiency we know as nature come to be? Is it not also miraculous?  Yet  this beauty 
also can be accepted  or rejected, depending  on our philosophical  attitude.  The whole universe 
speaks  to us. But we do not have to listen.

III



ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


C   Ar   ER  ONE
A  VERY S   RnNGE  PHENOMENON
‹.    Weldon, John, UFO'S: WHAT ON EARTH IS HAPPENING,  Irvine,
Ca., Harvest House, O'975. p. viii.
Fuller, John, ed., ALIENS IN THE SKIES,  New York, Putnam, Ip6p,
. \I.
Jacobs, David Michael, THE UFO CONTROVERSY IN AMERICA, Bloomington,  Indiana University Press, 
i»71.   . 86.
4     Ibid., p. 8z.

CHAPTER  Two
THE    TELEPATHIC  CONTACT
‹.    Puharich, Andrija, URI: A JOURNAL OF THE MYSTERY OF URI
GELLER, Garden City, Doubleday, 's74.P *^s-
Ibid., PP- !74 1-
Norman, Eric, GODS AND DEVILS FROM OUTER SPACE,  New
York, Lancer, IQ73. PP  '*'-=-

CHAPTER  THREE ALITY,  E+c.
›.    Newbrough, John Ballou, OAHSPE, Amherst  Press, Amherst,
Wisconsin  s44  6, I88z, p. yp6.
Whitrow,  G. J., ed., EINSTEIN: THE MAN AND HIS
ACHIEVEMENT,  New York, Dover,     IQ67, IQ73, p. 71.
RECIPROCITY,  Frank Meyer, ed., I46 Ross Hall, University of
Wisconsin, Superior, Wisconsin  s4*8o.
4     THE STRUCTURE  OF THE PHYSICAL UNIVERSE,  and several other of Larson's works, are available 
from the publisher,  North Pacific Publishers,  P. o. BOX Ij2\\, Portland,  Oregon, s72Ij.
For further information  about the Larsonian  physical  theory,  contact
NEW SCIENCE ADVOCATES,  Ronald Satz, Secretary. 4  Io North
War Memorial  No. Ioo8, Peoria, Ill. 6IdI4
‹.  Butler, W. E., THE MAGICIAN:  HIS TRAINING AND HIS
WORK, London, Aquarian,  Ip6  , P. Q8. HOLY BIBLE, John I:p-13.


1I1

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


s.    Steiger, Brad, THE AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  New York, Dell,

Bruening, J. H., Letter to J. A. Hynek, published  in GRAY BARKER’8 NEWSLETTER,  No. 4, Feb., !97*. 
PQ. IO-II.

CitAPTER  YOUR
THE  NATUnn  OF  MAN
Taylor, John, SUPERMINDS,  New York, Viking, *971.   . II. Muldoon, Sylvan, and Hereward  
Carrington, THE  PHENOMENA OF ASTRAL PROJECTION,  New York, Weiser, ip6p.
Ostrander, Sheila, and Lynn Schroeder,  PSYCHIC DISCOVERIES
BEHIND THE IRON CURTAIN, Englewood Cliffs, Prentice-Hall,
197   • P- *97-
4-    Watson, Lyall, THE   ROMEO ERROR, Garden City, Anchor, Is74. P-
*4*
Leadbeater,  C.  W.,   THE   DEVACHANIC PLANE; THE  ASTRAL
PLANE,  both published  by Theosophical  Publishing House.

s.


8.


IO.








‹.




4-
Williamson,  George Hunt, OTHER TONGUES, OTHER FLESH,
London, Spearman,  ip   ,Ip6  , p.   6  .
Twitchell, Paul, ECKANKAR: THE KEY TO  SECRET WORLDS,
New  York,  Lancer,  Ip6p,    . IO.
Newbrough,  op. cit., P- 7!*-
Sagan, Carl, THE COSMIC CONNECTION,  New York, Dell, IQ73.
Q. 17.
Randi, James, THE  MAGIC OF URI GELLER,  New York, Ballantine,

Jung, Carl, FLYING SAUCERS: A MODERN MYTH OF THINGS
SEEN IN THE  SKY, New York, Signet, IQ6Q,IQjQ.

CHAPTER  FIVE
A Soro+ION  To   THE MYSTERY  OF   THE   UFO
Emenegger,  Robert,  UFO'S PAST, PRESENT AND FUTURE,  New
York, Ballantine, is74. PP  5s-*'-
Rueckert, Carla, ed., VOICES OF THE  GODS, unpublished manuscript,  Louisville, Ip74. PP  *  7-
Nada-Yolanda, VISITORS FROM OTHER PLANETS, Miami,
Mark-Age, Oip7q, p. z8.
Steiger, Brad, REVELATION: THE  DIVINE FIRE, Englewood  Cliffs,
Prentice-Hall, OIQ73.   . IQ).

HQ

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


Rueckert,  op. clt-. p- 7-
s.   Newbrough,  op. cit., pp. 8   and Hi.
7
8.    Ibid.    . IQ).
Ibid., pp.     -6.

IO.
u.


i3.
Nada-Yolanda,  op.  cit., p. 6}.
Rueckert,  op.  cit., p.  6J.
Menger,  Howard,  FROM OUTER SPACE TO  YOU, New York,
Pyramid,  ip  Q,  IQ   7• ]9.  I}}.
Rueckert,  op.  cit., p.  iy.
*4    Ibid., pp. I}-I/.
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., pp.   4-  .

«.

I8.


10.











z8.

jO.
31.
Ibid., p. z6.
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., pp. 8-p.
Ibid.  P- 3  4
Wallace, Baird, THE SPACE STORY AND THE INNER LIGHT,
Detroit,  unpublished  material Ip7*. 'syz, Article z, p. z. Menger, of. cit., p. I}6.
Brother Philip, SECRETS OF THE ANDES, Clarksburg, Saucerian
Pub.,  UTI,    . I4Q.
Brother Philip, tape recording, date unknown,  place unknown,
unpublished.
Wallace,  op. cit., Article 4. P  ›
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., p. )I.
Williamson,  George Hunt, THE SAUCERS SPEAK, London,
Spearman,  Ip63,  p. Q.
Rueckert,  op. cit., p. it.
Brother Philip, SECRETS OF THE ANDES, O  . Cit., P- 73-
Rueckert,  op. cit.,  p. 21.
Tao Teh Ching.
Puharich, of. cit., p. 2A7-
Rueckert,  op. cit., p. z  .
Ibid.• PP  *7‘-9
Rampa, Tuesday Lobsang, THE  HERMIT, London, Corgi, Ip7i. P  °=
Ibid.
Williamson,  SAUCERS, OJ. bit.  QQ. *4   7
Brother Philip, SECRETS OF THE  ANDES, OJ. bit.,  p. III.
Rueckert,  op. cit., p. zp.
Ibid., pp. zp-  o.
Steiger, THE  A@UARIAN  REVELATIONS,  of. cit., p. z6.
*14

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., p. zz6.
Adamski, George, BEHIND THE FLYING SAUCER MYSTERY,
New York, Warner, i g67.*974. PP- 9  ‘7-
Rueckert,  op. cit., p@. I4*‘*4-
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit.,   . IJ3.
Steiger, THE  A@UARIAN  REVELATIONS,  op. cit., pp. 68-p.
Steiger, THE  AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  op. cit., p. lot. Trepanier, Clyde, MAN, CONSCIOUSNESS AND 
UNDERSTANDING, VOLUME FOUR, Detroit, Understanding of
Detroit, IQ6z,  P- *‘*4‘  2 (I).
47   Larson,  Dewey B., QUASARS AND PULSARS,  Portland, North
Pacific Pub.,     !97!.   . Ij.
Rueckert,  op. cit., p. mo.
45 Trepanier,  op. cit., p. I-zq-6z (I-z).
o. Rueckert,  op. cit.,  pp. 174    -
y›    Trepanier,  at.  cit., p. 6-6-6z  (  ).
Rueckert,  op. cit., p  . I8o-3.
Menger,  of. cit.,   . 171.
Wallace, op. cit., Article 7, -p  =-
HOLY BIBLE, Luke II:p—to.
Rueckert,  op. cit., pp.  *    7- Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit.,  p. 86. Ibid.  P  94
Newbrough,  op. cit., p. y8.
bO. Wallace,  op. cit., Article 7,  p. IO.

I.






«.
68.

7O.
Van Tassel, George, THE  COUNCIL OF SEVEN  LIGHTS, Los Angeles,  DeVorss,  IpJ*. P  4*-
Rueckert,  op. cit.,  pp. i8p-to.
Newbrough,  op. cit., p.     4-
Rogers, Walt, unpublished  material, Wayne, Mich.,  undated,  pp. H}-6.
Rueckert,  op.  cit.,    . IQ2. Wallace,  op cit., Article p, p.  y. Newbrough,  op.  cit., p. 32a.
Rueckert,  op.  cit., p   . IQ7-9-
Rogers,  op.  rim.,  p. 38.
Brother  Philip,  tape recording,  op.  cit.




II}

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS





›.
j.
4
‹.
⁷s.
IO.
II.
12.







i8.

10.








z8.
CHArTER  SIX
THE  DEVELOPMENT  OF   MAN
Steiger, THE  AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  Op. cit., Q. 3j.
Rueckert,  op. cit.,  pQ. 2O4  i- Trepanier,  op. cit. , ]9.  I-II-d2  (I). Wallace,  of.  rim., 
Article p, p. z. Van Tassel,  op. cit., p. p.
Rueckert,  op. cit., pp.  zo6-p.
Trepanier,  op. cit., p.  2-Ij-)2 (I).
Brother Philip, SECRETS OF THE ANDES, op. cit., p. z).
Rueckert,  op. cit., pQ. 2OQ-II.
Brother Philip, SECRETS OF THE ANDES, op. cit., p. 6).
Rueckert,  op. cit., p  . 2I$‘7-
Rogers, at.  cit., pp.  zi7-8. Rueckert,  op. cit., p  . 217-- Ibid., pp  *3  ‘4-
Menger, op. cit., p. i7o. Rueckert,  op. cit., pQ. 2QO-2. Ibid., QP- *4* 3
Van Tassel,  op. cit.,  p. z8.
Brother Philip, SECRET OF THE ANDES, at.  cit., p. 6p.
Menger,  of. cit., p. i7O.
Williamson, THE  SAUCERS SPEAK, op. cit., P- 7*-
Menger, op. cit., p. I6p. Rueckert,  op. cit., pp. ›5*-*57
Ibid., QP-   17  9-
Ibid.,  p. z6o.
Steiger, THE AQUARIAN REVELATIONS,  of. r ' . P- 77-
Trepanier,  of.  cit.,    . 10-1  -62  (2).
Rueckert,  op. cit., pp.  z8I-2.

Rogers, of. cit., -p
37-

›i.
Van Tassel, op. cit., P- 79- Rueckert,  op. cit.,  pp.     3  4- Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit.,  pp- 7*  
3-
Regardie, Israel, THE ART AND MEANING  OF MAGIC,
Cheltenham,  Helios, is7I,   . 8O. Trepanier,  op. cit., p.  y-z4-62  (I). Rueckert,  op. cit., pp. 
z86-7- Trepanier,  op. cit.,   -*4       (3-)

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


Rueckert,  op. cit.,  pk- *9    7-
j8.   Williamson, THE  SAUCERS SPEAK,  up.  cit., p. yz.
Rueckert,  op. cit., p. 3IQ.
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., p. Jz.
41      Van Tassel,  op. cit., p. H3. Rueckert,  op. cit., p. 3I}. Adamski,  op. cit.,  p.    ). 
Rueckert,  op. cit., pP.   i7-zo.
Rogers,  op. cit., p.   z.
Wang Yang-ming. Rueckert,  op. cit., p. 322. Newbrough,  op. cit., p. !
4?.  Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., p. zp6.

o.  Van Tassel,  op. cit., -p
*7-
Menger,  op. cit., p. I68.
Eliot, T.  S., “Four Quartets,”  in THE  COMPLETE POEMS AND PLAYS,  idol-ip  o, New York, Harcourt, 
Old  z, p.u   .

CHAPTER  SEVEN
A  SoLUTION  TO  THE  MvsTERv  OF  SRI  SELLER

I.      Puharich, of. cit., pp- 93‘4 Rueckert,  op. cit., p-*78.
3.       Puharich,  of. cit.,   . ISO.
4-     Ibid.    . Uj.
Ibid.    . U).

‹.
7-
8.

IO.
II.
12.

›4
›s

I8.
Menger,  op. cit., p. Ill.
Williamson, THE  SAUCERS SPEAK,  op. cit., P- 47- Puharich,  nd. cit.,  p- *74-
Brother Philip, tape recording, of.  rim.
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,   p. f/r.,      . 4jI-2. Puharich, of. cit.,JP- *74‘J-
Nada-Yolanda,  t)p. cit., pP- 4*-*-
Puharich, of. cit., Q. I75-
Ibid.
Ibid.   p- !7-!
Rampa,  at.  cit. ,    . HO.
Puharich, of. cit., PP- *78‘9.
Ibid.    . U2.
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., p. y.

*17

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


zo.  Puharich, of. cit.,  p. i83.
zi.   Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., p. z6.
zz.   Ibid., p. zJ.
23.   Ibid.
*4-   Ibid., p. y8.
zJ.  Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES.,  op. cit., p. zzp. z6.  Hatonn, contactee message,  unpublished, 
*97*-
*7-  Puharich, of. cit.,  p. i83.
z8.   Ibid., p. its.
z  .  Ibid., p. isJ.
3O.   Ibid.,   . 184-
31.    Ibid.     . UQ.




j6.   Newbrough,  of. cit., Q. IO.
37-   Ibid., p. yp.
38.   Steiger, REVELATION: THE  DIVINE FIRE, OJ. Git., Q. 144
3d.   Puharich,  Op.  cit.,   . 184-






3.
4-
‹.
7-
8.

IO.
CHAPTER  EIGHT THE  WANDERERS
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  pp      7‘-!
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., P- 4-
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., p. zo6. Williamson, THE  SAUCERS SPEAK,  op. cit., P- 7  - 
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit.,  p. Izz.
Steiger, REVELATION: THE DIVINE FIRE, a  . cit.,     *4J-
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., pP  7‘8. Newbrough,  op. cit., p. pz.
Newbrough,  /éid., p. z4.
Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., Q. 33.

II.
Williamson, OTHER TONGUES, Op. cit., pp=.
* 7-
Steiger, THE  AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  Op. cit., pp. 112-j.
Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES,  op. cit., pp. zo8-p.
Newbrough,  of. cit.,JP- 781-2.
Steiger, THE  A@UARIAN  REVELATIONS,  op. cit., p. toy.


zz8

ENDNOTE  LISTINGS


CHAr   ER NINE
DEATH,  DESTRUCTION,  CiiAOS,  AND O    HER BAD STUFF
I.     Van Tassel, op. rim.,  pQ. I43 4
z.    Ibid., p.  jo.
j.    Steiger, THE AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  pQ.      ‘7
4     Newbrough,  op. cit., p. 6  .
.    Ibid • P    4
6.     Rueckert,  op.  cit., p@.  ISO.
7-    Ibid.• PP  '3*7
8.    Nada-Yolanda,  op. cit., pp-      7-
p.     Trepanier,  op. cit., Q. IO-IQ-62  (I).
Io.  Aleixo,  Hulvio, “Bebedouro  II: The Little Men Return  For The Soldier,”  FLYING SAUCER 
REVIEW,  2I'j‘4• P  33-
Ii.     Rueckert,  op. cit., p-    *37-8.
Iz.   Newbrough,  op. cit., p.   6.
13.    Ibid.     . I7*-
If.   Williamson,  OTHER TONGUES, Op. cit., Q. 313.
I  .   Brother Philip, SECRET OF THE ANDES, op. cit., p. z6. i6.  Steiger, REVELATION: THE  DIVINE 
FIRE, OJ. Cit.,  p. 14-
*7-   Steiger, THE AQUARIAN  REVELATIONS,  of. r/r., p.  j6.

CHAPTER  TEN
CONCLUSION

I.     Ribera, Antonio,  “The Mysterious ‘UMMO’ Affair, Part   ,” FLYING
SAUCER REVIEW,  21:3‘4• P- 44-
a.    Steiger, THE  A@UARIAN  REVELATIONS,  OJ. Cut.,      . 12-3.
3.    Schwarz,  Berthold Eric, “New Berlin  UFO Landing and Repair  by
Crew,” FLYING SAUCER REVIEW, 21:3 4. P  *7-
4-    Newbrough,  op. cit., p. *47-
.    Ibid., p. 6z.
6.    hit., p. y8.
7     Ibid • P  786.
8.    Ibid., P. 41 .
).    Ibid., p. 6z.
to.   Ibid., p. $3.
Ii.    Brother Philip, tape recording, op. cit.
iz.   Ibid.
13.    Puharich,  Op.  cit.,  pp. z22-3.

HQ



BIBLIOGRAPHY


A.             COMMENDED  LADING  IN    UFOS:
Fuller, John, ed., ALIENS IN THE SKIES, New York, Putnam's, Ip6p.
Fuller, John, INTERRUPTED JOURNEY,  New York, Dial, Ip66.
Hynek, J. Allen, and Jacques Vallee, THE EDGE OF REALITY: A PROGRESS  REPORT ON UNIDENTIFIED  
FLYING OBJECTS,
Chicago, Regnery, IQ7i-
Jacobs, David Michael, THE UFO CONTROVERSY IN AMERICA, Bloomington,  Indiana Univ. Press, i»7i-
Keel, John, THE  MOTHMAN PROPHECIES,  New York, Saturday
Review Press,  Ip7J-
Keel, John, UFO'S: OPERATION TROJAN HORSE,  New York,
Putnam's,  Ip7O.
MUFON, MUFON I97i     FO  SYMPOSIUM PROCEEDINGS,  July
f6,   Ip7J, MUFON, Seguin, Texas, ip7
Puharich, Andrija, URI: A JOURNAL OF THE MYSTERY OF URI
GELLER,  Garden City, Doubleday,  IQ74-
Reeve, Bryant and Helen Reeve, FLYING SAUCER PILGRIMAGE, Amherst, Wisconsin  ›44  *, Amherst  
Press, Ipi7-

B.           COMMENDED  LADING  ON  PLATED  SUBJECTS:
Butler, W. E., THE MAGICIAN:  HIS TRAINING AND HIS
WORK,  London, Aquarian, Ip63.
Holroyd, Stuart, PRELUDE TO  THE LANDING  ON PLANET
EARTH, W.H. Allen Co., 44 Hill St., London WiX8LB, England.
Leadbeater,  C. W., THE ASTRAL PLANE, Adyar, Madras, Theosophical Publishing House, is7-


Note: Although most of these books can be obtained from their publishers,  in the case of MUFON, 
the address to use in enquiring about their PROCEEDINGS  is the same as for SKYLOOK magazine.

BIBLIOGRAPHY


Leadbeater,  C. W., THE DEVACHANIC  PLANE OR THE HEAVEN WORLD, THE CHARACTERISTICS AND
INHABITANTS,  Adyar, Madras, Theosophical  Publishing House,
*948.
Manning, Matthew, THE  LINK,  New York, Holt, *974-
Muldoon,  Sylvan and Hereward Carrington,  THE   PHENOMENA  OF
ASTRAL PROJECTION,  New York, Weiser, Ip6p.
Newbrough, John Ballou, OAHSPE, Amherst Press, Amherst, Wisconsin  s44  6, 1882.
Ostrander, Sheila, and Lynn Schroeder,  PSYCHIC DISCOVERIES BEHIND THE  IRON CURTAIN, Englewood  
Cliffs, Prentice-Hall,
!97O.
Raudive, Konstantin,  BREAKTHROUGH:  AN AMAZING
EXPERIMENT  IN ELECTRONIC  COMMUNICATION  WITH
THE  DEAD, New York, Lancer, Is7I.
Steiger, Brad, MYSTERIES OF TIME AND SPACE,  New York, Dell/Confucian, Ip74-
Steiger, Brad, REVELATION:  THE  DIVINE FIRE, Englewood  Cliffs,
Prentice-Hall, IQ73-
Taylor, John, SUPERMINDS,  New York, Viking, IQ7i- Tompkins,  Peter and Christopher  Bird, THE  
SECRET LIFE OF
PLANTS,  New York, Avon, 's73-
Valentine, Tom, PSYCHIC SURGERY,  Chicago, Regnery, IQ73- Watson, Lyall, THE ROMEO ERROR, Garden 
City, Anchor, Ip74
Wilson, Robert,  THE   COSMIC TRIGGER, And-Or Press,  P.O. Box zz46, Berkeley,  CA   947   *-
Watson, Lyall, SUPERNATURE,  New York, Bantam, IQ74-

C.          COMMENDED  CONTACTEE  Booxs:
Adamski, George, FLYING SAUCERS  HAVE LANDED,
Hackensack, Wehman,  reprint.
Adamski, George, BEHIND THE FLYING SAUCER MYSTERY,
New York, Warner Paperback Library, IQ74-
III

BIBLIOGRAPHY


Adkins, Diana, INTRODUCTION:  CONFRONTATION, The
Netherlands, Servire/Wassenaar, Ipyo. Order copies from the author,
c/o Orb  Institute, 3zOQ-II  M Street N.W., Washington,  D.C. zoo  -7
Angelucci, Orfeo M., THE  SECRET OF THE SAUCERS, Amherst,
Amherst  Press, If    . (Out of Print.)
Betherum, Truman, ABOARD A FLYING SAUCER, Los Angeles,
DeVors  , IQ i4-
Fry, Daniel, THE  WFIITE SANDS INCIDENT,  New York, Best
Books, Ipi4
Layne, Mead, FLYING  DISCS, San Diego, Borderland  Sciences
Research ASsociates,  Ig\4-
Menger, Howard, FROM OUTER SPACE TO  YOU, New York,
Pyramid, IQ jp.
Nada-Yolanda, VISITORS  FROM OTHER PLANETS, Miami,
Mark-Age MetaCenter,  Is74. Order Copies from Mark-Age MetaCenter, 3*7  NE zo Terrace, Miami, 
Florida   y37. free catalogue also available.
Trepanier, Clyde, MAN, CONSCIOUSNESS AND UNDERSTANDING, Annual publication since Ibid. Published  
by the author. Inquire for copies c/o  the author, 14212 NE  7}th St., Redmond Wa. p8o  z.
Van Tassel, George, THE COUNCIL OF SEVEN LIGHTS, Los
Angeles,  DeVorsS,  IQ}8.
Wallace, Baird, THE SPACE STORY AND THE INNER LIGHT,
published  by the author in is7=. Enquire for copies c/o the author,  Box iy8, Grosse Ile, Mich. 
p8I38.
Williamson,  George H.,   and Alfred C.  Bailey, THE   SAUCERS SPEAK, London,  Spearman,  Ip6  .
Williamson,  George H., OTHER TONGUES,  OTHER FLESH,
Hackensack, Wehman, Ip6  .

These two sources below are not contactees as such, but their material is closely related to the 
contactee material and as such is interesting.
Phylos The Tibetan, A DWELLER ON TWO PLANETS, Hackensack, Wehman, Ipjz. !97-

BIBLIOGRAPHY


Phylos The Tibetan, EARTH  DWELLER'S RETURN, Hackensack,
Wehman, 's7-
Probert,  Mark, THE   MAGIC BAG, SAN DIEGO, published  by the
author,  If   o.

D.            COMMENDED  UFO   PERIODICALS:

Aerial Phenomena  Research  Organization  (APRO)  BULLETIN, 3QIO
E. Kleindale Rd., TuCson, Arizona 8i7!-
Center for UFO Studies (CUFOS), International  UFO Reporter, mop Sherman Ave., Suite z  7. 
Evanston, IL 6ozoi.
Mutual UFO Network  (MUFON), MUFON UFO Journal, iO3 Oldtown  Rd., Sequin, TX 7*cii-
Flying Saucer Review, FSR Publications Ltd., West Malling,
Maidstone,  Kent, England.